Mercedes-Benz C-Class 2014 Saloon Owner's Manual PDF ...

Disclaimer

Das folgende PDF-Dokument für dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht sich in allen Sprachversionen nur auf die Fahrzeuge, die für den deutschen Markt bestimmt sind und die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um ein gedrucktes Exemplar für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten.

Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen zu Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug könnten nicht berücksichtigt sein, da Mercedes-Benz seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Stand der Technik anpasst, sowie Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem Fall das gedruckte Exemplar ersetzt, das mit dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

All language versions of the following PDF document for this vehicle model relate solely to vehicles intended for sale on the German market and which correspond to German regulations.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to obtain a printed version for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. This PDF document is the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment. Please therefore note that this PDF document in no way replaces the printed version which was delivered with your vehicle.

Internal use only

Disclaimer

The following version of the Owner‘s Manual describes all models, series and special equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be equipped with all the described functions. This also affects safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would like to receive a printed Owner‘s Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years.

The online Owner‘s Manual is the current and valid version. It is possible that deviations affecting your specific vehicle could not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.

CopyrightAll rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Owner'sManual carefully and familiarise yourself withyour vehicle. For your own safety and a longervehicle life, follow the instructions and warn-ing notices in this manual. Disregarding themmay lead to damage to the vehicle or personalinjury.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may vary according to:RmodelRorderRcountry variantRavailabilityThe illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-cles, the layout of components and controlsdiffers accordingly.Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating itsvehicles to the state of the art.Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROwner's ManualRService BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all ofthe documents on to the new owner.

i You can get to know the important fea-tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-er's Manual on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung

You can also use the C‑Class Guide smart-phone App:

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp may not yet be available in your country.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.

2055844501Z102 É2055844501Z102ÁËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 24

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 89

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 117

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 133

Climate control ................................. 149

Driving and parking .......................... 179

On-board computer and displays .... 291

Stowing and features ....................... 367

Maintenance and care ...................... 389

Breakdown assistance ..................... 405

Wheels and tyres .............................. 427

Technical data ................................... 465

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 2354MATIC off-road system ................... 23512 V socket

see Sockets230 V power socket .......................... 382360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 401Function/notes ............................. 249

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 315Function/notes ................................ 74Important safety notes .................... 75Warning lamp ................................. 355

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63

Activating/deactivating air-recir-culation mode .................................... 165Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 157Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 309Display message ............................ 339Function/notes ............................. 263Towing a trailer .............................. 266

Active Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 309Display message ............................ 338Function/notes ............................. 266Towing a trailer .............................. 269

Active light function ......................... 138Active Light System

Display message ............................ 331Active Parking Assist

Detecting parking spaces .............. 240Display message ............................ 339Exiting a parking space .................. 243

Function/notes ............................. 239Important safety notes .................. 239Parking .......................................... 241Towing a trailer .............................. 239

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 82Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 79Adaptive brake lights .......................... 80Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 235Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS

Display messages .......................... 332Function/notes ............................. 139Switching on/off ........................... 140

AdBlue®Additive ......................................... 473Display message ............................ 336Displaying level and range ............. 307Filling capacity ............................... 473Important safety notes .................. 472Low outside temperatures ............. 473Purity ............................................. 473Topping up ..................................... 204

Additional speedometer ................... 312Additives (engine oil) ........................ 474Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 136AGILITY SELECT switch

Automatic transmission ................. 197Climate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153Climate control(THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156Hybrid operation ............................ 277Manual transmission ...................... 191

Air filter (white display message) .... 336Air pressure

see Tyre pressureAir vents

Important safety notes .................. 177Rear ............................................... 178Setting ........................................... 177Setting the centre air vents ........... 178Setting the side air vents ............... 178

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AirbagIntroduction ..................................... 51PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 46

4 Index

AirbagsDisplay message ............................ 328Front airbag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 52Important safety guidelines ............. 51Kneebag ........................................... 53Sidebag ............................................ 53Triggering ......................................... 60Windowbag ...................................... 53

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 337Function/notes ............................. 234

AIRPANEL (cleaning instructions) .... 400Alarm

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 85Switching off (ATA) .......................... 85Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 85

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-glare film .................................... 387Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Aquaplaning ....................................... 214Armrest

Stowage compartment .................. 370Ashtray ............................................... 379Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 306Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 307ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 395Hiding a service message .............. 395Notes ............................................. 395Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 395Service message ............................ 395Special service requirements ......... 396

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 85Function ........................................... 85Switching off the alarm .................... 85

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 309

Display message ............................ 337Function/notes ............................. 255

Authorised workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 332see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 187Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 186Automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation

Display message ............................ 328Automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system

Operation ......................................... 54Problems ......................................... 59System self-test ............................... 57

Automatic headlamp mode .............. 135Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 196AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 197Changing gear ............................... 196DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 193Display message ............................ 345Drive program display .................... 195Drive programs .............................. 197Driving tips .................................... 196Emergency running mode .............. 200Engaging drive position .................. 195Engaging neutral ............................ 194Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 194Engaging reverse gear ................... 194Engaging the park position ............ 193Kickdown ....................................... 196Manual shifting .............................. 198Overview ........................................ 193Problem (fault) ............................... 200Pulling away ................................... 184Starting the engine ........................ 183Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 198Trailer towing ................................. 196Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 195Transmission positions .................. 195

Index 5

Automatic transmission emer-gency running mode ......................... 200Auxiliary heating/ventilation

Important safety notes .................. 172Problem (display message) ............ 177Remote control .............................. 173Setting the departure time ............. 175Switching on/off (on the centreconsole) ......................................... 173

Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 480

BBag hook ............................................ 374Ball coupling

Folding in ....................................... 286Folding out ..................................... 285

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 75BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Function/notes ................................ 75Important safety notes .................... 76

Battery (high-voltage)see High-voltage battery

Battery (key)Checking .......................................... 94Important safety notes .................... 93Replacing ......................................... 94

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 416Display message ............................ 334Important safety notes .................. 412Jump starting ................................. 418

Beltsee Seat belts

Belt tensionerActivation ......................................... 60

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 309Display message ............................ 339Notes/function .............................. 259Trailer towing ................................. 261see Active Blind Spot Assist

BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................. 472

BlueTEC®Topping up AdBlue® ....................... 204

BonnetActive bonnet (pedestrian protec-tion) ............................................... 390Closing ........................................... 392Display message ............................ 347Important safety notes .................. 390Opening ......................................... 391

BootEmergency release ........................ 105Important safety notes .................. 101Locking separately ......................... 105Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ................................... 104Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................. 102Opening/closing (from the out-side, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .......... 103Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ......................................... 102

Boot lidDisplay message ............................ 347Obstacle recognition ...................... 101Opening dimensions ...................... 476Opening/closing ............................ 101

Boot load (maximum) ........................ 476Box (boot) ........................................... 374Brake

EBD .................................................. 82Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 322Notes ............................................. 475

Brake force distribution, elec-tronic

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsAdaptive ........................................... 80Display message ............................ 330

Brake pedalPedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 44

BrakesABS .................................................. 74Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 79

6 Index

BAS .................................................. 75BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 75Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 475Display message ............................ 315Driving tips .................................... 213Hill start assist ............................... 185HOLD function ............................... 232Important safety notes .................. 213Parking brake ................................ 209RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ................................................. 44RBS warning lamp .......................... 362Warning lamp ................................. 353

Breakdownsee Flat tyresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 32Bulbs

see Replacing bulbsButtons on the steering column ...... 294

CCalling up a fault

see Display messagesCamera

see 360° cameraCar

see VehicleCar key

see KeyCar wash (care) ................................. 396Care

360° camera ................................. 401AIRPANEL ...................................... 400Automatic car wash ....................... 396Carpets .......................................... 404Display ........................................... 402Exhaust pipe .................................. 402Exterior lighting ............................. 400Gear or selector lever .................... 403High-pressure cleaner .................... 398Interior ........................................... 402Matt paintwork .............................. 399Notes ............................................. 396Paint .............................................. 398

Plastic trim .................................... 403Reversing camera .......................... 401Roof lining ...................................... 404Seat belt ........................................ 404Seat cover ..................................... 403Sensors ......................................... 401Steering wheel ............................... 403Trim pieces .................................... 403Washing by hand ........................... 398Wheels ........................................... 399Windows ........................................ 399Wiper blades .................................. 400Wooden trim .................................. 403

CD player/CD changer(on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 303Central locking

Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 91Centre console

Lower section .................................. 38Upper section .................................. 37

Changing bulbsDipped-beam headlamps ............... 143Main-beam headlamps ................... 143Reversing lamps ............................ 144Turn signals (front) ......................... 144Turn signals (rear) .......................... 144

Charge status of high-voltage bat-tery ..................................................... 273Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 68ISOFIX .............................................. 65On the front-passenger seat ............ 66Rearward-facing restraint system .... 67Recommendations ........................... 71Suitable positions ............................ 68Top Tether ....................................... 65

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 72Rear doors ....................................... 73

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 63Restraint systems ............................ 64

Cigarette lighter ................................ 380Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 400Trailer tow hitch ............................. 402

Climate controlAuxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 172

Index 7

Controlling automatically ............... 159Convenience opening/closing(air-recirculation mode) ................. 165Cooling with air dehumidification .. 157Demisting the windows .................. 163Demisting the windscreen ............. 163ECO start/stop function ................ 155ECO start/stop function(THERMATIC) ................................. 152Hybrid vehicle (THERMOTRONIC) .. 155Hybrid vehicles (THERMATIC) ........ 152Important safety notes .................. 150Indicator lamp ................................ 159Information about usingTHERMATIC automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 152Information on usingTHERMOTRONIC automatic cli-mate control .................................. 155Ionisation ....................................... 169Overview of systems ...................... 150Perfume atomizer .......................... 167Pre-entry climate control ............... 169Problem with the rear windowheating .......................................... 165Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 159Rear control panel ......................... 154Remote activation of heating/ventilation systems ........................ 171Setting the air distribution ............. 161Setting the air vents ...................... 177Setting the airflow ......................... 162Setting the climate mode ............... 160Setting the temperature ................ 160Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 165Switching on/off ........................... 156Switching residual heat on/off ...... 166Switching the rear window heat-ing on/off ...................................... 164Switching the synchronisationfunction on and off ........................ 162THERMATIC automatic climatecontrol (2-zone) ............................. 151THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto-matic climate control ..................... 154

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32

Collapsible emergency sparewheel

see Emergency spare wheelCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 308Display message ............................ 322Operation/notes .............................. 77

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 402

Combination switch .......................... 137Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 299Convenience box ............................... 374Convenience closing feature ............ 107Convenience opening feature .......... 107Convenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ........................... 165Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 393Display message ............................ 333Important safety notes .................. 475Temperature display in the instru-ment cluster .................................. 293Temperature display in the on-board computer ............................. 307Warning lamp ................................. 360

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 29Cornering light function


Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 141Crosswind Assist ................................. 82Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 216Deactivating ................................... 218Display message ............................ 342Driving system ............................... 216Important safety notes .................. 216LIM indicator lamp ......................... 216Selecting ........................................ 217Setting a speed .............................. 218

8 Index

Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 217

Cup holderCentre console .............................. 377Important safety notes .................. 376Rear compartment ......................... 378

DData

see Technical dataDaytime driving lights


Dealershipsee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 27Diagnostics connection ...................... 27Diesel .................................................. 471Digital speedometer ......................... 299Dipped-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 143Display message ............................ 329Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) ........................................ 134Setting for driving on the right/left ................................................. 311Switching on/off ........................... 135

DIRECT SELECT leverAutomatic transmission ................. 193

DisplayCharge status of the high-voltagebattery ........................................... 273see Display messagesee Warning and indicator lamps

Display messageDriving systems ............................. 337

Display messagesASSYST PLUS ................................ 395Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 314Engine ............................................ 333General information ....................... 314Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 314Hybrid system ................................ 337Introduction ................................... 314Key ................................................ 350Lights ............................................. 329Safety systems .............................. 315

Tyres .............................................. 343Vehicle ........................................... 345

Distance warning functionFunction/notes ................................ 77

Distance warning signal (warninglamp) .................................................. 363DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 224Activation conditions ..................... 224Cruise control lever ....................... 223Deactivating ................................... 228Display message ............................ 340Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 228Driving tips .................................... 229Function/notes ............................. 222Important safety notes .................. 222Selecting ........................................ 223Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 227

DoorAutomatic locking (switch) ............... 98Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 91Control panel ................................... 40Display message ............................ 347Emergency locking ........................ 100Emergency unlocking ....................... 98Important safety notes .................... 96Opening (from the inside) ................ 97

Drive programDisplay (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 195Manual transmission ...................... 192

Drive programsAutomatic transmission ................. 197

Driver's doorsee Door

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 396Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 134

Driving Assistance package ............. 263Driving on flooded roads .................. 215Driving safety system

BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 75COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 77EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 82

Index 9

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 74ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 82Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 79Adaptive brake lights ....................... 80BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 75Distance warning function ............... 77ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 80ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 80Important safety guidelines ............. 74Overview .......................................... 74PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 82RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ................................................. 44STEER CONTROL ............................. 85

Driving systemDISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 230

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 249Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 263Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 266Active Parking Assist ..................... 239AIRMATIC ...................................... 234ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 255Blind Spot Assist ............................ 259Cruise control ................................ 216Display message ............................ 337Distronic Plus ................................ 222Driving Assistance package ........... 263HOLD function ............................... 232Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 261Lane package ................................ 259PARKTRONIC ................................. 236Reversing camera .......................... 244SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 219Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 256

Driving tipsAquaplaning ................................... 214Automatic transmission ................. 196Brakes ........................................... 213DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 229Downhill gradient ........................... 213Driving abroad ............................... 134Driving in winter ............................. 215Driving on flooded roads ................ 215

Driving on wet roads ...................... 214Fuel ................................................ 211General .......................................... 211Icy road surfaces ........................... 215Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 214New brake disks ............................ 214New brake pads/linings ................ 214Running-in tips ............................... 180Snow chains .................................. 431Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 134The first 1500 km .......................... 180Towing a trailer .............................. 284Wet road surface ........................... 214

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 303

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 126EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ............................. 126EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 374EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 318Function/notes ................................ 82

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 211On-board computer ....................... 298

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 187Automatic engine switch-off .......... 186Climate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153Climate control(THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156Deactivating/activating ................. 187General information ....................... 186Important safety notes .................. 186Introduction ................................... 186

Electric motorPower display ................................ 272see Hybrid operation

Electric motor power display ........... 272Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity ................ 27

10 Index

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63

Emergency keyUnlocking the driver's door .............. 98

Emergency key elementFunction/notes ................................ 93Inserting .......................................... 93Locking vehicle .............................. 100Removing ......................................... 93

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 98

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 461Important safety notes .................. 461Inflating the collapsible sparewheel ............................................. 462Technical data ............................... 464

Emergency unlockingVehicle ............................................. 98

Energy flow display ........................... 273Engine

Display message ............................ 333ECO start/stop function ................ 186Engine number ............................... 468Jump-starting ................................. 418Running irregularly ......................... 189Starting problems .......................... 189Starting the engine with the key .... 183Starting with the Start/Stop but-ton ................................................. 184Stopping ........................................ 208Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 424Warning lamp (engine diagnos-tics) ............................................... 360

Engine electronicsNotes ............................................. 466Problem (fault) ............................... 189

Engine oilAdditives ........................................ 474Checking the oil level ..................... 392Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 392Display message ............................ 335Filling capacity ............................... 474Notes about oil grades ................... 473

Notes on oil level/consumption .... 392Topping up ..................................... 392Viscosity ........................................ 474

Environmental protectionReturning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 24

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Activating/deactivating ................... 81Characteristics ................................. 81Deactivating/activating ................. 307Display message ............................ 315ETS/4ETS ........................................ 80Function/notes ................................ 80General notes .................................. 80Important safety guidelines ............. 80Trailer stabilisation .......................... 82Warning lamp ................................. 357

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 80Exhaust

see Exhaust pipeExhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 402Exhaustive discharging (high-volt-age battery) ....................................... 415Extended overrun mode ................... 280Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 400see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 128Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 129Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 128Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 128Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 129Parking position ............................. 129Resetting ....................................... 128Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 131

FFault message

see Display messagesFeatures ............................................. 376Filler cap

see Fuel filler flapFire extinguisher ............................... 407

Index 11

First-aid kit ......................................... 406Fitting a wheel

Fitting a wheel ............................... 442Lowering the vehicle ...................... 443Preparing the vehicle ..................... 438Raising the vehicle ......................... 439Removing a wheel .......................... 442Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 439

Flat tyreChanging a wheel/fitting thespare wheel ................................... 437MOExtended tyres ......................... 408Preparing the vehicle ..................... 408TIREFIT kit ...................................... 409see Emergency spare wheel

Floormat ............................................. 387Foglamps (extended range) .............. 139Fording

On flooded roads ........................... 215Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 466Two-way radio ................................ 466

Front-passenger front airbag deac-tivation

Display message ............................ 328Front-passenger front airbag deac-tivation system

Operation ......................................... 54Problems ......................................... 59System self-test ............................... 57

FuelAdditives ........................................ 471Consumption information .............. 472Consumption statistics .................. 299Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 298Displaying the range ...................... 298Driving tips .................................... 211E10 ................................................ 470Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Grade (petrol) ................................ 470Important safety notes .................. 469Low outside temperatures ............. 472Problem (malfunction) ................... 203Quality (diesel) ............................... 471Refuelling ....................................... 200Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 470

Fuel consumption (Audio 20) ........... 276Fuel consumption (COMANDOnline) ................................................ 276Fuel filler flap

Opening ......................................... 202Fuel filter (white display message) .. 336Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 298Gauge .............................................. 34

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 470Problem (malfunction) ................... 203

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 426Before changing ............................. 425Dashboard fuse box ....................... 425Fuse box in the boot ...................... 426Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 426Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 425Important safety notes .................. 424

GGenerated electrical energy (Audio20) ...................................................... 276Generated electrical energy(COMAND Online) .............................. 276Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ........... 24Glove compartment .......................... 369

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHANDS-FREE ACCESS ....................... 103Hazard warning lamps ...................... 137Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 121Adjusting (electrically) ................... 122Adjusting (manually) ...................... 122Adjusting (rear) .............................. 122Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 122

Head-up displayAdjusting the brightness ................ 310Function/notes ............................. 295

12 Index

Important safety notes .................. 295Setting the position ....................... 310Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 131Switching on or off ......................... 296Switching the display on/off ......... 310

HeadlampCleaning system (notes) ................ 476

Headlamp flasher .............................. 137Headlamps

Misting up ...................................... 140see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High-pressure cleaners .................... 398High-voltage battery

Charge level ................................... 273Charging ........................................ 416Charging (on-board computer) ....... 274General notes .................................. 43Vehicle fire ....................................... 43

Hill start assist .................................. 185HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 233Deactivating ................................... 233Display message ............................ 340Function/notes ............................. 232

Horn ...................................................... 32Hybrid drive

Displaying the total range .............. 276Generated electrical energy ........... 276

Hybrid operationAGILITY SELECT switch .................. 277Automatic engine start (ECOStart/Stop function) ...................... 280Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) ....................... 280Driving tips .................................... 278ECO start/stop function ................ 279Energy flow display ........................ 273Extended overrun mode ................. 280Fuel consumption .......................... 276General notes ................................ 269Important safety notes .................. 269Manual gearshifting ....................... 278Noiseless start ............................... 277Operating (on-board computer) ..... 273Overrun mode ................................ 280

Overview (instrument cluster) ........ 272Power display (electric motor) ....... 272Problems ....................................... 282Pulling away ................................... 277RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 269Resetting values (Audio 20) ........... 276Resetting values (COMANDOnline) ........................................... 276Starting the engine ........................ 276

Hybrid systemAutomatic deactivation .................... 42Danger of electric shock .................. 42Display message ............................ 337High-voltage battery ........................ 43Important safety notes .................... 42Manual deactivation ......................... 43Opening the bonnet ......................... 44Overview ........................................ 271Problems (malfunctions) ................ 282READY indicator ............................. 276Warning lamp ................................. 362

Hybrid vehicleClimate control (THERMATIC) ........ 153Climate control(THERMOTRONIC) .......................... 156

Hybrid vehiclesImportant safety notes .................... 42

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobiliser .......................................... 85Indicator and warning lamp

Restraint system ............................ 359Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 363Coolant .......................................... 360Engine diagnostics ......................... 360

Indicator lampsDisplay message ............................ 330see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 392

Index 13

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 34Power display ................................ 272Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 292Intelligent Light System

Activating/deactivating ................. 311Display message ............................ 331Overview ........................................ 138Setting the dipped-beam head-lamps for driving on the right/left .. 311

Interior lightingControl ........................................... 141Emergency lighting ........................ 141Overview ........................................ 140Reading lamp ................................. 140

Interior motion sensorDeactivating ..................................... 87Function ........................................... 86Priming ............................................ 86Switching off .................................... 87

Internal combustion engineMalfunction .................................... 282

ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 65

JJack

Storage location ............................ 407Using ............................................. 439

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 418

KKey

Changing the battery ....................... 94Checking the battery ....................... 94Convenience closing feature .......... 108Convenience opening feature ........ 107Display message ............................ 350Door central locking/unlocking ....... 91Emergency key element ................... 93Important safety notes .................... 90KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 92Loss ................................................. 95Modifying the programming ............. 92Overview .......................................... 90Positions (ignition lock) ................. 181

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95Starting the engine ........................ 183

Key positionsKey ................................................ 181Start/Stop button .......................... 181

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing ...................... 108Deactivation ..................................... 91Locking ............................................ 91Removing the Start/Stop button ... 182Unlocking ......................................... 91

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 196

Kneebag ............................................... 53

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 309Display message ............................ 338Function/information .................... 261see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane package ..................................... 259Lashing eyelets ................................. 373Licence plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 331Light sensor (display message) ....... 332Lighting

see LightsLights

Activating/deactivating the Intel-ligent Light System ........................ 311Active light function ....................... 138Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 139Automatic headlamp mode ............ 135Cornering light function ................. 138Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 135Driving abroad ............................... 134Foglamps (extended range) ........... 139Hazard warning lamps ................... 137Headlamp flasher ........................... 137Headlamp range ............................ 136Intelligent Light System (func-tion) ............................................... 138Light switch ................................... 134

14 Index

Main-beam headlamps ................... 137Misted up headlamps .................... 140Motorway mode ............................. 138Parking lamps ................................ 136Rear foglamp ................................. 135Setting exterior lighting ................. 134Side lamps ..................................... 136Turn signals ................................... 137see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 216DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 223Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 219

Limiting the speedsee SPEEDTRONIC

Loading guidelines ............................ 368Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 98Emergency locking ........................ 100From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 97

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 123

MM+S tyres ........................................... 430Main-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS .... 139Changing bulbs .............................. 143Display message ............................ 331Switching on/off ........................... 137

Manual transmissionAGILITY SELECT switch .................. 191Drive program ................................ 192Engaging reverse gear ................... 191Gear lever ...................................... 190Pulling away ................................... 184Shift recommendation ................... 191Shifting to neutral .......................... 191Starting the engine ........................ 183

Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .. 399

Memory card (audio) ......................... 303Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exteriormirrors ........................................... 130

Mercedes-Benz ContactInfo call button .............................. 385Roadside Assistance call button .... 385

Mercedes-Benz emergency callsystem

Switch in the overhead controlpanel .............................................. 384

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive360°camera .................................. 249Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 263Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 266Active Parking Assist ..................... 239ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 255Blind Spot Assist ............................ 259DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 222DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 230General notes ................................ 216Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 261PARKTRONIC ................................. 236PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 62PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 62Reversing camera .......................... 244Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 256

Mercedes-Benz Service Centresee Qualified specialist workshop

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 314Messages

see Display messagessee Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signalCleaning ......................................... 400

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in sun visor)

Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 466Installation ..................................... 466Menu (on-board computer) ............ 304

Index 15

Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 386Transmission output (maximum) .... 466

Modifying the programming (key) ..... 92MOExtended tyres ............................. 408Motorway mode ................................ 138MP3

Operating ....................................... 303Multifunction display

Function/notes ............................. 295Permanent display ......................... 312

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 294Overview .......................................... 36

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 300Notes on running in a new vehicle .. 180

OOccupant safety

Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63Children in the vehicle ..................... 63Important safety notes .................... 45Pets in the vehicle ........................... 74PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 62Seat belts ........................................ 47

Odometer ........................................... 298Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

Assistance graphic menu ............... 306Assistance menu ........................... 307Display messages .......................... 314Displaying a service message ........ 395DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 228Factory settings ............................. 313Head-up display ............................. 295Important safety notes .................. 292Instrument cluster menu ............... 312Light menu ..................................... 311Media menu ................................... 302Menu overview .............................. 297Message memory .......................... 314

Navigation menu ............................ 300Operating the TV ............................ 304Operating video DVD ..................... 303Operation ....................................... 294Radio menu ................................... 302Service menu ................................. 306Settings menu ............................... 307Standard display ............................ 298Telephone menu ............................ 304Trip menu ...................................... 298Vehicle menu ................................. 313

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 144Operating instructions

Vehicle equipment ........................... 25Operating mode

Overrun mode ................................ 279Stationary vehicle .......................... 278

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 27Important safety note ...................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Outside temperature display ........... 293Overhead control panel ...................... 39Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 73Overrun mode .................................... 280Overrun mode, extended .................. 280Owner's Manual

Overview .......................................... 25

PPaint code .......................................... 468Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 398Panic alarm .......................................... 44Panorama sliding sunroof

Important safety information ......... 110Opening/closing ............................ 112Problem (malfunction) ................... 115Rain closing feature ....................... 113Resetting ....................................... 114

ParkingHybrid vehicles .............................. 281Important safety notes .................. 207Parking brake ................................ 209

16 Index

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 129Reversing camera .......................... 244see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 239see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 318Electric parking brake .................... 209Warning lamp ................................. 359

Parking lampsDisplay message ............................ 331Switching on/off ........................... 136

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 238Driving system ............................... 236Function/notes ............................. 236Important safety notes .................. 236Problem (fault) ............................... 239Sensor range ................................. 236Trailer towing ................................. 236Warning display ............................. 237

PASSENGER AIR BAGIndicator lamps ................................ 46

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamp

Problem (malfunction) ................... 328Perfume atomizer

Operating ....................................... 167Perfume vial ................................... 167Problem (malfunction) ................... 169

Petrol .................................................. 470Pets in the vehicle ............................... 74Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 403Power windows

see Side windowsPre-entry climate control

Problem (Malfunction) ................... 171PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Operation ......................................... 62

PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupantsafety system)

Display message ............................ 323PRE-SAFE® Brake

Activating/deactivating ................. 309Display message ............................ 323Function/notes ................................ 82Important safety notes .................... 83Warning lamp ................................. 363

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 62Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 85Immobiliser ...................................... 85Interior motion sensor ..................... 86Tow-away protection ........................ 86

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 24

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 184Hill start assist ............................... 185Hybrid operation ............................ 277Manual transmission ...................... 184Trailer ............................................ 185

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 27

RRadiator cover ................................... 392Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 302Radio-based vehicle components

Declaration of conformity ................ 27Rain closing feature

Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 113Sliding sunroof ............................... 112

RBS (Recuperative Brake System)Driving safety systems ..................... 44Important safety notes .................... 44Warning lamp ................................. 362

Reading lamp ..................................... 140READY indicator ................................ 276Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 178

Index 17

Setting the airflow ......................... 162Setting the temperature ................ 160

Rear foglampDisplay message ............................ 331Switching on/off ........................... 135

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear seatDisplay message ............................ 347

Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 372Rear window blind ............................ 379Rear window heating

Problem (fault) ............................... 165Switching on/off ........................... 164

Rear-compartment seat belt sta-tus indicator ........................................ 50Rear-view mirror

Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 129Dipping (manual) ........................... 127

Recuperation display ........................ 298Refuelling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 34Important safety notes .................. 200Refuelling process ......................... 201see Fuel

Remote controlAuxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 173Changing the batteries (auxiliaryheating) ......................................... 175

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 141Important safety notes .................. 142Overview of bulb types .................. 142Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 143

Replacing the battery (auxiliaryheating remote control) .................... 175Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 335Warning lamp ................................. 360

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 166Restraint system

Display message ............................ 325Introduction ..................................... 44

Warning lamp ................................. 359Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Rev counter ........................................ 293Reverse gear

Engaging (manual transmission) .... 191Reversing camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 401Function/notes ............................. 244Switching on/off ........................... 245

Reversing featurePanorama sliding sunroof .............. 111Roller sunblinds ............................. 113Side windows ................................. 106Sliding sunroof ............................... 111

Reversing functionBoot lid .......................................... 101

Reversing lampChanging bulbs .............................. 144

Reversing lamp (display message) .. 331Roller sunblind

Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 113Rear window .................................. 379

Roller sunblinds (panorama slidingsunroof)

Operating ....................................... 114Roof carrier ........................................ 376Roof lining and carpets (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 404Roof load (maximum) ........................ 476

SSafety

Automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system .............. 54Child restraint systems .................... 64Children in the vehicle ..................... 63see Operating safety

Safety notesHybrid vehicles ................................ 42

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltCentre rear-compartment seat ........ 49Correct usage .................................. 48

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 50

18 Index

Adjusting the height ......................... 49Cleaning ......................................... 404Display message ............................ 324Fastening ......................................... 49Important safety guidelines ............. 47Introduction ..................................... 47Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 50Releasing ......................................... 49Warning lamp ................................. 351Warning lamp (function) ................... 50

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 121Adjusting (manually and electri-cally) .............................................. 120Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 123Adjusting the head restraint .......... 121Cleaning the cover ......................... 403Correct driver's seat position ........ 118Important safety notes .................. 119Seat heating .................................. 123Seat heating problem .................... 124Seat ventilation .............................. 124Seat ventilation problem ................ 125Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 131Switching seat heating on/off ....... 123Switching the seat ventilation on/off .................................................. 124

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 403see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 401Service

see ASSYST PLUSService Centre

see Qualified specialist workshopService menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 306Service products

AdBlue® special additives .............. 472Brake fluid ..................................... 475Coolant (engine) ............................ 475Engine oil ....................................... 473Fuel ................................................ 468Important safety notes .................. 468Washer fluid ................................... 476

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 313On-board computer ....................... 307

Shifting to neutral (manual trans-mission) ............................................. 191Side lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 136Side windows

Convenience closing ...................... 107Convenience opening .................... 107Important safety notes .................. 106Opening/closing ............................ 106Problem (malfunction) ................... 110Resetting ....................................... 108

Sidebag ................................................ 53Sliding sunroof

Opening/closing ............................ 111Rain closing feature ....................... 112Resetting ....................................... 112see Panorama sliding sunroof

Snow chains ...................................... 431Sockets

Centre console .............................. 381General notes ................................ 381Rear compartment ......................... 382

Specialist workshop ............................ 27Spectacles compartment ................. 369Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 312Digital ............................................ 299In the Instrument cluster ................. 34Segments ...................................... 293Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 312see Instrument cluster

SPEEDTRONICDeactivating variable ..................... 221Display message ............................ 341Function/notes ............................. 219Important safety notes .................. 219LIM indicator lamp ......................... 219Permanent ..................................... 221Selecting ........................................ 220Storing the current speed .............. 220

Index 19

Variable ......................................... 219SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem)

Warning lamp ................................. 282Start/Stop button

Starting the engine ........................ 184Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop functionStarting (engine) ................................ 183Stationary vehicle ............................. 278STEER CONTROL .................................. 85Steering

Warning lamps ............................... 365Steering (display message) .............. 349Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 342Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 126Adjusting (manually) ...................... 125Button overview ............................... 36Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 294Cleaning ......................................... 403EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 126Gearshift paddles ........................... 198Important safety notes .................. 125Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 131

Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 198Stowage areas ................................... 368Stowage compartment

Map pockets .................................. 370Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 370Centre console .............................. 369Cup holder ..................................... 376Door ............................................... 370Glove compartment ....................... 369Important safety information ......... 368Rear ............................................... 370Spectacles compartment ............... 369

Stowage net ....................................... 370Stowage space

Stowage net ................................... 370

Stowage well beneath the bootfloor .................................................... 375Summer tyres

In winter ........................................ 430Sun blind

Rear side windows ......................... 378Sun visor ............................................ 378Suspension tuning

AIRMATIC ...................................... 235Switching the auxiliary heating/ventilation

On/off ........................................... 173

TTail lamps

Display message ............................ 330see Lights

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 468Emergency spare wheel ................. 464Information .................................... 466Trailer loads ................................... 478Tyres/wheels ................................. 444Vehicle data ................................... 476

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 305Display message ............................ 349Introduction ................................... 304Menu (on-board computer) ............ 304Number from the phone book ........ 305Redialling ....................................... 306Rejecting/ending a call ................. 305Telephone compartment ................ 370

TemperatureCoolant (display in the instrumentcluster) .......................................... 293Coolant (display in the on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 307Outside temperature ...................... 293Setting (climate control) ................ 160

TEMPOMATFunction/notes ............................. 216

Through-loading feature ................... 371TIREFIT kit .......................................... 409Top Tether ............................................ 65Total distance recorder .................... 298

20 Index

Tow-away protectionActivating ......................................... 86Deactivating ..................................... 86Function ........................................... 86

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 424Important safety notes .................. 420

TowingImportant safety notes .................. 420Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 423With the rear axle raised ................ 422

Towing a trailerActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 266Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 269Active Parking Assist ..................... 239Axle load, permissible .................... 480Bulb failure indicator for LEDlamps ............................................. 287ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 82General notes ................................ 284Pulling away with a trailer .............. 185Trailer tow hitch display message .. 347

Towing awayFitting the towing eye .................... 422Removing the towing eye ............... 422With both axles on the ground ....... 422

Towing eye ......................................... 407Traffic Sign Assist

Activating ....................................... 257Activating/deactivating the warn-ing function .................................... 308Display message ............................ 340Function/notes ............................. 256Important safety notes .................. 257Instrument cluster display ............. 257

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer towing7-pin connector ............................. 287Blind Spot Assist ............................ 261Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 402Coupling up a trailer ...................... 286Decoupling a trailer ....................... 286Driving tips .................................... 284Folding in the ball coupling ............ 286Folding out the ball coupling .......... 285Important safety notes .................. 283

Lights display message .................. 329Mounting dimensions .................... 477Parktronic ...................................... 236Power supply ................................. 287Problem (fault) ............................... 289Trailer loads ................................... 478

Transfer case ..................................... 200Transmission

see Automatic transmissionsee Manual transmission

Transmission position display ......... 195Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 195Transporting the vehicle .................. 423Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 403Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 299Trip meter

Calling up ....................................... 298Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 299

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 144Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 144Switching on/off ........................... 137

TVOperating (on-board computer) ..... 304

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 466Installation ..................................... 466Transmission output (maximum) .... 466

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

Tyre pressureCalling up (on-board computer) ..... 433Display message ............................ 343Important safety notes .................. 433Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 411Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 411Recommended ............................... 432

Tyre pressure loss warningGeneral notes ................................ 436Important safety notes .................. 436Restarting ...................................... 437

Tyre pressure monitorChecking the tyre pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 434

Index 21

Function/notes ............................. 433General notes ................................ 433Important safety notes .................. 434Radio type approval for the tyrepressure monitor ........................... 436Restarting ...................................... 435Warning lamp ................................. 364Warning message .......................... 435

TyresChanging a wheel .......................... 437Checking ........................................ 429Direction of rotation ...................... 438Display message ............................ 343Important safety notes .................. 428MOExtended tyres ......................... 430Replacing ....................................... 438Service life ..................................... 429Storing ........................................... 438Summer tyres in winter ................. 430Tyre size (data) .............................. 444Tyre tread ...................................... 429Wheel and tyre combinations ........ 445see Flat tyre

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 98From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 97

VVanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 378Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 28Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 345Electronics ..................................... 466Equipment ....................................... 25Implied warranty .............................. 28Individual settings .......................... 307Leaving parked up ......................... 211Locking (in an emergency) ............. 100Locking (key) ................................... 91Lowering ........................................ 443Operating safety .............................. 25Pulling away ................................... 184Raising ........................................... 439

Registration ..................................... 28Securing from rolling away ............ 439Towing away .................................. 420Transporting .................................. 423Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 98Unlocking (key) ................................ 91Vehicle data ................................... 476

Vehicle dataBoot load (maximum) ..................... 476Roof load (maximum) ..................... 476

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 476Vehicle emergency locking .............. 100Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 468Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 234Display message ............................ 337

Vehicle maintenancesee ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit .................................. 407Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 303VIN ...................................................... 468

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 355Brakes ........................................... 353Distance warning signal ................. 363ESP® .............................................. 357ESP® OFF ....................................... 358Hybrid system ................................ 362LIM (cruise control) ........................ 216LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 223LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 219Overview .......................................... 35Parking brake ................................ 359PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 46RBS (Recuperative Brake Sys-tem) ............................................... 362Reserve fuel ................................... 360Seat belt ........................................ 351SRS ................................................ 282Steering ......................................... 365Tyre pressure monitor ................... 364

Warning triangle ................................ 406

22 Index

WarningsStickers ........................................... 42

Washer fluidDisplay message ............................ 349

Wheel and tyre combinationssee Tyres

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 443Wheel chock ...................................... 439Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 437Changing/replacing ....................... 438Checking ........................................ 429Cleaning ......................................... 399Emergency spare wheel ................. 461Fitting a new wheel ........................ 442Fitting a wheel ............................... 438Important safety notes .................. 428Removing a wheel .......................... 442Storing ........................................... 438Tightening torque ........................... 443Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 444

WindowbagDisplay message ............................ 326Operation ......................................... 53

WindowsCleaning ......................................... 399see Side windows

WindscreenDemisting ...................................... 163

Windscreen washer fluidsee Windscreen washer system

Windscreen washer systemNotes ............................................. 476Topping up ..................................... 394

Windscreen wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 148Replacing the wiper blades ............ 145Switching on/off ........................... 145

Winter operationImportant safety notes .................. 430Radiator cover ............................... 392Slippery road surfaces ................... 215Snow chains .................................. 431Summer tyres ................................ 430

Winter tyresLimiting the speed (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 313M+S tyres ...................................... 430

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 400Important safety notes .................. 145Replacing ....................................... 145Replacing (windscreen) .................. 146

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 403Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 23

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.Our objectives are to use the natural resour-ces which form the basis of our existence onthis planet sparingly and in a manner whichtakes the requirements of both nature andhumanity into consideration.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally-responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tyre wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. Therefore,please bear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips, as these increase fuelconsumption.Robserve the correct tyre pressure.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in thevehicle.Rremove the roof rack once you no longerneed it.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Rall maintenance work should be carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rmonitor the vehicle's fuel consumption.

H Environmental noteHave defective high-voltage batteries dis-posed of in an environmentally responsiblemanner. Consult a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre forthis purpose.

Returning an end-of-life vehicleEU countries only:Mercedes-Benzwill take back your old vehicleto dispose of it in an environmentally-respon-sible manner in accordance with the Euro-pean Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Direc-tive.There is a network of return points and dis-assembly plants available. You can returnyour vehicle to these plants free of charge.This makes a valuable contribution to therecycling process and the conservation ofresources.For further information on recycling old vehi-cles, recovery and the terms of the policy,visit the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. For these, the same war-ranty applies as for new parts.

24 Introduction

! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as wellas control units and sensors for theserestraint systems, may be installed in thefollowing areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboardRinstrument clusterRcentre consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have accessories retrofitted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tyres andwheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tyres, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-version parts and accessories that have beenspecifically approved for your vehicle for theirreliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benztherefore accepts no responsibility for theuse of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles,even if they have been officially approved orindependently approved by a testing centre.In Germany, certain parts are only officiallyapproved for installation or modification ifthey comply with legal requirements. Thisalso applies to some other countries. All gen-uine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approvalrequirements. The use of non-approved parts

may invalidate the vehicle's general operatingpermit.This is the case:Rif they cause a change of the vehicle typefrom that for which the vehicle's generaloperating permit was grantedRif other road users could be endangeredRif the emission or noise levels are adverselyaffected

Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 468).

Owner's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipmentavailable for your vehicle at the time of pub-lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Note that yourvehicle may not be fitted with all featuresdescribed. This is also the case for systemsand functions relevant to safety. Therefore,the equipment on your vehiclemay differ fromthat in the descriptions and illustrations.The original purchase contract documenta-tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of thesystems in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet areimportant documents and should kept in thevehicle.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or necessary repairs car-

Introduction 25

Z

ried out, this could result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as necessary repairs car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contact withhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring could affect theirfunction and/or the operation of other net-worked components. This could in particularalso be the case for systems relevant tosafety. They might not function properly any-more and/or jeopardise the operationalsafety of the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of an accident and injury.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.Always have work on electrical and electroniccomponents carried out at a qualified special-ist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highkerb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. akerb or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres couldbe damagedwithout the damage being visi-ble. Components damaged in this way canunexpectedly fail or, in the case of an acci-dent, no longer withstand the strain theyare designed for.If the underbody panelling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody panelling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If, upon con-tinuing your journey, you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engineand an electric motor. The voltage supply foroperating the vehicle electrically is providedby the vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys-tem.

G DANGERThe vehicle's high voltage electrical system isunder high voltage. If you modify componentsin the vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemor touch damaged components, you may beelectrocuted. The components in the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system may bedamaged in an accident, although the damageis not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury.Do not touch any high-voltage componentsafter an accident and never modify the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system. Have thevehicle towed away after an accident and thevehicle's high-voltage electrical systemchecked by a qualified specialist workshop.

The components of the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system are marked with yellow

26 Introduction

warning stickers. The cables of the vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical system are orange.Vehicles with an electric motor generate sig-nificantly less noise than vehicles with inter-nal combustion engines. As a result, in certainsituations your vehicle may not be heard byother road users. This can happen, for exam-ple, when you are parking and your vehicle isnot seen by other road users. This requiresyou to adopt a particularly anticipatory drivingstyle, as it is necessary to allow for the pos-sibility that other road users may behaveunpredictably.

Declarations of conformity

Wireless vehicle componentsThe following information applies to all com-ponents of the vehicle and the informationsystems and communication devices integra-ted into the vehicle which receive and/ortransmit radio waves:The components of this vehicle that receiveand/or transmit radio waves are compliantwith the basic requirements and all other rel-evant conditions of Directive 1999/5/EC.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Electromagnetic compatibilityThe electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi-cle components has been checked and certi-fied according to the currently valid version ofRegulation ECE-R 10.

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it can affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. This may

affect the operating safety of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell may restrictthe clearance around the pedals or block adepressed pedal. This jeopardises the oper-ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatthey do not get into the driver's footwell.Always fit the floormats securely and as pre-scribed in order to ensure that there is alwayssufficient room for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place several floor-mats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopA qualified specialist workshop has the nec-essary special skills, tools and qualificationsto correctly carry out any necessary work onyour vehicle. This particularly applies to workrelevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Service Booklet.Always have the following work carried out ata qualified specialist workshop:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications, installations and conver-sions

Introduction 27

Z

Rwork on electronic componentsRwork on the hybrid systemMercedes-Benz recommends that you use aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Vehicle registrationMercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centresto carry out technical inspections on certainvehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle isimproved as a result of the inspection.Mercedes-Benz can only inform you aboutvehicle checks if it has your registration data.It is possible that your vehicle has not yetbeen registered in your name in the followingcases:Rif your vehicle was not purchased at anauthorised specialist dealer.Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined ata Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possibleabout any change in address or vehicle own-ership. You can do this at a Mercedes-BenzService Centre, for example.

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognise certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe technical data in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Implied warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicle

as well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions are not covered either byMercedes-Benz implied warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

A wide range of electronic components inyour vehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateReventsRfaultsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system compo-nents, e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's status messages and those ofits individual components, e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/speed, deceleration inmovement, lateral acceleration, accelera-tor pedal positionRmalfunctions and defects in important sys-tem components, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditionsin special driving situations, e.g. airbagdeployment, intervention of stability con-trol systemsRambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-ture

This data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in detecting and rectifying faults anddefectsRanalyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimise vehicle functions

28 Introduction

The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamem-ory and fault data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarranty eventsRquality assuranceIt is read by employees of the service network(including manufacturers) using special diag-nostic testers. More detailed information isobtained from it, if required.After a fault has been rectified, the informa-tion is deleted from the fault memory or iscontinually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations areconceivable in which this technical data, inconnection with other information (if neces-sary, under consultation with an authorisedexpert), could be traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have beencontractually agreed upon with the customerallow certain vehicle data to be conveyed bythe vehicle as well. The additional functionsinclude, for example, vehicle location in caseof an emergency.

Copyright information

General notesInformation on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 29

Z

Cockpit ................................................. 32Instrument cluster .............................. 34Multifunction steering wheel ............. 36Centre console .................................... 37Overhead control panel ...................... 39Door control panel .............................. 40

31

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel gearshiftpaddles 198

; Combination switch 137

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 34

A DIRECT SELECT lever 193

B Climate control systems 150

C Overhead control panel 39

D Control panel for COMANDOnline and vehicle func-tions 37

E Ignition lock 181Start/Stop button 181

F Adjusts the steering wheel 125

G Cruise control lever 216

Function Page

H Electric parking brake 209

I Diagnostics connection 27

J Opens the bonnet 391

K Light switch 134

L Control panel for:Activating Steering Assist 230Activating Active LaneKeeping Assist 266Deactivating PARKTRONIC 236Switching on 360° camera 249Switching on the head-updisplay 295Vehicles without a driverassistance system: map/coin holder

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Function Page

: Overhead control panel 39

; Climate control systems 150

= Combination switch 137

? Instrument cluster 34

A Horn

B DIRECT SELECT lever 193

C Steering wheel gearshiftpaddles 198

D Control panel for:Activating Steering Assist 230Activating Active LaneKeeping Assist 266Deactivating PARKTRONIC 236Switching on 360° camera 249Switching on the head-updisplay 295Vehicles without a driverassistance systems: map/coin holder

Function Page

E Light switch 134

F Opens the bonnet 391

G Diagnostics connection 27

H Electric parking brake 209

I Ignition lock 181Start/Stop button 181

J Adjusts the steering wheel 125

K Cruise control lever 216

L Control panel for COMANDOnline and vehicle func-tions 37

Cockpit 33

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

i Instrument cluster: kilometres

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Multifunction display 295

Function Page

= Rev counter 293

? Coolant temperature gauge 293

A Fuel gauge

i Information on the energy flow displayand power display for electric motors inhybrid vehicles can be found in the "Hybriddrive" section (Y page 272).

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: å ESP® OFF 357

; ÷ ESP® 357

= · Distance warning 363

? Ð Power steering 365

A #! Turn signals 137

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 359

C ! ABS 355

D ; Engine diagnostics 360

E % Diesel engine: pre-glow 183

F ! Electric parking brake(red) 359

G J Brakes (red) 353

H ? Coolant 360

Function Page

I J Brakes (yellow) 353

J 6 Restraint system 44

K ü Seat belt 351

L K Main-beam head-lamps 137

M L Dipped-beam head-lamps 135

N 8 Reserve fuel 360

O T Side lamps, licenceplate and instrument clus-ter lighting 136

P N This lamphas no func-tion

Q R Rear foglamp 135

R h Tyre pressuremonitor 364

i Information on warning and indicatorlamps in hybrid vehicles can be found in the"Hybrid drive" section (Y page 272).

Instrument cluster 35

Ataglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 295

; Audio 20/COMAND Onlinedisplay; see the separateoperating instructions

= ~

Rejects or ends a call 304Exits telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Muteó

Switches on LINGUA-TRONIC, see the separateoperating instructions

Function Page

? ò

Calls up a main menu9:

Selects a menu/submenuor scrolls through lists 294a

Confirms the selection 294Hides display messages 314%

Back 294ñ

Switches off LINGUA-TRONIC, see the separateoperating instructions

36 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Centre console

Centre console, upper section

Function Page

: Climate control systems 150

; £ Hazard warninglamps 137

= Vehicle functions/systemsettings button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

? Telephone button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

A PASSENGER AIRBAG indi-cator lamp 46ATA indicator lamp 85

Function Page

B Analogue clock

C Media button (see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions)

D Radio button (see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions)

E Navigation button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

F þ Inserts/ejects aCD/DVD (see the separateoperating instructions)

Centre console 37

Ataglance

Centre console, lower section

i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 368Ashtray 379Cigarette lighter 380Power socket 381Cup holders 376

; Adjusts/mutes the volume(see the separate operatinginstructions)

= Switches audio/COMANDOnline on/off (see the sep-arate operating instruc-tions)

? è ECO start/stop func-tion 186

A Touchpad (see the separateoperating instructions)

Function Page

B Stowage compartment 368

C u Rear window rollersunblind 379

D É Sets the vehicle level 234

E AGILITY SELECT switch 197

F Back button (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

G Audio 20/COMAND con-troller (see the separateoperating instructions)

H g Switches to thefavourites button (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

38 Centre consoleAt

aglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 140

; | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 141

= G SOS button(Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call system) 384

? c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 141

A u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 141

B p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 140

Function Page

C ï MB Info call button(Mercedes-Benz Contact) 385

D Spectacles compartment 369

E 3 Opens/closes thepanorama sliding sunroof 112Opens/closes the rollersunblinds 113

F Rear-view mirror 127

G F Breakdown assis-tance call button(Mercedes-Benz Contact) 385

Overhead control panel 39

Ataglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 130

; Adjusts the seats electri-cally 121

= c Seat heating 123

? s Seat ventilation 124

A Opens the door 97

B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 97

C W Opens/closes therear left side window 106

D WOpens/closes the leftside window 106

Function Page

E 7Zª\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 128

F W Opens/closes theright side window 106

G W Opens/closes therear right side window 106

H n Override feature forthe controls in the rearcompartment 73

I p Opens/closes theboot lid 104

40 Door control panelAt

aglance

Useful information .............................. 42Hybrid vehicles ................................... 42Panic alarm .......................................... 44Occupant safety .................................. 44Children in the vehicle ........................ 63Pets in the vehicle ............................... 74Driving safety systems ....................... 74Protection against theft ..................... 85

41

Safety

Useful information

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-els, series and optional equipment for yourvehicle that were available at the time ofgoing to press. National variations are pos-sible. Note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all of the functions descri-bed. This is also the case for systems andfunctions relevant to safety.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops: (Y page 27).

Hybrid vehicles

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel-efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor.


Danger of electric shock


When towing a vehicle after an accident, besure to observe the following sections:RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 423)RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised(Y page 422)RTowing the vehicle with both axles on theground (Y page 422)

Read the safety instructions on towing andtow-starting (Y page 420).

All components of the hybrid system aremarked with yellow warning stickers thatwarn you of the danger of high voltage. Thecables of the vehicle's high-voltage electricalsystem are orange in colour.The ignition must be switched off when car-rying out general tasks, such as changingbulbs or checking the coolant level.

Automatic deactivation of the hybridsystem

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This caneffect belt tensioners or airbags, for example.In addition, the vehicle's high-voltage electri-cal system may not be deactivated as inten-ded in the event of an accident. Touchingdamaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system could result in anelectric shock. There is an increased risk ofinjury, possibly even fatal.

42 Hybrid vehiclesSafety

Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. After an accident, immediatelyswitch the ignition off and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

If components of the restraint system areactivated during an accident, the hybrid sys-tem is automatically deactivated.The hybrid system is not activated when thevehicle is started if:Ra short circuit is detected in the hybrid sys-tem.Ra hybrid system electrical connection isdisconnected.

This ensures that you do not come into con-tact with high voltage.

Manual deactivation of the hybrid sys-temThe hybrid system can be deactivated man-ually using the high voltage switch-off device.

! To prevent damage to the hybrid systemplease observe the following instructions:Ronly deactivate the hybrid system man-ually in the following situations.Rwork on the hybrid system may only becarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop, even when it has been deactivatedmanually.

Rif the 6 restraint system warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up after anaccident.Rif the vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after anaccident, and the restraint system compo-nents were not activated.Rif the vehicle is badly damaged and has tobe towed or transported.

X If possible, move the vehicle out of thedanger zone: shift the automatic transmis-sion into position N.

X Release the electric parking brake.X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park itsafely.

Get assistance from others if necessary.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning. There is therefore a risk of beinglocked out if the vehicle is being pushed ortested on a dynamometer.X Switch the ignition off.X Shift the automatic transmission to parkposition P.Apply the electric parking brake(Y page 209).Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway (Y page 439).

X To use the high-voltage switch-offdevice: open the bonnet.

X Press release clip: in the direction of thearrow and pull it out.

X Pull high voltage switch-off device; apartuntil it engages in the stop position.

High-voltage battery

G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery could exceeda critical value. In this case, flammable gasescapes through a vent valve in the vehicle'sunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger area immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

Hybrid vehicles 43

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehi-cle standing idle for lengthy periods candamage the high-voltage battery.If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods, runit for a fewminutes once every six weeks tocharge up the high-voltage battery.During the charging process, switch off allelectrical consumers, e.g. the automaticclimate control or the seat heating.

Information on charging the high-voltage bat-tery (Y page 416).

Engine compartmentBefore opening the bonnet:X Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to parkposition P.

X Switch the ignition off.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Observe the warning notes on the risk ofelectric shock (Y page 42).

X Observe the warning notes about the bon-net (Y page 391).

RBS driving safety system (Recupera-tive Brake System)RBS supports you when braking with an elec-tronically-controlled brake boost mode and

enables the recovery of kinetic energy (recu-peration).For further information on the RBS system(Y page 269).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: forapproximately one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Press the Start/Stop button.The key must be in the vehicle.

The panic alarm function is only available incertain countries.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle's interior in the event of anaccident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.

44 Occupant safetySafety

The restraint system includes the:Rseat belt systemRairbagsRchild restraint systemRchild seat securing systemThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlyoffer protection if all vehicle occupantsalways:Rhave the seat belt correctly fastened(Y page 48)Rhave the seat and head restraint adjustedproperly (Y page 119)

As the driver, you must also make sure thatthe steering wheel is also adjusted properly.Observe the information on the correct driv-er's seat position (Y page 118).In addition, you must make sure that the air-bags can inflate properly if they are deployed(Y page 51).An airbag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt and, as an additional safety device,increases protection for vehicle occupants inapplicable accident situations. The airbagsare not deployed, for example, in the event ofan accident in which sufficient protection isoffered by the seat belt. In addition, onlythose airbags, which in the applicable acci-dent situations offer additional protection,are deployed in the event of an accident.However, the seat belt and airbag generallydo not protect against objects penetratingthe vehicle from the outside.Information on how the restraint systemoperates can be found under "Deployment ofbelt tensioners and airbags" (Y page 60).See "Children in the vehicle" for further infor-mation on children travelling in the vehicle aswell as on child restraint systems(Y page 63).


G WARNINGIf the restraint system is modified, it may nolonger work as intended. The restraint systemmay then not perform its intended protectivefunction by failing in an accident or triggeringunexpectedly, for example. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Nevermodify parts of the restraint system.Donot attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.

If it is necessary tomodify an airbag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorised Mercedes-Benz Centre.

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the engine is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is runningAll vehicles, except hybrid vehicles:

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This caneffect belt tensioners or airbags, for example.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

There is an increased risk of serious or evenfatal injuries.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Hybrid vehicles:

G DANGERIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident with ahigh rate of vehicle deceleration. This caneffect belt tensioners or airbags, for example.In addition, the vehicle's high-voltage electri-cal system may not be deactivated as inten-ded in the event of an accident. Touchingdamaged components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system could result in anelectric shock. There is an increased risk ofinjury, possibly even fatal.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. After an accident, immediatelyswitch the ignition off and remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp:and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp; are part of the deactivation systemofthe front-passenger front airbag.

The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front airbag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON: lights up: thefront-passenger front airbag is enabled. If,in the case of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger frontairbag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF; lights up: thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. Itwill then not be deployed in the event of anaccident.

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air-bag must either be disabled or enabled; seethe following points. You must make sure ofthis both before and during a journey.RChildren in a rearward-facing childrestraint system: the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled.Always observe the information on the"Automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system" (Y page 54) and on"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 63).RChildren in a forward-facing childrestraint system: depending on the instal-led child restraint system, the age and sizeof the child the front-passenger front airbagis either disabled or enabled. Therefore,always observe the information on the"Automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system" (Y page 54) and on"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 63).RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. Thefront-passenger front airbag is enabled.Depending on the build of the person on thefront-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp may light up. Thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. Itwill then not be deployed in the event of anaccident. In this case, the front-passengerseat should not be used.Always observe the information on the"Automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system" (Y page 54) as well


as on "Seat belts" (Y page 47) and "Air-bags" (Y page 51). There you can also findinformation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionA correctly fastened seatbelt is the mosteffective means of restraining the movementof vehicle occupants in the event of a collisionor if the vehicle overturns. This reduces therisk of vehicle occupants coming into contactwith parts of the vehicle interior or beingthrown from the vehicle. Additionally, theseat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupantin the best position in relation to the airbag.The seat belt system consists of:Rseat beltsRbelt tensioners for the front seat belts andthe outer seat belts in the rearRbelt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled too quickly or sud-denly from the belt outlet, the inertia reel willlock. The belt strap cannot be pulled out fur-ther.In an impact, the belt tensioner tightens thebelt to pull it close to the body. It does not pullthe vehicle occupants back in the direction ofthe seat backrest.The belt tensioner cannot compensate for theseat position being incorrect or for a seat beltbeing routed or worn incorrectly.If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt forcelimiter and this is triggered, the force exertedby the seat belt on the vehicle occupant isreduced.The belt force limiters on the front seats aresynchronised with the front airbags, whichtake on a part of the deceleration force. Thisreduces the forces to which vehicle occu-pants are subjected during an accident.

! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, donot engage the seat belt tongue in the

buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise,the belt tensioner could be triggered in theevent of an accident and would have to bereplaced.


G WARNINGThe seat belt cannot perform its intended pro-tective function if it is not fastened correctly.Also, an improperly fastened seat belt cancause additional injuries in the event of anaccident, sudden braking or abrupt changesof direction. There is an increased risk ofinjury, possibly even fatal.Always make sure that all vehicle occupantsare wearing their seat belt properly and areseated correctly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seatbelt is routedacross the centre of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear theseat belts correctly without a suitable, addi-tional restraint system. The seat belt cannotperform its intended protective function if it isnot fastened correctly. Also, an improperlyfastened seat belt can cause additional inju-ries in the event of an accident, sudden brak-ing or abrupt changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in a suit-able restraint system.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

If a child younger than 12 years old and under1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system(Y page 54)Ralways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle" in thisOwner's Manual (Y page 63) in additionto the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, have been modified, areextremely dirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRmodifications have been made to the belttensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, forexample in the event of an accident. Modifiedseat belt tensioners may be deployed unin-tentionally or fail to be deployed whenrequired. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Never modify safety belts, seat belt tension-ers, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels.Ensure that seat belts are not damaged orworn and are clean. After an accident, havethe seat belts checked immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse seat belts which have been approvedspecifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any suchmodifications could invalidatethe vehicle's general operating permit.

Correct seat belt useObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can forces which occur be dis-tributed across the surface of the seat belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the centre of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the seat belt shouldnot touch your neck nor be routed underyour arm. If possible, adjust the seat belt tothe appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes across your lap astightly and as low down as possible.The lap must always be routed across yourhip joints and never across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, press the lap beltdown into your hip joints and pull tight withthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or spectacles,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushed


between the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 368).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 48).If the centre rear seat belt is being used, alsoobserve the information about the seat beltfor the centre rear seat (Y page 49).

X Adjust the seat (Y page 118).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; intobelt buckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened

automatically; see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 50).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the centre of theshoulder. Adjust the belt sash guide if neces-sary.X To raise: slide the belt guide upwards.The belt guide will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt guide release: andslide the belt guide downwards.

X Let go of belt guide release: in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt guide engages.

Seat belt for the centre rear seatIf the left-hand rear seat backrest is foldeddown and back up again, the rear centre seatbelt may lock. The seat belt can then not bepulled out.X To release the rear centre seat belt: pullthe seat belt out approximately 20 mm atthe belt outlet on the backrest and thenrelease it again.The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing the seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seat

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

mechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfil theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certaintightening force if any slack is detectedbetween the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off using COMAND Online or Audio 20.Information on activating and deactivatingthe seat-belt adjustment function can befound in the Digital Owner's Manual or in the

separate COMAND Online or Audio 20 oper-ating instructions.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder for all vehicle occu-pants to fasten their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. A warning tone mayalso sound.The7 seat belt warning lamp goes out andthe warning tone switches off as soon as thedriver and co-driver have fastened their seatbelts.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see the "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belt" section (Y page 351).

Rear seat belt status indicator

The rear seat belt status indicator is onlyavailable for certain countries.For approximately 30 seconds, the rear seatbelt status indicator informs you which rearseat belt is not fastened.The rear seat belt status indicator appears if:Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx-imately 10 km/h.Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfastentheir seat belts while the vehicle is inmotion.Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle andyou pull away again.


If a rear seat passenger unfastens their seatbelt when travelling at a speed above25 km/h, a short warning tone also sounds.You can also cancel the rear seat belt statusindicator immediately (Y page 314).

Airbags

IntroductionThe installation location of an airbag is iden-tified by the AIRBAG symbol.An airbag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. It is not a replacement for the seat belt.The airbag offers additional protection inapplicable accident situations.Not all airbags are deployed in an accident.The different airbag systems work independ-ently of each other (Y page 60).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to completely rule out arisk of injury caused by an airbag due to thespeed at which the airbag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you deviate from the correct seat position,the airbag cannot perform its intended pro-tective function and can even cause addi-tional injuries when deployed. There is anincreased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.In order to avoid such risks, always ensurethat all vehicle occupants:Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includingpregnant womenRare seated correctly and maintain the fur-thest possible distance from the airbagsRobserve the following notesAlways ensure that there are no objects loca-ted between the airbag and the vehicle occu-pant.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the

seat is in an almost upright position. Thecentre of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the airbag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the air-bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of theairbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 1.50 m tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is travelling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under 12 years ofage and less than 1.50 m tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be fitted tothe rear seats.ROnly secure a child to the front-passengerseat when the front-passenger front airbagis disabled, and only then in a rearward-facing child restraint system. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontairbag is disabled (Y page 46).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system(Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 63) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent the airbag from functioning cor-rectly. Before starting your journey and toavoid risks resulting from the speed of theairbag as it deploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an air-bag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify an airbag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the airbag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an airbag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the airbags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ling, aswell as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. Theairbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the airbags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. This poses an increased riskof injury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-elling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Front airbags

! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the sys-tem to identify the seat as being occupied.In the event of an accident, the restraintsystems on the front-passenger side maybe triggered and have to be replaced.

Driver's airbag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front air-bag; deploys in front of and above the glovecompartment.When deployed on the front seats, the frontairbags offer additional protection for thehead and thorax.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsinform you about the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 46).Front-passenger front airbag; will onlydeploy if:Rthe automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system has detected that thefront-passenger seat is occupied(Y page 54). The PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp lights up (Y page 54)Rthe restraint system predicts a highseverity of an accident


Driver's kneebag

Driver's kneebag: deploys under the steer-ing column. The driver's kneebag is triggeredtogether with the front airbag.The driver's kneebag on the driver's seatoffers additional protection for the thighs,knee and lower leg.

Sidebags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent the deployment of the airbags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the airbags can-not protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the function of theautomatic front-passenger front airbag deac-tivation system could be restricted. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the corresponding seats byMercedes-Benz.

Front sidebags: and rear sidebags;deploy next to the outer bolster of the seatbackrest.When deployed, the sidebag offers additionalthorax protection. However, it does not pro-tect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the sidebag isdeployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.vehicles with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system: the sidebagon the front-passenger side (front) deploysunder the following conditions:Ran occupant is detected on the front-passenger seat orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the sidebag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situa-tion occurs. In this case, deployment is inde-pendent of whether the front-passenger seatis occupied or not.

Windowbags

Windowbags: are integrated into the sideof the roof frame and deployed in the areafrom the A-pillar to the C-pillar.Whendeployed, thewindowbag enhances thelevel of protection for the head. However, itdoes not protect the chest or arms.

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

In the event of a side impact, the windowbagis deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a windowbag may be deployed inother accident situations (Y page 60).

Automatic front-passenger front air-bag deactivation

IntroductionIn order to recognise a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat, the automaticfront-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem categorises the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, thefront-passenger front airbag is either enabledor disabled. If a rearward-facing childrestraint system is fitted to the front-passenger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must light up after thesystem self-test and remain lit. The front-passenger front airbag is disabled.The system does not disable:Rthe sidebagRthe windowbagRthe seat belt tensionerMake sure that your vehicle is equipped withthe automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system (Y page 66). If this isnot the case, always fit the child restraint sys-tem on a suitable rear seat (Y page 68).If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning ofthe child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seatcushion length. The entire base of the childrestraint systemmust always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forwards-facing child restraintsystemmust, as far as possible, be resting onthe backrest of the front-passenger seat. The

child restraint systemmust not touch the roofor be put under strain by the head restraint.Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and thehead restraint position accordingly. Only thenis the correct function of the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation systemguaranteed. Always observe the informationon suitable positioning of the child restraintsystem (Y page 68) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Operation of automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampThe indicator lamps inform you whether thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled orenabled.X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,or turn the key to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out a self-diagnosis.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsmust light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front airbag.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON: lights up: thefront-passenger front airbag is enabled. If,in the case of an accident, all deployment


criteria are met, the front-passenger frontairbag is deployed.RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF; lights up: thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. Itwill then not be deployed in the event of anaccident.

If the status of the front-passenger front air-bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, anairbag display message appears in the instru-ment cluster (Y page 328). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON andPASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lamps. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront airbag both before and during the jour-ney.If there is no child restraint system fitted tothe front-passenger seat, the front-passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation systemmay be influ-enced, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

The front-passenger front airbag may be dis-abled bymistake as a result of these or similaractions. In this case, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up perma-nently. The front-passenger front airbag doesnot then deploy during an accident.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lampis lit, the front-passenger front airbag is disa-bled. It will not be deployed in the event of anaccident and cannot perform its intended pro-tective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come

into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always make sure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and that the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seat.Rthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront airbag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child on the co-driver's seat ina rearward-facing child restraint system andthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up, the co-driver's airbag could bedeployed in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the airbag. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.In this case, always ensure that the co-driver'sairbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp must light up.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIRBAGON indicator lamp lights up, do not installa rearward-facing child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat. Further informationcan be found under "Problems with the auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion system" (Y page 59).

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible and fully retract the seatcushion length. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. The shoul-der belt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the vehicle belt outlet. Ifnecessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwaysobserve the information about suitable posi-tioning of the child restraint system in thisOwner's Manual as well as the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

If the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system detects that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled.But in the case of a child in a rearward-facing child restraint, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp can light up afterthe system self-test and remain lit. This

indicates that the front-passenger front air-bag is enabled. The result of the classifica-tion is dependent on, among other factors,the child restraint system and the child'sbuild. It is recommended that you fit therestraint system to a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild in a forward-facing child restraint sys-tem, either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON orPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit after the systemself-test depending on the result of theclassification. The result of the classifica-tion is dependent on, among other factors,the child restraint system and the child'sbuild.Move the front-passenger seat as far backas possible. Always observe the informa-tion in "Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 66) and in "Suit-able positioning of the child restraint sys-tem" (Y page 68). Alternatively, you canfit the child restraint system to a suitablerear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson with a smaller build (e.g. a teenageror small adult), either the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp lights up and remains lit afterthe system self-test depending on theresult of the classification.- if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicatorlamp lights up, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person with a small build can siton a rear seat.

- if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person with a smaller buildshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person with a build correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp lights up after thesystem self-test and remains lit. This indi-cates that the front-passenger front airbagis enabled.


If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the Vehi-cle" (Y page 63).If the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation system is malfunctioning, thered 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster and the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simulta-neously. The front-passenger front airbag isdisabled in this case and does not deploy dur-ing an accident. Have the system checked assoon as possible by qualified technicians.Consult aMercedes-Benz Service Centre. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use a child restraint sys-tem which has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz in combination with the auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion system.

System self-test

G DANGERIf both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps donot light up during the system self-test, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front airbag might be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with high deceler-ation. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the auto-matic front-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion system checked and repaired immedi-ately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGERAIRBAGOFF indicator lampremains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front airbagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front airbag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seat.Rthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seat belt.Rthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation systemchecked and repaired immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect the func-tion of the automatic front-passenger frontairbag deactivation system. This could resultin the front-passenger front airbag not func-tioning as intended during an accident. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system must

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of therear reclining seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamp display the status of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 54).Further information can be found under"Problems with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system"(Y page 59).


Problems with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivationBe sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 57).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson with a build cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Centre.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RemptyRoccupied with a rear-ward-facing childrestraint system

The automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system ismalfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the childrestraint system.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight to theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do notinstall a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you fit the restraintsystem to a suitable rear seat.

X Have the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem checked as soon as possible at a Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Centre.

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

Deployment of belt tensioners andair-bags


G WARNINGAfter the airbag deploys, the airbag parts arehot. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the airbag parts. Have adeployed airbag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that havebeen deployed are no longer operational andare unable to perform their intended protec-tive function. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic belt tensionerswhich have been triggered immediatelyreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe vehicle towed to a qualified specialistworkshop after an accident. Take this intoaccount, particularly if a seat belt tensionerwas triggered or an airbag was deployed.An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air-bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and asmall amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. In general, the powder released isnot hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffer-ing from asthma or other pulmonary condi-tions. Provided it is safe to do so, you shouldleave the vehicle immediately or open thewindow in order to prevent breathing difficul-ties.

OperationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the seatbelt tensioners in the event of a head-on orrear collision.A seat belt tensioner can only be triggered if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 45)Rthe belt tongue has engaged in the beltbuckle of the respective front seat

The seat belt tensioners in the rear compart-ment are triggered independently of the lockstatus of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects ahigh severity of an accident, in certain head-on collisions, additional components of therestraint system are deployed independentlyof each another:Rfront airbags and driver's kneebagRwindowbag, if the system determines thatdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat belt

On vehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system:depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air-bag is either disabled or enabled. The front-passenger front airbag can only be deployedin an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamp is lit. Observe the informationon the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(Y page 46).Your vehicle has two-stage front airbags. Inthe first deployment stage, the front airbag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of


injuries. The front airbag is fully deployed ifthe second deployment stage is activatedwithin a few milliseconds.The activation threshold for the seat belt ten-sioners and airbags is determined based onthe evaluation of the vehicle's rate of decel-eration or acceleration at various points in thevehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature.The triggering/deployment process shouldtake place in good time at the start of thecollision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an airbag,nor do they provide an indication of airbagdeployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantlywithout an airbag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, an airbag maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.

If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or if the vehicle overturns, theapplicable components of the restraint sys-tem are activated independently of eachother depending on the apparent type of acci-dent. If the system determines that, in thissituation, triggering can offer additional pro-tection, the seat belt tensioners are also trig-gered.RSidebags on the side on which an impactoccurs, independent from the seat belt ten-sioner and seat belt usageVehicles with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem: the sidebag on the front-passengerside (front) deploys under the followingconditions:- an occupant is detected on the front-passenger seat or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindowbag on the side on which an impactoccurs, independent of seat belt usage andregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRWindowbags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations if thevehicle overturns and if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different airbag systems workindependently of each other.How the airbag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration, and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRoverturn

Occupant safety 61

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardous sit-uations.


! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in theevent of an accident cannot be ruled out.Always adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront. Drive carefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severelyRvehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: when a driver assistance system inter-venes powerfully or the radar sensor sys-tem detects an imminent danger of colli-sion in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof andthe side windows are closed so that only asmall gap remains. The panorama slidingsunroof is completely closed.Rvehicles with the memory function for thefront-passenger seat: the front-passenger

seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavourableposition.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.Seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and thelocking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Youwill find information on the convenience func-tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 50).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicleoccupants.


The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE®PLUS intervenes.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene:Rif the vehicle is reversingRwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer andthere is a risk of a rear-end collision

PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform brakingactions while the vehicle is in motion or whenParking Guidance is active.


Function

PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following meas-ures depending on the hazardous situationdetected:RIf the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seatbelts are pre-tensioned.RIf the radar sensor system detects that arear-end collision is imminent:- the rear hazard warning lamps are acti-vated and flash at a higher frequency.

- the brake pressure is increased if thedriver applies the brakes when the vehi-cle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application iscancelled:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed whena gear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-ger detectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intentionto pull away

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, the original settingsare restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the elec-trically adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off

Rvehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emer-gency call system: automatic emergencycallRvehicles with the hybrid drive system: thehybrid system is deactivated

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child younger than 12 years old and under1.50 m in height is travelling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRalways pay attention to the instructionsand safety notes on the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system(Y page 54)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

Children in the vehicle 63

Safety

Z

When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is placed in directsunlight, the parts could become very hot.Children could be suffer burns by touchingthese parts, in particular on the metallic partsof the child restraint system. There is a risk ofinjury.If you and your child leave the vehicle, alwaysmake sure that the child restraint system isnot in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,for example. If the child restraint system hasbeen exposed to direct sunlight, leave it tocool down before securing the child in it.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 47) and the information on the cor-rect use of the seat belt (Y page 48).

Child restraint systemObserve the instructions for correct use ofthe child restraint system (Y page 68).For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use a child restraint sys-tem recommended by Mercedes-Benz(Y page 71).

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is incorrectly fit-ted on the seat position suitable for this pur-pose, it cannot perform its intended protec-tive function. In the event of an accident,sharp braking or a sudden change in direction,the childmay not be held securely. There is anincreased risk of serious or even fatal injuries.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the correct use for the childrestraint system. Make sure that the entiresurface of the child restraint system is restingon the seat surface. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system,e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint sys-tems with the original cover designed forthem. Only replace damaged covers with gen-uine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is fitted incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always fit child restraint systems properly,even if they are not being used. Make surethat you observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage and loads securely under"Loading guidelines" (Y page 368).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems that have been damaged or subjected toa load in an accident cannot perform theirintended protective function. In the event ofan accident, sharp braking or a suddenchange in direction, the child may not be heldsecurely. There is an increased risk of seriousor even fatal injuries.Immediately replace child restraint systemsthat have been damaged or subjected to a

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

load in an accident. Have the child restraintsecuring systems checked in a qualified spe-cialist workshop before fitting a child restraintsystem again.

Securing systems for the child restraint sys-tem are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe ISOFIX securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on "Child restraint systemson the front-passenger seat" (Y page 66).Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz careproducts to clean child restraint systemsrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You canobtain information about this at anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

G WARNINGISOFIX child restraint systems do not offersufficient protective effect for children whoseweight is greater than 22 kg who are securedusing the safety belt integrated in the childrestraint system. The child could, for example,not be restrained correctly in the event of anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only useISOFIX child restraint systems with which thechild is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt.Also secure the child restraint systemwith theTop Tether belt, if available.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sureto observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the instructions for correctuse of the child restraint system(Y page 68).

Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIXchild restraint system is engaged correctly inboth ISOFIX securing rings.

! When fitting the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the centreseat does not get trapped. Otherwise, theseat belt could be damaged.

: ISOFIX securing ringsVehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust therear seat armrest so that ISOFIX securingrings: for the ISOFIX child restraint systemare accessible.X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system onboth ISOFIX securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. ISOFIX securing rings: fortwo ISOFIX child restraint systems are fittedon the left and right of the rear seats.Secure child restraint systems without anISOFIX child seat securing system using theseat belts in the vehicle. When fitting a childrestraint system, be sure to observe the man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions and the instructions for correct use ofthe child restraint system (Y page 68).

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith ISOFIX and the vehicle. It helps reducethe risk of injury even further. If the child


Safety

Z

restraint system is fitted with a Top Tetherbelt, this should always be used.


G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting aTop Tether belt. Observe the lock verificationindicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests sothat they are in an upright position.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points= are fitted inthe rear compartment behind the outer headrestraints on the parcel shelf.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system withTop Tether. Always comply with the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? of Top Tether beltA into Top Tether anchorage=.Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchor-age=.

X If necessary, move head restraint: backdown again slightly (Y page 121).Make sure that you do not interferewith thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat.


Vehicles with the automatic front-passengerfront airbag deactivation system: if it is abso-lutely necessary to fit a child restraint systemto the front-passenger seat, always observethe information on "Automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system"(Y page 54).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ra child restraint system that is not detectedby the automatic front-passenger front air-bag deactivation systemRthe unintentional disabling of the front-passenger front airbagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Please observe the warning notice on thefront-passenger sun visor, see the illustra-tion.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child on the co-driver's seat ina rearward-facing child restraint system andthe PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamplights up, the co-driver's airbag could bedeployed in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the airbag. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.In this case, always ensure that the co-driver'sairbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF indicator lamp must light up.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restrainton a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.If the PASSENGERAIR BAGON indicator lampis lit, the front-passenger front airbag is ena-bled (Y page 46).

Vehicles without the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem

If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle isnot equipped with the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system,this is indicated by a special sticker. Thesticker is affixed to the side of the dashboardon the front-passenger side. The sticker isvisible when you open the front-passengerdoor.In this case, always fit the rearward-facingchild restraint system to a suitable rear seat(Y page 68).Observe the following information under"Rearward-facing child restraint system" and"Forward-facing child restraint system" aswell as information on the suitable position-ing of the child restraint system(Y page 68).

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled. Onlyif the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 46) is thefront-passenger front airbag disabled.


Safety

Z

Always observe the information on suitablepositioning of the child restraint system(Y page 68) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to fit a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Fullyretract the seat cushion length. The entirebase of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must, as far as possible, beresting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmust not touch the roof or be put under strainby the head restraint. Adjust the angle of theseat backrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strapmust be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt outlet. If neces-sary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and thefront-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the information on suitablepositioning of the child restraint system(Y page 68) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions.

Suitable positioning of the childrestraint system

IntroductionOnly child restraint systems which areapproved in accordance with the ECE stand-ard ECE R44 are permitted for use in the vehi-cle.For certain child restraint systems in weightcategories II or III, this canmean that the areaof use is restricted. Themaximum size setting

of the child restraint system is not possibledue to possible contact with the roof."Universal" category child restraint systemscan be recognised by their orange approvallabel and the text "Universal".

Example: approval label on the child restraint sys-tem

"Universal" category child restraint systemscan be used on the seats indicated with U, UFor IUF according to the tables "Suitability ofthe seats for attaching belt-secured childrestraint systems" or "Suitability of the seatsfor attaching an ISOFIX child restraint sys-tem".Semi-universal child restraint systems areindicated by the text "Semi-universal" on theapproval label. These can be used if the vehi-cle and the seat are listed in the child restraintsystemmanufacturer's vehiclemodel list. Formore information, contact the child restraintsystem manufacturer or visit their website.Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat – if it is absolutely necessaryto secure a child in a child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat:X Always pay attention to the instructionsunder "Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat" (Y page 66).There you will find instructions on how tocorrectly route the shoulder belt strap fromthe vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt


guide on the child restraint system(Y page 68).

X Move the front-passenger seat as far backas possible and fully retract the seat cush-ion length.

X Move the backrest to an almost verticalposition.The entire base of the child restraint sys-temmust always rest on the seat cushion ofthe front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forward-facing child restraint systemmust, as far as possible, be resting on thebackrest of the front-passenger seat. Thechild restraint system must not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly. Also observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Move the seat cushion angle to the highest,most vertical position.

Suitability of the seats for attachingbelt-secured child restraint systemsIf you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+or a rearward-facing child restraint system ofcategory I on a rear seat, you must adjust thedriver's or front-passenger seat so that theseat does not touch the child restraint sys-tem.If you use a forward-facing child restraint sys-tem from category I, you must, where possi-ble, dismantle the head restraint of therespective seat (Y page 122). The backrest ofthe child restraint systemmust, as far as pos-sible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.Always observe the notes in the "Childrestraint system" section (Y page 64) and thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.When you remove the child restraint system,you must immediately replace the headrestraint (Y page 121). All vehicle occupantsmust adjust their head restraints correctlybefore beginning the journey.

Legend for the table:X Seat which is unsuitable for children in

this weight categoryU Suitable for child restraint systems in the

"Universal" category that are approvedfor use in this weight category

UF Suitable for forward-facing childrestraint systems that belong to the "Uni-versal" category and are approved foruse in this weight category

L Suitable for child restraint systems asrecommended; see the table "Recom-mended child restraint systems"(Y page 71). Suitable for semi-univer-sal child restraint systems if the vehicleand the seat are listed in the childrestraint system manufacturer's vehiclemodel list.

(▲) The vehicle is equipped with automaticfront-passenger front airbag deactiva-tion. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp must be lit.

(♦) Child restraint systemswith a supportingbracket are not suitable for this seat.

Front-passenger seat

Weight cat-egories

The front-passengerfront air-bag is ena-bled.

The front-passengerfront air-bag is disa-bled. (▲)

Category 0:up to 10 kg

X U, L

Category0+: up to13 kg

X U, L

Category I:9 to 18 kg

UF, L U, L

Category II:15 to 25 kg

U, L U, L

CategoryIII: 22 to36 kg

U, L U, L


Safety

Z

Rear seats

Weight cat-egories

Left, right Centre

Category 0:up to 10 kg

U, L U (♦), L (♦)

Category0+: up to13 kg

U, L U (♦), L (♦)

Category I:9 to 18 kg

U, L U (♦), L (♦)

Category II:15 to 25 kg

U, L X

CategoryIII: 22 to36 kg

U, L X

Suitability of the seats for attachingISOFIX child restraint systemsIf you use a baby car seat of category 0 or 0+or a rearward-facing child restraint system ofcategory I on a rear seat, you must adjust thedriver's or front-passenger seat so that theseat does not touch the child restraint sys-tem.If you use a forward-facing child restraint sys-tem from category I, you must, where possi-ble, dismantle the head restraint of therespective seat (Y page 122). The backrest ofthe child restraint systemmust, as far as pos-sible, lie flat against the backrest of the seat.Always observe the notes in the "Childrestraint system" section (Y page 64) and thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.When you remove the child restraint system,you must immediately replace the headrestraint (Y page 121). All vehicle occupantsmust adjust their head restraints correctlybefore beginning the journey.

Legend for the table:X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for

ISOFIX child restraint systems in thisweight category and/or size category.

IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX childseat securing systems that belong to the"universal" category which are approvedfor use in this weight category.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-tems as recommended; see the follow-ing table of "Recommended childrestraint systems" (Y page 71).Themanufacturer will also recommend asuitable ISOFIX child restraint system.For this, your vehicle and the seat mustbe listed in the child restraint systemmanufacturer's model list. For moreinformation, contact the child restraintsystem manufacturer or visit their web-site.

(♦) If you are using a child restraint systemof size category C (ISO/R3), move thefront seat to the highest position and thefront-seat backrest to an upright posi-tion. Make sure that the seat backrest ofthe front seat does not rest against thechild restraint system.

Carry-cot weight category

Size cate-gory

Equipment Rear seat,left and right

F ISO/L1 X

G ISO/L2 X

Weight category 0: up to 10 kg up toapproximately 6 months

Size cate-gory

Equipment Rear seat,left andright

E ISO/R1 IL


Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg up toapproximately 15 months

Size cate-gory


E ISO/R1 IL

D ISO/R2 IL

C ISO/R3 IL (♦)

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg approx-imately 9 months to 4 years

Size cate-gory


D ISO/R2 IL

C ISO/R3 IL (♦)

B ISO/F2 IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF

A ISO/F3 IUF

The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be put under strain by the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint positionaccordingly. Also observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Recommended child restraint sys-tems

General notesAlways observe the information on "Childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat" (Y page 66) and on "Suitable positioningof the child restraint system" (Y page 68).You can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Recommended child restraint systemsfor attaching with the vehicle seat beltWeight category 0: up to 10 kg; up toapproximately 6 months

Manufac-turer

Britax Römer Britax Römer

Type BABY SAFEplus

BABY SAFEplus II

Approvalnumber(E1 ...)

03 30114604 301146

04 301146

Order num-ber(A 000 ...)

970 10 00Colour code:9H95


Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg; up toapproximately 15 months

Manufac-turer

BritaxRömer

Britax Römer

Type BABYSAFE plus

BABY SAFE plusII

Approvalnumber(E1 ...)

03 30114604 301146

04 301146

Ordernumber(A 000 ...)

970 10 00Colourcode:9H95


Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg; approx-imately 9 months to 4 years

Manufacturer Britax Römer

Type DUO plus

Approval number(E1 ...)

03 30113304 301133

Order number(A 000 ...)

970 16 00Colour code: 9H95


Safety

Z

Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg;approximately 4 to 12 years


Type KIDFIX


04 301198



Before fitting the KIDFIX child restraint sys-tem in the vehicle, always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions. These will also include notes onfixing options.

Recommended "Universal"/"Semi-Uni-versal" category ISOFIX child restraintsystemsCarry-cot weight category

Size categories F, G

Manufacturer –

Type –

Approval number (E1 ...) –

Order number –

Category 0: up to 10 kg

Size category E

Manufacturer –

Type –


Order number –

Category 0+: up to 13 kg

Size categories E D, C

Manufacturer Britax Römer –

Type BABY SAFE plus –

Approval num-ber (E1 ...)

03 30114604 301146

–

Order number B6 6 86 8224Colour code:9H95

–

Category I: 9 to 18 kg

Size categories D, C, B, A

Manufacturer –

Type –


Order number –

Size category B1


Type DUO plus


03 30113304 301133



Child-proof locks


G WARNINGIf children are travelling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example

There is a risk of an accident and injury.


Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are travelling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 73)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 73)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, they may be able to set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineIn addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons (particularly children) are exposedto heat or cold for a prolonged period, there isa risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Neverleave persons (particularly children) unatten-ded in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is placed in directsunlight, the parts could become very hot.Children could be suffer burns by touchingthese parts, in particular on the metallic partsof the child restraint system. There is a risk ofinjury.If you and your child leave the vehicle, alwaysmake sure that the child restraint system isnot in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket,for example. If the child restraint system hasbeen exposed to direct sunlight, leave it tocool down before securing the child in it.

Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-


Safety

Z

er's door. If indicator lamp: is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unsupervised or unse-cured in the vehicle, they may push a buttonor a switch, for example.They could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRswitch vehicle systems on or off, thusendangering other road users

In the event of an accident, sudden braking orabrupt changes of direction, unsecured ani-mals could be flung around the vehicle, injur-ing the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals correctly during ajourney, e.g. in an animal transport box.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 74)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 75)RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (BrakeAssist System PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist) (Y page 75)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(distance warning function and adaptiveBrake Assist) (Y page 77)RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 80)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 80)

REBD (electronic brake force distribution)(Y page 82)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 82)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 82)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 85)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for the distanceto the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed andfor braking in good time. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tyres and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tyres, recommended minimumtyre tread depths etc. (Y page 428).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General notesABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The!ABSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

74 Driving safety systemsSafety


i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 74).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 355) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 315).ABS works from a speed of about8 km/hupwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even when you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal with force until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist)

General notesBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.



G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist

General notes


BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a cam-era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contoursand posture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functionsare restricted or no longer available. The

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

brake system is still available with completebrake boosting effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 76).

BAS PLUS can help you tominimise the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.


G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detec-tion can be impaired.Detection by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inmulti-storey car parks

Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. amotorcycleRa vehicle travelling in front on a differentlineRvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-sor system detection range

Detection by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from thesun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer detects apedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the radar sensor settings and oper-ation checked at a qualified specialist work-shop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage tothe front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windscreen, havethe configuration and operation of the cam-era system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 30 km/h: ifyou depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS isactivated. Braking assistance from BAS PLUSis carried out at the last possible moment.


When driving at a speed above 30 km/h: ifyou depress the brake pedal sharply, BASPLUS automatically increases the brake pres-sure to a degree suited to the traffic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 7 km/h and250 km/h.At speeds of up to approximately 70 km/h,BAS PLUS can react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which movein the detection range of the sensors andare recognised by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer a risk of collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicleRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou activate kickdown

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General notesCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous emergency braking function andadaptive Brake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimise the risk of a collision

with the vehicle in front or reduce the effectsof such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inmulti-storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. amotorcycleRa vehicle travelling in front on a differentlineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemPlease observe the information in the sec-tion on running-in the vehicle(Y page 180).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at slow speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Distance warning function

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 74).


Safety

Z

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation; do not rely on the distance warningfunction alone.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate the distance warning function in theon-board computer (Y page 308).

If the distance warning function is deactiva-ted, theæ symbol appears in the assis-tance graphics display.The distancewarning function can help you tominimise the risk of a collision with the vehi-cle in front or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically.The distance warning function issues a warn-ing at speeds:Rof approximately 30 km/h or more, if, overseveral seconds, the distance maintainedto the vehicle travelling in front is insuffi-

cient. The· distance warning lampthen lights up in the instrument cluster.Rof approximately 7 km/h or more, if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. An inter-mittent warning tone will then sound andthe· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.

X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, thedistance warning function can also react tostationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and the distancewarning function detects a risk of a collision,the system will alert you both visually andacoustically.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentVehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: theautonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:R7 - 105 km/h for moving objectsR7 - 50 km/h for stationary objects


Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the auton-omous braking function is available in the fol-lowing speed ranges:R7 - 200 km/h for moving objectsR7 - 50 km/h for stationary objectsIf the autonomous braking function demandsparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist


Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 7 km/h. It uses radar sensor technol-ogy to assess the traffic situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-

tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedalRthere is no longer any danger of a collisionRno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.Up to a speed of approximately 250 km/h,adaptive BrakeAssist is capable of reacting tomoving objects that have already been detec-ted as such at least once over the period ofobservation.Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/hadaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationaryobstacles.


Safety

Z

Adaptive brake lampsThe adaptive brake lights warn following traf-fic in an emergency braking situation:Rby flashing brake lampsRby activating the hazard warning lampsIf you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BASor BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. Inthis way, traffic travelling behind you iswarned in an even more noticeable manner.If you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazardwarn-ing lamps are activated automatically. If thebrakes are applied again, the brake lampslight up continuously. The hazard warninglamps switch off automatically if you travelfaster than 10 km/h. You can also switch offthe hazard warning lamps using the hazardwarning button (Y page 137).

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes


ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tyresand the road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilise thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilise the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)


ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is a component ofESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active if you deacti-vate ESP®.



G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilise the vehicle. In addition, other drivingsafety systems are switched off. This increa-ses the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! If you test the parking brake using a brakedynamometer, switch the ignition off.Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 422).ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up and:Rthe vehicle is movingRthe ECO start/stop function is activatedIf the ÷ warning lamp lights up continu-ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 357) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 315).Only use wheels with the recommended tyresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.


Characteristics of ESP®

General notesIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X When pulling away, only depress the accel-erator pedal as far as is necessary.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle stopsmoving. When pulling away again, the enginestarts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-viously selected status. Example: if ESP®was deactivated before the engine wasswitched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhenthe engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 74).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activatedRESP® is deactivated

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicleif the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer.X To deactivate: (Y page 307).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: (Y page 307).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stabilityRthe driven wheels can spinThe spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activatedRPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is itactivated if you brake firmly with assis-tance from ESP®RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; itis also not activated if you brake firmly withassistance from ESP®RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.


Safety

Z

ESP® trailer stabilisation

General notesIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins tolurch, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limit-ing the engine output until the vehicle/trailercombination has stabilised.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilisation will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle/trailer combination begins tolurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brakefirmly.ESP® trailer stabilisation is active abovespeeds of approximately 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilisation does not work ifESP® is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunction.

Crosswind Assist

General notesStrong crosswind gusts can impair the road-holding of your vehicle when driving straightahead. The crosswind driving assistancefunction integrated in ESP® noticeablyreduces these impairments.Depending on the direction and intensity ofthe side wind, ESP® is activated automati-cally.ESP intervenes with stabilising braking toassist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 80 km/h when driving straight aheador cornering gently.

Important safety notesCrosswind Assist does not work if ESP® isdeactivated or disabled because of a mal-function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General notesEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.



G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 355) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 318).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 232) andhill start assist (Y page 185).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General notes

i Pay attention to the important safetynotes in the "Driving safety systems" sec-tion (Y page 74).


PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehi-cles with the Driving Assistance package.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system and the camerasystemmust be switched on and operational.With the help of the radar sensor system andthe camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake candetect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-cle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standingupright.Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 83).PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimisethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected arisk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automatic brak-ing.


G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.

In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.The PRE-SAFE®Brake function can also brakethe vehicle automatically under the followingconditions:Rthe driver and front passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-imately 7 km/h and 200 km/h

At a speed of up to approximately 70 km/h,PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, detec-tion can be impaired.


Safety

Z

Detection by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inmulti-storey car parksRa narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. amotorcycleRa vehicle travelling in front on a differentline

Detection by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from thesun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer detects apedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the radar sensor settings and oper-ation checked at a qualified specialist work-shop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage tothe front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windscreen, havethe configuration and operation of the cam-era system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 309).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

This function will issue a warning if:Rat a speed of around 30 km/h or more, thedistance maintained to the vehicle travel-ling in front is insufficient for several sec-onds.The· distancewarning lamp then lightsup in the instrument cluster.Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h orhigher, you very quickly approach a vehiclein front or a pedestrian.An intermittent warning tone will thensound and the· distance warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

If there is an increased risk of collision, pre-ventive passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performeduntil immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal furtherRactivating kickdownRreleasing the brake pedal


The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacleRthere is no longer a risk of collisionRthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle

STEER CONTROL

General notesSTEER CONTROL is only available in vehicleswithout 4MATIC.STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steeringwheel in the direction required for vehiclestabilisation.This steering support is provided in particularif:Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are ona wet or slippery road surface when youbrakeRthe vehicle starts to skid



No steering support is provided from STEERCONTROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioningRthe steering is faultyIf ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assistedfurther by the electrical power steering.

Protection against theft

ImmobiliserThe immobiliser prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct key.

X To activate with the key: remove the keyfrom the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the igni-tion off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Anyone canstart the engine if a valid key has been leftinside the vehicle.

i The immobiliser is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is primed after approximately15 seconds.

X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with thekey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is primed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-mentRthe boot lidRthe bonnet

Protection against theft 85

Safety

Z

X To turn the alarm off with the key: pressthe% or& button on the key.The alarm is switched off.

orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 181).

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The keymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The key must be inside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the Mercedes‑Benz emer-gency call system automatically sends amessage to the Customer AssistanceCentre. This is done by means of a textmessage or a data connection. The emer-gency call system sends a message orestablishes a data connection providedthat:Ryou have subscribed to theMercedes‑Benz emergency call systemRthe Mercedes‑Benz emergency call sys-tem has been activated properlyRthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable

Tow-away protection

FunctionAn audible and visual alarm is triggered if yourvehicle's angle of inclination is altered whiletow-away protection is primed. This can occur

if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, forexample.

PrimingX Make sure that:Rthe doors are closedRthe boot lid is closedOnly then is the tow-away protectionprimed.

X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO.Tow-away protection is primed afterapproximately 60 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY-LESS-GO.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.Tow-away protection is switched off auto-matically.

DeactivatingYou can deactivate the tow-away protectionusing COMAND Online or Audio 20. You canfind information about deactivating the tow-away protection in the separate COMANDOnline or Audio 20 operating instructions.

Interior motion sensor

FunctionWhen the interior motion sensor is primed, avisual and audible alarm is triggered if move-ment is detected in the vehicle interior. Thiscan occur if someone reaches into the vehicleinterior, for example.

PrimingX Make sure that:

86 Protection against theftSafety

Rthe side windows are closedRthe sliding sunroof or the panorama slid-ing sunroof is closedRthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-ing on the rear-viewmirror or on the grabhandles on the roof trim

This will prevent false alarms.X Make sure that:Rthe doors are closedRthe sliding sunroof or the panorama slid-ing sunroof is closedRthe boot lid is closedOnly then is the interior motion sensorprimed.

X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-GO.The interior motion sensor is primed afterapproximately 30 seconds.

Switching offX Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY-LESS-GO.

orX Insert the key into the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The key must be in the vehicle.The interior motion sensor is automaticallydeactivated.

DeactivatingYou can deactivate the interior motion sensorusing COMAND Online or Audio 20. You canfind information about deactivating the inte-rior motion sensor in the separate COMANDOnline or Audio 20 operating instructions.

Protection against theft 87

Safety

Z

Useful information .............................. 90Key ........................................................ 90Doors .................................................... 96Boot .................................................... 101Side windows .................................... 106Sliding sunroof .................................. 110

89

Openingandclosing

Useful information



Key

Important safety notesUnited Kingdom only:

G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been locked from the out-side, the double-lock function is activated asstandard. It is then not possible to open thedoors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-tivate the double lock function by deactivat-ing the interior motion sensor . The doors canthen be opened from the inside after the vehi-cle has been locked from the outside. Theanti-theft alarm system is triggered if the dooris opened from the inside. Switch off thealarm (Y page 85).All countries:


G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to the key,the key could be unintentionally turned in theignition lock. This could cause the engine tobe switched off. There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to thekey. Remove any bulky keyrings before insert-ing the key into the ignition lock.

! Keep the key away from strong magneticfields. Otherwise, the remote control func-tion could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another keyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfilmRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the key's functionality.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function:do not keep the key on the parcel shelf or inthe boot. Otherwise, the key may not bedetected, e.g. when starting the engine usingthe Start/Stop button.

90 KeyOp

eningandclosing

A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the keydetermines whether a valid key is in the vehi-cle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst drivingRwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

Key functions

: & Locks the vehicle; F Opens/closes the boot lid= % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press button=.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked againRprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press button:.The key centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe boot lidRthe fuel filler flapWhen unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated viaCOMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).

When the locator lighting is activated viaCOMAND Online or Audio 20, it lights upwhen it is dark after the vehicle is unlockedwith the remote control (see the separateoperating instructions).X To open the boot lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: press and hold but-ton; until the boot lid opens.

X To open the boot lid automatically fromoutside the vehicle: if the key is located inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle: presstheF button on the key.You can release the button as soon as theboot lid starts to close.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a keyin the vehicle.

Locking and unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe key with you. You can combine the KEY-LESS-GO functions with the functions of aconventional key. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it usingthe& button on the key.The driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. The keymust be outside the vehicle. When locking orunlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distancebetween the key and the corresponding doorhandle must not be greater than 1 m.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the keydetermines whether a valid key is in the vehi-cle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhilst driving

Key 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face: or;.Make sure that you do not touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.For further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 107).

X To unlock the boot lid: pull the boot lidhandle.

DeactivatingIf you do not intend to use the vehicle for alonger period of time, you can deactivate KEY-LESS-GO. The key will then use very littlepower, thereby conserving battery power. Forthe purposes of activation/deactivation, thevehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe key twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the key lights uptwice briefly and KEYLESS-GO is deactiva-ted.

X To activate: press any button on the key orinsert the key into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

KEYLESS-GO start functionBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a keyin the vehicle.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel alone.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for about six seconds until the bat-tery indicator lamp flashes twice(Y page 94).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, press-ing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe key now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-

92 KeyOp

eningandclosing

onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 94).

Emergency key element

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, usethe emergency key element.If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switchoff the alarm (Y page 85).If you unlock the vehicle using the emergencykey element, the fuel filler flap will not beunlocked automatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert thekey into the ignition lock.

Removing the emergency key element

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time, removeemergency key element; from the key.

Further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 98)Runlocking the boot (Y page 105)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 100)

Inserting the emergency key elementX Push emergency key element; com-pletely into the key until it engages and

release catch: is back in its basic posi-tion.

Battery of the key


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Key 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Replace the battery (Y page 94).If the key battery is checked within the signalreception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can obtain a battery from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the emergency key element out of thekey (Y page 93).

X Press emergency key element; into theopening in the key in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:

opens. When doing so, do not hold batterycompartment cover: shut.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the key against your palmuntil battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contamina-tion.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing and thenpress to close it.

X Insert emergency key element; into thekey.

X Check the function of all key buttons on thevehicle.

94 KeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the key


You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the key.

The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the key battery (Y page 94) and replace it if necessary(Y page 94).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

The key is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91).


If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe key.

X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 98) or lock (Y page 100) the vehicle using theemergency key element.

X Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Key 95

Openingandclosing

Z


The engine cannot bestarted using the key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 416).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 418).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theStart/Stop button. The key isin the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.


If this does not work:X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.

You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the emer-gency key element.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors

Important safety notesUnited Kingdom only:

G WARNINGWhen the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longer getout, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is arisk of injury.

Therefore, do not leave any people unsuper-vised in the vehicle, particularly children, eld-erly people or people in need of special assis-tance. Do not activate the double lock whenpeople are in the vehicle.

If the vehicle has been locked from the out-side, the double-lock function is activated asstandard. It is then not possible to open thedoors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-tivate the double lock function by deactivat-ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 86).

96 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

The doors can then be opened from the insideafter the vehicle has been locked from theoutside. The anti-theft alarm system is trig-gered if the door is opened from the inside.Switch off the alarm (Y page 85).All countries:

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per-sons or road usersRget out and be struck by oncoming trafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example

In addition, the children could also set thevehicle in motion, for example, if they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineThere is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren and animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children.

Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368).

Unlocking and opening the doorsfrom the insideOnly for the United Kingdom: if the vehiclehas been locked with the key or with KEY-LESS-GO, the double lock function is activa-ted as standard. It is then not possible to openthe doors from inside the vehicle. You candeactivate the double lock function by deac-tivating the interior motion sensor . The doorscan then be opened from the inside after thevehicle has been locked from the outside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-

proof locks (Y page 73). The anti-theft alarmsystem is triggered if the door is opened fromthe inside. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85).For all countries except the United King-dom:You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 73). If the vehicle has previously beenlocked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO,opening a door from the inside will trigger theanti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 85).

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock and unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. The switches are on thedriver’s door.

Doors 97

Openingandclosing

Z

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe key or KEYLESS-GO.For all countries except the United King-dom:The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 73).If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe key or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a doorfrom the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarmsystem. Switch off the alarm (Y page 85).United Kingdom only: if the vehicle hasbeen locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO, the double lock function is activated asstandard. It is then not possible to open thedoors from inside the vehicle. You can deac-tivate the double lock function by deactivat-ing the interior motion sensor (Y page 86). Itis then possible to operate the doors as fol-lows. The doors can be opened from theinside. You can only open the rear doors frominside the vehicle if they are not secured bythe child-proof locks (Y page 73).When a locked door is opened from inside thevehicle, the previous unlocking process willbe observed if the vehicle has been:Rlocked with the locking button for the cen-tral locking orRlocked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. Only the doorwhich has been opened form the inside isunlocked if only the driver's door had beenpreviously unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for approximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.Therefore, you could be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-eter.

i You can also activate and deactivate theautomatic locking function via COMANDOnline or Audio 20 (see the separate oper-ating instructions).

Unlocking the driver's door (emer-gency key element)If the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the key or KEYLESS-GO, usethe emergency key element.X Take the emergency key element out of thekey (Y page 93).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:

98 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Insert the tip of the emergency key elementinto the slit on the cover of the driver's doorlock and turn it until the cover is released.

X Insert the emergency key element into thelock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emer-gency key element clockwise.X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.

X Insert the emergency key element into thekey.

X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver'sdoor with the thicker end towards the frontof the vehicle and press to secure. Thenmake sure that the slit of the cover is hor-izontal.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:

X Insert the emergency key element intoopening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the emergencykey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.


X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.The locking knob pops up and the doorunlocks.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emer-gency key element clockwise.X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.

X Insert the emergency key element into thekey (Y page 93).

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

All vehicles:If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switchoff the alarm (Y page 85).

Doors 99

Openingandclosing

Z

Locking the vehicle (emergency keyelement)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with thekey or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency keyelement.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the boot lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 97).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the emergency key element out of thekey (Y page 93).

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Insert the tip of the emergency key elementinto the slit on the cover of the driver's doorlock and turn it until the cover is released.


X Turn the emergency key element clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driv-er's door is locked.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emer-gency key element anti-clockwise.X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.

X Insert the emergency key element into thekey.

X Make sure that the doors and the boot lidare locked.

X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver'sdoor with the thicker end towards the frontof the vehicle and press to secure. Thenmake sure that the slit of the cover is hor-izontal.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:

X Insert the emergency key element intoopening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle.X Pull the protective cap on the emergencykey as straight as possible away from thevehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.


X Turn the emergency key element clockwiseas far as it will go to position1.The locking knob drops down and the driv-er's door is locked.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emer-gency key element anti-clockwise.

100 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Turn the emergency key element back andremove it.


X Make sure that the doors and the boot lidare locked.

X Carefully press the protective cap onto thelock cylinder until it engages and is seatedfirmly. Do not pull the door handle whendoing so.

All vehicles:If you lock the vehicle as described above, thefuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theftalarm system is not primed.

Boot


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the bootlid is open when the engine is running, espe-cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a riskof poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe boot lid. Never drive with the boot lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, especiallywhen braking or abruptly changing directions.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The boot lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the boot lid.

The opening dimensions on the boot lid canbe found in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 476).

i You can limit the opening angle of theboot lid in COMAND Online or Audio 20(see the separate operating instructions).

Do not leave the key in the boot. You couldotherwise lock yourself out.Stow luggage or loads preferably in the boot.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368).

Obstacle detection with boot lidreversing featureVehicles with boot lid remote closing fea-ture: the boot lid is equipped with automaticobstacle detection with reversing function. Ifa solid object blocks or restricts the boot lidwhen automatically opening, this procedureis stopped. If a solid object blocks or restrictsthe boot lid when automatically closing, theboot lid opens again automatically. The auto-matic obstacle recognition with reversingfunction is only an aid. It is not a substitute foryour attentiveness when opening and closingthe boot lid.

G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 8 mm of the closing pathThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rpress theF button on the key, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door, orRpress the closing or locking button on theboot lid, orRpull the boot lid handle

Boot 101

Openingandclosing

Z

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it isalso possible to stop the closing process byperforming a kicking movement under therear bumper.

Opening/closing from the outside

Opening

X Press theF button on the key.orX Pull handle:.The boot lid opens.

Closing

X Pull the boot lid down using recess: andpush it closed.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the key or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 91).

Opening/closing automatically fromthe outside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the boot lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:RPress theF button on the key.RPress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.RPress the closing or locking button on theboot lid.RPull the boot lid handle.



The opening dimensions of the boot lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 476).

OpeningYou can open the boot lid automatically usingthe key or the handle in the boot lid.X Press and hold theF button on the keyuntil the boot lid opens.

orX If the boot is unlocked, pull the boot lidhandle and release it again immediately.

102 BootOp

eningandclosing

Closing

X Press closing button: on the boot lid.Vehicles with boot lid remote closing fea-ture and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver'sdoor is closed you can simultaneously closethe boot lid and lock the vehicle. The KEY-LESS-GO key must be in the rear detectionrange of the vehicle.X Press locking button; in the boot lid.If KEYLESS-GO detects a key outside thevehicle, the boot lid closes and the vehicleis locked.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a key in the boot, theboot lid opens again after it is closed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a second key outsidethe vehicle, the boot lid remains closed.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS


G WARNINGThe vehicle exhaust system can become veryhot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, youcould burn yourself by touching the exhaustsystem. There is a risk of injury. Alwaysensure that you only make a leg movementwithin the detection range of sensors.

! If the key is within the rear detectionrange of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa-tions, for example, could lead to the boot lidopening unintentionally:Rusing a car washRusing a high-pressure cleanerMake sure that the key is at least 3 m awayfrom the vehicle.

General notesWith KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREEACCESS, you can open or close the boot lid orstop the procedure without using your hands.This is useful if you have your hands full. To dothis, make a kicking movement under thebumper with your foot.Observe the following points:RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about yourperson. The KEYLESS-GO key must be inthe rear detection range of the vehicle.RWhenmaking the kicking movement, makesure that you are standing firmly on theground and that there is sufficient clear-ance to the rear of the vehicle. You couldotherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

RAlways ensure that you onlymake a kickingmovement within the detection range ofsensors:.RStand at least 30 cm away from the reararea while doing so.RDo not come into contact with the bumperwhile making the kicking movement. Oth-

Boot 103

Openingandclosing

Z

erwise, the sensors may not function cor-rectly.RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not functionwhen the engine is started.RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the reardetection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The bootlid could thus be opened or closed unin-tentionally, for example, if you:- set down or lift up an object behind thevehicle

- polish the rear of the vehicleDo not carry the KEYLESS-GO key aboutyour person in such situations. This willprevent the unintentional opening/closingof the boot.RDirt caused by road salt around sensors:may restrict functionality.RUsing HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros-thetic leg may restrict functionality.

Operation

X To open/close: kick into sensor detectionrange: under the bumper with your leg.You will hear a warning tone while the bootlid is opening or closing.

X If the boot lid does not open after sev-eral attempts: wait at least ten secondsthen kick under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for toolong, the boot lid does not open or close.Repeat the kicking movement more quickly ifthis occurs.

To stop the opening or closing procedure:Rmove your foot in sensor detectionrange: under the bumper, orRpull the handle on the outside of the boot lidorRpress the closing button in the boot lid orRpress theF button on the keyIf the boot lid closing procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe boot lid will open

If the boot lid opening procedure has beenstopped:Rmove your foot under the bumper again andthe boot lid will close

Opening/closing automatically fromthe inside


G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the boot lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:RPress theF button on the key.RPress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door.RPress the closing or locking button on theboot lid.RPull the boot lid handle.


104 BootOp

eningandclosing


The opening dimensions of the boot lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 476).

Opening and closing

You can open and close the boot lid from thedriver's seat when the vehicle is stationaryand unlocked.X To open: pull remote operating switch forboot lid: until the boot lid opens.

X To close: press remote operating switchfor boot lid: until the boot lid is com-pletely closed.

Locking the boot separatelyThe separate boot locking function is onlyavailable in certain countries.You can lock the boot separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remainslocked and cannot be opened.

Activating the function to lock the boot sep-arately:X Close the boot lid.X Open the glove compartment.X Push the switch to position:.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the bootremains locked.i You can also lock the glove compartment(Y page 369).

Deactivating the function to lock the bootseparately:X Open the glove compartment.X Push the switch to position;.If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the bootwill also be unlocked.

Unlocking the boot (emergency keyelement)! The boot lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the boot lid.

If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key,KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREE ACCESS, usethe emergency key element.If you use the emergency key element tounlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theftalarm system will be triggered. Switch off thealarm (Y page 85).X Take the emergency key element out of thekey (Y page 93).

X Insert the emergency key element into theboot lid lock as far as the stop.

Boot 105

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the emergency key element anti-clockwise from position1 as far as it willgo to position2.The boot is unlocked.

X Turn the emergency key element back toposition1 and remove it.


When you lock the vehicle (Y page 100), theboot is also locked.

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the key with you and lock the vehicle.Never leave children unattended in the vehi-cle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window from trav-elling upwards during the automatic closingprocess, the side window opens again auto-matically. During themanual closing process,the side window only opens again automati-cally after the corresponding switch isreleased. The automatic reversing feature isonly an aid and is no substitute for your atten-tion when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRwhile resettingThis means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing, make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If someonebecomes trapped, press the switch to openthe side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

106 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding button.

X To open fully: press the button beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To closemanually: pull the correspondingbutton and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the button beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press/pull the switch beyond the pointof resistance and release, automatic opera-tion is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop automatic operation by press-ing/pulling again.You can continue to operate the sidewindowsafter switching off the engine or removing thekey. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.The side windows cannot be operated fromthe rear when the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 73).

i Information on opening and closing theroller sunblinds on the rear side windows(Y page 378).

Convenience opening feature

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GOstart function: you can ventilate the vehi-cle before you start driving.If the key is in the immediate vicinity to thevehicle, the convenience opening function isavailable.To do this, the key is used to carry out thefollowing functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panoramasliding sunroof and the roller sunblindRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat

Convenience opening featureX Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama sliding sunroof are in the desiredposition.If the roller sunblinds of the panorama slid-ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblindsare opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama sliding sunroof is in thedesired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature


G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-

Side windows 107

Openingandclosing

Z

ating.When closingmake sure that no parts ofthe body are in the closing area.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the key is in the imme-diate vicinity to the vehicle, the convenienceclosing function is available.When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panoramasliding sunroof

On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,you can then close the roller sunblinds.Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:Rthe side windows (Y page 106)Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama slidingsunroof (Y page 111)

Using the keyX Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama sliding sunroof are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroofare closed.

X Vehicles with panorama sliding sun-roof: press and hold the& button untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama slidingsunroof close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. The keymust be outside the vehicle. The gap betweenthe key and the corresponding door handleshould not be greater than 1 m.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof or the panorama slidingsunroof are fully closed.Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroofare closed.

X Vehicles with panorama sliding sun-roof: touch recessed sensor surface: onthe door handle again until the roller sun-blinds of the panorama sliding sunroofclose.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all doors.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 106).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

108 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 106).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly. Ifthis is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Side windows 109

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.


A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In thissection, the term "sliding sunroof" refers toboth types of sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, press theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

110 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof ifit is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-functions may occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroofis open. They are caused by minor pressurefluctuations in the vehicle interior. Changethe position of the sliding sunroof or open aside window slightly to reduce or eliminatethese noises.Only for vehicles with panorama slidingsunroof:

G WARNINGAt high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-matically lowers slightly at the rear. This couldtrap you or other persons. There is a risk ofinjury. Make sure that nobody reaches intothe sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst thevehicle is in motion.If somebody becomes trapped, immediatelypull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-ing sunroof lifts during opening.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureYour vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun-roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In thissection, the term "sliding sunroof" refers toboth types of sliding sunroof.The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If an object blocks orrestricts the sliding sunroof during the closingprocess, the sliding sunroof opens againautomatically. The automatic reversing fea-ture is only an aid and is no substitute for yourattention when closing the sliding roof.

G WARNINGThe reversing function does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 4mmof the closingmovement

Rduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing function cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRduring automatic operation, press theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can open

Sliding sunroof 111

Openingandclosing

Z

or close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.You can continue to operate the sliding sun-roof after switching off the engine or remov-ing the key. This function remains active forfive minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Rain-closing featureWhen the key is in position 0 in the ignitionlock or is removed, the sliding sunroof closesautomatically:Rif it starts to rain.Rat extreme outside temperatures.Rafter six hours.Rif there is a malfunction in the power sup-ply.

The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised inorder to ventilate the vehicle interior.If the sliding sunroof is obstructed whenbeing closed by the rain-closing feature, itopens again slightly. The rain-closing featureis then deactivated.The sliding sunroof does not close if:Rit is raised at the rear.Rit is blocked.Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-screen being monitored by the rain sensor,e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge.

Resetting

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not operatesmoothly.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 111).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again(Y page 111).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Operating the panorama sliding sun-roof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerThe panorama sliding sunroof can only beoperated when the roller sunblind is open.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.If the panorama sliding sunroof is raised atthe rear, it automatically lowers slightly athigher speeds. The noise level in the vehicleinterior is reduced as a result. At low speeds itraises again automatically.You can continue to operate the panoramasliding sunroof after switching off the engineor removing the key. This function remains


eningandclosing

active for five minutes or until you open afront door.The panorama sliding sunroof cannot beopened if a roof carrier is fitted. In order toallow ventilation of the vehicle interior, youcan raise the panorama sliding sunroof. If aroof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benzmakes contact with the panorama slidingsunroof, the sunroof will lower slightly butremain raised at the rear.

Rain-closing feature when the engine isswitched offIf the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock orif it is removed, the panorama sliding sunroofcloses automatically:Rif it starts to rain.Rat extreme outside temperatures.Rafter six hours.Rif there is a malfunction in the power sup-ply.

The panorama sliding sunroof remains raisedat the rear in order to allow ventilation of thevehicle interior.If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstructedwhen being closed by the rain-closing feature,it opens again slightly. The rain-closing fea-ture is then deactivated.The panorama sliding sunroof does not closeif:Rit is raised at the rear.Rit is blocked.Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-screen being monitored by the rain sensor.If the vehicle, for example, is under a bridgeor in a carport, the field of the sensor maybe covered.

Rain-closing feature when drivingThe raised sliding sunroof automatically low-ers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain.The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on:Rthe road speed andRthe intensity of the rain

You can manually cancel the automatic clos-ing procedure. Press or pull the3 switchin any direction.To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the3 switch in direction:.The "Rain-closing feature when driving" func-tion is deactivated, until you:Rpress or pull the3 switch in any direc-tion orRturn the key to another position in the igni-tion lock (Y page 181).

Operating the panorama sliding sun-roof roller sunblinds


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblindparts of the body could be trapped betweenthe roller sunblind and the frame or slidingsunroof. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing make sure that noparts of the body are in the sweep of the rollersunblind.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRduring automatic operation, press theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening/closing process is stopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The front roller sunblind canonly be opened and closed when the slidingsunroof is closed.

Roller sunblinds reversing featureThe roller sunblinds are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the roller blind during theclosing process, the roller blind opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid, not a substi-tute for your attention when closing the rollersunblind.

Sliding sunroof 113

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGThe reversing feature especially does notreact to soft, light and thin objects, such assmall fingers. This means that the reversingfeature cannot prevent someone being trap-ped in these situations. There is a risk ofinjury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRduring automatic operation, press theswitch briefly in any direction

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing roller sunblinds

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeYou can only close the roller sunblinds whenthe panorama sliding sunroof is closed.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press the3 switch in direction:.Both roller sunblinds open, then the slidingroof is raised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;.The sunblinds open

X Pull the3 switch in direction=.The roller sunblinds close when the pano-rama sliding roof is closed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyondthe point of resistance, automatic operationis started in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.

Resetting the panorama sliding sun-roof or the front roller sunblind

Reset the panorama sliding sunroof or thefront roller sunblind if the panorama slidingsunroof or the roller sunblinds does not movesmoothly.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow:until the panorama sliding sunroof is fullyclosed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Pull the3 switch in the direction ofarrow: repeatedly until the front rollersunblind is closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an addi-tional second.

X Make sure that the panorama sliding sun-roof (Y page 112) and the front roller sun-blind (Y page 114) can be fully openedagain.

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.


eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If someone is trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing processThe closing process is stopped.


The sliding sunroof orpanorama sliding sun-roof cannot be closedand you cannot see thecause.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is obstructedduring closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panoramasliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is closed withmore force.

If the sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is obstructedagain during closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again tothe point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panoramasliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof is closed with-out the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof 115

Openingandclosing

Z

Useful information ............................ 118Correct driver's seat position .......... 118Seats .................................................. 119Steering wheel .................................. 125Mirrors ............................................... 127Memory function ............................... 130

117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information



Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirrors and fasten your seatbelt before starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 119).

X Make sure that seat= is correctly adjus-ted.Manual and electrical seat adjustment(Y page 120)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 121)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbagas possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat angle so that yourthighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyRyour legs are not fully extendedX Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted correctly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecentre of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 125).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted correctly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 125)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 126)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 47).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 49).

118 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed across your hips in the pelvicarea

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors so that youhave a good view of the road and trafficconditions (Y page 128).

X Vehicles with memory function: you canstore the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir-ror and head-up display settings with thememory function (Y page 131).

Seats


G WARNINGIf children adjust the seats, they couldbecome trapped, especially if they are unat-tended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno key in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a seat, you or another vehicleoccupant could become trapped by the guiderail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"(Y page 51) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 63).

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it can moveunexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion.

This could cause you to lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the engine.


G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustain

Seats 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

abdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seatbelt is routedacross the centre of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i The rear-compartment head restraintscan be removed (Y page 122).Vehicles without the through-loading fea-ture: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RRear bench seat through-loading feature(Y page 371)

Adjusting the seats manually andelectrically

Adjusting the front seat

Vehicles without the seating comfortpackage

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Vehicles with the seating comfort pack-age

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Seat cushion length

i In vehicles with the seating comfort pack-age, the seat cushion length can only beadjusted manually.

120 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft

Vehicles without the seating comfortpackageX Lift handle= and slide the seat forwardsor rearwards.

X Release lever= again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Vehicles with the seating comfort pack-ageX Lift handle? and slide the seat forwardsor rearwards.

X Release lever? again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Adjusting the seat cushion length man-uallyX Lift handleA and slide the seat cushionforwards or backwards.

X Release leverA again.The seat cushion engages.i Manual seat cushion length adjustment isonly available in vehicles with the seatingcomfort package.

Adjusts the seats electrically

: Head restraint height; Backrest angle= Seat height? Seat cushion length

A Seat cushion angleB Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i Further related subjects:RYou can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 131).RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a betterposition if it was previously in an unfav-ourable position (Y page 62).

Adjusting the head restraints



G WARNINGThe head restraints cannot provide the inten-ded protection unless they are fitted andadjusted correctly. There is an increased riskof injury to the head and neck in the event ofan accident or sudden braking, for example.Always drive with the head restraints fitted.Ensure that the centre of the head restraintssupport the back of each vehicle occupant'shead at eye level before driving off.

General notesObserve the important safety notes(Y page 119).Do not interchange the head restraints of thefront and rear seats. Otherwise, you will notbe able to adjust the height and angle of thehead restraints to the correct position.

Seats 121

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the head restraint heightmanually

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the head restraint fore-and-aft position manually

This function allows you to adjust the dis-tance between the head restraint and theback of the head.X To move forwards: pull the head restraintforwards in the direction of the arrow untilit engages in the desired position.

X To move backwards: press and holdrelease button:.

X Push the head restraint back.X Release the release button once the headrestraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engagedproperly.

Adjusting the head restraints electri-callyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for the head restraint adjust-ment (Y page 121) up or down in the direc-tion of the arrow.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X If the head restraint is fully lowered, it isnecessary to press release catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired height.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Fitting and removing rear headrestraints


gwheelandmirrors

X Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 372).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To refit: insert the head restraint so thatthe notches on the bar are on the left whenviewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGIf you repeatedly switch on seat heating, theseat cushion and backrest padding maybecome very hot. The health of vehicle occu-pants with limited temperature sensitivity or alimited ability to react to excessively high

temperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk ofinjury.Therefore, do not switch on the seat heatingrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches from level3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches from level2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

i If drive program E is selected, the powerof the seat heating is reduced.RManual transmission (Y page 192)RAutomatic transmission (Y page 197)

Seats 123

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating


The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window heating or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can beswitched back on manually.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off


The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 107). The seatventilation of the driver's seat automati-cally switches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fanspeed can be reduced automatically. Thisreduces the noises of the seat ventilation.


gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation


The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window heating or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation canbe switched back on.

Steering wheel



G WARNINGChildren could become trapped by the steer-ing wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no key in theignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man-ually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Steering wheel 125

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel position(fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 126)RStoring settings (Y page 131)ROperating the on-board computer(Y page 294).

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Press one of the memory function positionbuttons. The adjustment process is stopped.This function is only available on vehicles witha memory function.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature using Audio 20/COMANDOnline; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions.

Position of the steering wheel and thedriver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel tilts upwards and the driv-er's seat moves backwards if you:Rremove the key from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the key: open the driver's door; thekeymust be in position0 or1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181)Ropen the driver's door when the ignition isswitched off

i The steering wheel only tilts upwards ifthe driving position is stored after the seator steering wheel has been adjusted(Y page 131).

126 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The most recent driving position of the steer-ing wheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is stored using the memoryfunction (Y page 131)

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper steer-ing limiter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the previouslyset position if:Rthe driver's door is closed and you insertthe key into the ignition lockRyou close the driver's door when the igni-tion is switched onRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

i The steering wheel only returns to the lastset position if the driving position is storedafter the seat or steering wheel has beenadjusted (Y page 131).

The most recent driving position of the steer-ing wheel is stored if:Rthe ignition is switched offRthe setting is stored using the memoryfunction (Y page 131)

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened or the key is removed from the igni-tion lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehi-cle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in Audio 20/COMANDOnline; see the separate Audio 20/COMANDOnline operating instructions.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-dazzle mode: pivot anti-dazzleswitch: forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors



G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects visible in the mirrors arecloser than they appear. You could misjudgethe distance from road users driving behindyou when changing lanes, for instance. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should therefore always look over yourshoulder to determine the actual distancefrom road users driving behind you.

Mirrors 127

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press button; for the right-hand exteriormirror or button= for the left-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp lights up in the buttonthat has been pressed.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button: as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button: up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated if therear window heating is switched on and theoutside temperature is low.

Folding the exteriormirrors in/out elec-trically

X Turn the key to position1or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, youcan no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the AutomaticAutomaticmirror-folding functionmirror-folding function function in theon-board computer.X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the Automatic mirror-folding func‐Automatic mirror-folding func‐tiontion function is activated in COMANDOnlineor Audio 20 (see the separate COMANDOnline or Audio 20 operating instructions),

128 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-sideRthe exterior mirrors fold out automaticallyagain as soon as you unlock the vehicle

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition (forwards or backwards), proceed asfollows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold button:until you hear a click and then the mirrorengaging in position (Y page 128).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 128).

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass of an auto-matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Electrolyte isharmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with electrolyte,observe the following:Rimmediately rinse off electrolyte from yourskin with water.Rimmediately and thoroughly rinse electro-lyte out of eyes using clean water.Rif electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse out your mouth thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.

Rif electrolyte comes into contact with skinor eyes or is swallowed, seekmedical atten-tion immediately.Rimmediately change out of clothing that hasbeen in contact with electrolyte.Rif an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if the following conditions aremet simultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not dip if reverse gear isengaged or if the interior lighting is switchedon.

Parking position of the exteriormirroron the front-passenger side

Using reverse gear

: Memory button M; Adjustment button= Button for the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side? Button for the exterior mirror on the driv-

er's sideYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.You can store this position.

Mirrors 129

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the kerb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can set the front-passenger side exteriormirror so that you can see the rear wheel onthat side as soon as you engage reverse gear.This setting can be stored using memory but-ton M:.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press button= for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Use adjustment button; to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the kerb.

X Press memory buttonM: and one of thearrows on adjustment button; withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of15 km/hRabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button? for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function


G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, the adjustments couldcause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside while the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

130 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGIf children activate the memory function, theycould become trapped, especially if they areunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.

Storing settingsWith the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRseat heating: cushion surfacesRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersidesRposition of the head-up display

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 121).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 126) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 128).

X Press memory button M and then pressstorage position button 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3 until theRseatRsteering wheelRexterior mirrorsRhead-up displayare in the stored position.i The steering wheel and seat adjustmentprocedure is interrupted as soon as yourelease the storage position button. Theadjustment of the mirror is still carried out.

Memory function 131

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Useful information ............................ 134Exterior lighting ................................ 134Interior lighting ................................. 140Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps) ........................................ 141Replacing bulbs (vehicles with hal-ogen headlamps) ............................... 142Windscreen wipers ........................... 145

133

Lightsandwindscreenwipers

Useful information



Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroad

General notesIf your journey takes you to countries wherevehicles are driven on the opposite side of theroad to the country in which the vehicle isregistered, your headlampsmust be switchedto symmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos-sible after crossing the border (only vehicleswith Intelligent Light System). This preventsoncoming traffic from being dazzled. Sym-metrical lights do not illuminate as large anarea of the edge of the carriageway.

Vehicles with halogen or static LEDheadlampsIt is not necessary to switch your headlampsto symmetrical dipped beam when driving incountries where vehicles are driven on theopposite side of the road to the country inwhich the vehicle is registered. Legal require-

ments are fulfilled without switching theheadlamps to symmetrical dipped beam.

Vehicles with Intelligent Light SystemBefore crossing the border, set the head-lamps to symmetrical dipped beam and afterreturning back to asymmetrical dipped beamvia the "Dipped-beam headlamps for drivingon the right/left" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 311).If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and"extended range foglamps" functions are notavailable.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set by:Rusing the light switchRusing the combination switch(Y page 137)Radjusting the headlamp range (vehicleswith halogen headlamps only)(Y page 136)Rusing the on-board computer(Y page 311)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand parking lamps2 X Right-hand side lamps

134 Exterior lightingLightsandwindscreenwipers

3 T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-ment cluster lighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-led by the light sensor

5 L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-lamps

B R Rear foglampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/parking lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the key from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the key in posi-tion 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, thedipped-beamheadlampsmay not be switchedon automatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehiclelighting at all times.The daytime driving lights improve the detect-ability of your vehicle during the day.When the side lamps and dipped-beam head-lamps are switched on, the green T (sidelamps) and L (dipped-beam headlamps)indicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup.

Ã is the preferred light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):Rkey in position 1 in the ignition lock: theside lamps are switched on or off automat-ically depending on the brightness of theambient lightRwith the engine running: depending on theambient light conditions, the daytime driv-ing lights or the parking and dipped-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automat-ically

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Dipped-beam headlampsWhen the ignition is switched on and the lightswitch is in position L, the side lamps anddipped-beam headlamps are switched oneven if the light sensor does not sense darkambient light conditions. This is advanta-geous when there is fog or rain.X To switch on the dipped-beam head-lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear foglampThe rear foglamp improves the visibility ofyour vehicle in heavy fog for the followingtraffic. Please observe the country-specificlaws on the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn thekey in the ignition lock to position 2 or startthe engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.

Exterior lighting 135


Z

X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear foglamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Side lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the side lamps or parking lampsare automatically switched off to enablethe next engine start. Always park yourvehicle safely and sufficiently lit accordingto legal standards. Avoid the continuoususe of the T side lamps for severalhours. If possible, switch on the X rightor the W left parking lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lampsSwitching on the parking lamps ensures thatthe corresponding side of the vehicle is illu-minated.X To switch on the parking lamps: the keyis not in the ignition lock or it is in posi-tion 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Adjusting the headlamp range (halogenheadlamps)

Headlamp range controlg Driver's seat and front-passenger seat

occupied1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and

rear seats occupied2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and

rear seats occupied, boot laden3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu-

pied and maximum permissible rear axleload utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer

The headlamp range control allows you toadjust the cone of light from the headlamps tosuit the vehicle load.X Start the engine.X Turn the headlamp range control to theposition which corresponds to the load inyour vehicle.


Combination switch

Turn signals

: Main-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= Headlamp flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

Main-beam headlampsX To switch on the main-beam head-lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the main-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when themain-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the main-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it con-trols activation and deactivation of the main-beam headlamps (Y page 139).

Headlamp flasherX To switch on: turn the key in the ignitionlock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps switch on auto-matically if:Ran airbag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 70 km/h and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 10 km/h again after a full brake appli-cation.The hazard warning lamps continue to oper-ate even if the ignition is switched off.



Z

Intelligent Light System

General notesThe Intelligent Light System is a system thatadjusts the headlamps automatically to suitthe prevailing driving andweather conditions.It offers advanced functions for improved illu-mination of the road surface, e.g. dependingon the vehicle speed or weather conditions.The system includes the active light function,cornering light function, motorway mode andextended range foglamps. The system is onlyactive when it is dark.You can activate or deactivate the "IntelligentLight System" function using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 311).

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to the steer-ing movements of the front wheels. In thisway, relevant areas remain illuminated whileyou are driving. This allows you to recognisepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the dipped-beam head-lamps are switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 40 km/hand switch on the turn signal or turn thesteering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between40 km/h and 70 km/h and turn the steer-ing wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.

Motorway mode

Active: if you are driving at a speed above110 km/h and do notmake any large steeringmovements for at least 1,000 m or if you aredriving at a speed above 130 km/h


Not active: if you are driving at speeds below80 km/h following activation

Extended range foglamps

The extended range foglamps reduce theglare experienced by the driver and improvethe illumination of the edge of the carriage-way.Active: if you are driving at speeds below70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglampNot active: if, following activation, you aredriving at speeds above 100 km/h or if youswitch off the rear foglamp

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

General notes

With Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus, you canautomatically switch between dipped-beam,partial main-beam and main-beam head-lamps.Partial main-beam illumination is a form ofillumination whereby the main beam is direc-ted past other road users. Other road usersare kept out of the main-beam. This preventsglare. If there is a vehicle in front, for example,the main-beam headlamps illuminate theareas to its right and left, and the vehicle infront is illuminated by the dipped-beam head-lamps.The system automatically adapts the dipped-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, itswitches on themain-beamheadlamps again.If the main-beam or partial main-beam head-lamps are causing too much reflection fromtraffic signs, the lights are automatically dim-med and glare for the driver caused by thereflections is thus avoided.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windscreen near the overhead controlpanel.


G WARNINGAdaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec-ognise road users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam AssistPlus may not recognise road users who dohave lights, or may recognise them too late. Inthis, or in similar situations, the automaticmain-beamheadlampswill not be deactivatedor will be activated despite the presence ofother road users. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the main-beam headlamps ingood time.



Z

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot takeinto account road, weather or traffic condi-tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is onlyan aid. You are responsible for adjusting thevehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visi-bility and traffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or if the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam AssistPLUS on/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and thelight sensor activates the dipped-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h:The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 30 km/h and no other road usersare recognised:Themain-beamheadlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds above 45 km/hand other road users are recognised:Partial main-beam is selected automati-cally. The K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 40 km/h:The partial main-beam headlamps areswitched off automatically. If no other roadusers are recognised, themain-beam head-lamps are switched on.

If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 25 km/h or the roads are ade-quately illuminated:Themain-beamheadlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display goes out.

Headlamps misted up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; | Switches the automatic interiorlighting control on/off

= c Switches the front interior lightingon/off

140 Interior lightingLightsandwindscreenwipers

? u Switches the rear interior lightingon/off

A p Switches the right-hand front read-ing lamp on/off

Control panel in the grab handle (rearcompartment)

: Reading lamp; p Switches the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some time,unless the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.The colour, brightness and display lamp forthe ambient lighting may be set usingCOMAND Online or Audio 20 (see the sepa-rate operating instructions).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on/off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the key from the ignition lock

The interior lighting is activated for a shorttime when the key is removed from the igni-tion lock. This delayed switch-off can beadjusted using COMAND Online or Audio 20(see the separate operating instructions).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using thekey.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LEDheadlamps)

The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) 141


Z

Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halo-gen headlamps)


G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and plug connectors canbecome very hot during use.When replacing abulb, you could burn yourself on these com-ponents. There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforereplacing the bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only fit sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during opera-tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contactwith liquids.Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 142).Have the bulbs that you cannot replace your-self replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview of bulb replacement – bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. Thedetails for the bulb type can be found in thelegend.

Vehicles with halogen headlamps: Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W

Tail lamp (halogen headlamps): Turn signal lamp: P 21 W; Reversing lamp: W 16 W

142 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)Lightsandwindscreenwipers

Replacing the front bulbs

Fitting/removing the cover on the frontwheel arch

Youmust remove the cover of the front wheelhousing before you can change the front turnsignal lamp.X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.X Turn rotary knob: 180° outwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is released.

X Fold cover; upwards.X To fit: insert cover; into the left, right andtwo lower catches.

X Turn rotary knob: 180° inwards until itstops using a suitable object.Cover; is locked.

Dipped-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.

X Turn housing cover: anti-clockwise andpull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; anti-clockwise and pullit out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn it clock-wise until it engages.

Main-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights.X Open the bonnet.X Turn housing cover: anti-clockwise andpull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; anti-clockwise and pullit out.



Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 143


Z

Turn signals

X Remove the cover in the front wheel arch(Y page 143).

X Turn housing cover: anti-clockwise andpull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; anti-clockwise, unlockit and pull it out.



X Replace the cover in the front wheel arch(Y page 143).

Replacing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim pan-els

Example: right-hand side trim panel

You must open the side trim panel in the bootbefore you can replace the bulbs in the taillamps.X To open: release right or left side trimpanel: at the top and fold it down in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: insert side panel:.

Tail lampsX Switch off the lights.X Open the boot.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 144).

X Pull out the plug.X Turn wing nut: 90° anti-clockwise andremove the bulb holder.

X Turn signal lamp;;: lightly press the bulbinto the bulb holder, turn it anti-clockwiseand remove it from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reversing lamp==: remove the bulb fromthe bulb holder.

144 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)Lightsandwindscreenwipers

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Insert the bulb holder again.X Turn wing nut: 90° clockwise.X Insert the connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 144).

Windscreen wipers

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off! Do not operate the windscreen wiperswhen the windscreen is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windscreen canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windscreen is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the wind-screen wipers in dry weather conditions,always operate them using washer fluid.

! If the windscreen wipers leave smears onthe windscreen after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, this maybe due to wax or other residue. Clean thewindscreen with washer fluid after an auto-matic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windscreenbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windscreen wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could damage the wind-screen wiper blades or scratch the wind-screen.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windscreen wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windscreen wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î to wipe the wind-

screen using washer fluidX Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä orÅ position, the appropriate wiping fre-quency is automatically set according to theintensity of the rain. In the Å position, therain sensor is more sensitive than in the Äposition, causing the windscreen wipers towipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windscreenwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you can betrapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.

Windscreen wipers 145


Z

Always switch off the windscreen wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the bonnet if a windscreenwiper arm has been folded away from thewindscreen.Never fold a windscreen wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windscreen.Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windscreen wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windscreen, thewindscreen may be damaged by the forceof the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiperblades, make sure that you touch only thewiper arm of the windscreen wiper.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

Moving the wiper blades to the verticalpositionOn vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:X Turn the key to position1or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Set the windscreen wipers to position°.

X When the wiper arms have reached the ver-tical position, turn the key to position 0 andremove it from the ignition lock.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-screen.

On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windscreen wipers to position

°.X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windscreen wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached the ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-screen.

Removing the wiper blades

X Hold onto the wiper arm with one hand.With the other hand, turn wiper blade indirection of arrow: away from the wiperarm as far as it will go.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the removal position witha noticeable click.

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction ofarrow? away from the wiper arm.

146 Windscreen wipersLightsandwindscreenwipers

Fitting the wiper blades

X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiperarm in the direction of arrow:.

X Slide catch; in the direction of arrow=until it engages in the locking position witha noticeable click.

X Make sure that wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-screen.

X Remove the protective film of the serviceindicator on the tip of the wiper blade.

i If the colour of the service indicatorchanges from black to yellow, the wiperblades should be replaced. The duration ofthe colour change varies depending on theterms of use.

Windscreen wipers 147


Z

Problems with the windscreen wipers


The windscreen wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreenwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignitionlock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.

The windscreen wipersfail completely.

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windscreen washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe centre of the wind-screen.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

148 Windscreen wipersLightsandwindscreenwipers

Useful information ............................ 150Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 150Operating the climate control sys-tem ..................................................... 156Adjusting the air vents ..................... 177

149

Climatecontrol

Useful information



Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise mist up.To prevent the windows from misting up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the "demistwindscreen" functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand air humidity in the vehicle interior. Theinterior filter cleans the air, thus improvingthe interior climate.For vehicleswithout hybrid drive, the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function is availa-ble when the engine is running. For hybridvehicles, the coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction is also available via the electricrefrigerant compressor when the engine isnot running. Optimum climate control is onlyachieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 166).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 107).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odours. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the Service Booklet. Asthis depends on environmental conditions,e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Service Booklet.

i It is possible that the blower may be acti-vated automatically 60 minutes after thekey has been removed depending on vari-ous factors, e.g. the outside temperature.The vehicle is then ventilated for30 minutes to dry the automatic climatecontrol.

150 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)

Vehicles with auxiliary heating: To set the temperature, left (Y page 160); To set the air distribution (Y page 161)= To set the airflow (Y page 162)

To switch the climate control off (Y page 156)? To set climate control to automatic mode (Y page 159)A To demist the windscreen (Y page 163)B To call up the Audio 20/COMANDOnline climate control menu; see the separate operating

instructionsTo activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 166)

C To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164)D To switch the auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 172)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165)F To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 160)

Overview of climate control systems 151

Climatecontrol

Vehicles without auxiliary heating: To set the temperature, left (Y page 160); To set the air distribution (Y page 161)= To set the airflow (Y page 162)


instructionsC To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164)D To activate/deactivate synchronisation (Y page 162)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165)F To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 160)

Information on using THERMATICautomatic climate control

THERMATIC automatic climate controlThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto-matic climate control.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp abovetheÃ rocker switch lights up. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidification" function isnot activated automatically in automatic

mode. If necessary, activate this function(Y page 157).RSet the temperature to 22 †.ROnly use the windscreen demisting func-tion briefly until the windscreen is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odours orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.


AGILITY SELECT switchYou can choose between various drive pro-grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch.RManual transmission (Y page 191)RAutomatic transmission (Y page 197)If you have selected drive program E, the cli-mate control switches to Eco mode.In Eco mode:Rthe cooling output is reduced when coolingRwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and heat output is reducedas a resultRthe rear window heating running time isreduced

If you have selected drive program C, S or S+the climate control switches to Comfortmode. The current climate control settingsare maintained in Comfort mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control out-put, you can switch off the ECO start/stopfunction by pressing the ECO button(Y page 187).

Hybrid vehiclesThe cooling with air dehumidification functionis available when the vehicle is operationaland the READY indicator is lit (Y page 276).If the internal combustion engine has beenshut off automatically, the set interior tem-perature will be maintained for a certainperiod of time.


Climatecontrol

Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Vehicles with auxiliary heatingFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 160); To set the air distribution, left (Y page 161)= To set the airflow (Y page 162)



C To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164)D To switch the auxiliary heating on/off (Y page 172)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165)F To set the air distribution, right (Y page 161)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 160)

Rear control panelH To set the temperature (Y page 160)I DisplayJ To set the airflow (Y page 162)


Vehicles without auxiliary heatingFront control panel

: To set the temperature, left (Y page 160); To set the air distribution, left (Y page 161)= To set the airflow (Y page 162)



C To switch the rear window heating on/off (Y page 164)D To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 157)E To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 165)F To set the air distribution, right (Y page 161)G To set the temperature, right (Y page 160)

Rear control panelH To set the temperature (Y page 160)I DisplayJ To set the airflow (Y page 162)

Information onusing THERMOTRONICautomatic climate control

THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrolThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the most

out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-mate control.RActivate climate control using theÃrocker switch. The indicator lamp abovetheÃ rocker switch lights up. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidification" function isnot activated automatically in automatic


Climatecontrol

mode. If necessary, activate this function(Y page 157).RSet the temperature to 22 †.ROnly use the windscreen demisting func-tion briefly until the windscreen is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odours orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off. Theresidual heat function is deactivated whenthe ignition is switched on.

AGILITY SELECT switchYou can choose between various drive pro-grams with the AGILITY SELECT switch.RManual transmission (Y page 191)RAutomatic transmission (Y page 197)If you have selected drive program E, the cli-mate control switches to Eco mode.In Eco mode:Rthe cooling output is reduced when coolingRwhen heating, the electrical heater boosteris deactivated and heat output is reducedas a resultRthe rear window heating running time isreduced

If you have selected drive program C, S or S+the climate control switches to Comfortmode. The current climate control settingsare maintained in Comfort mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control out-put, you can switch off the ECO start/stop

function by pressing the ECO button(Y page 187).

Hybrid vehiclesThe cooling with air dehumidification functionis available when the vehicle is operationaland the READY indicator is lit (Y page 276).If the internal combustion engine has beenshut off automatically, the set interior tem-perature will be maintained for a certainperiod of time.

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could mist up.Therefore, only switch off climate controlbriefly.Switch on climate control primarily using theÃ rocker switch (Y page 159).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To switch on: press thet/!rocker switch up or down.The Audio 20/COMAND Online climatecontrol menu opens.

X Activate the climate control using the air-conditioning function bar; see the separateAudio 20/COMAND Online operatinginstructions.

orX Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.

156 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

X To switch off: press thet/!rocker switch up or down.The Audio 20/COMAND Online climatecontrol menu opens.

X Deactivate the climate control using theair-conditioning function bar; see the sep-arate Audio 20/COMANDOnline operatinginstructions.

orX Set the airflow to level 0 using theHrocker switch.

Activating/deactivating the coolingwith air dehumidification function

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can mist up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidifi-cation" function only briefly.For vehicleswithout hybrid drive, the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function is availa-ble when the engine is running. For hybridvehicles, the coolingwith air dehumidificationfunction is also available via the electricrefrigerant compressor when the engine isnot running. The air inside the vehicle iscooled and dehumidified according to thetemperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when cooling mode is active. Thisis normal and not a sign that there is a mal-function.


THERMATIC automatic climate controlX To activate: press the¿ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

orX Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function via Audio 20/COMANDOnline (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X To deactivate: press the¿ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

orX Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation function via Audio 20/COMANDOnline (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol without auxiliary heatingX To activate: press the¿ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchlights up.

orX Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function via Audio 20/COMANDOnline (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X To deactivate: press the¿ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the rocker switchgoes out.

orX Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation function via Audio 20/COMANDOnline (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

Operating the climate control system 157

Climatecontrol

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol with auxiliary heatingYou can activate or deactivate the coolingwith air dehumidification function usingAudio 20/COMAND Online; see the separateoperating instructions.


Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


THERMOTRONICwith auxiliary heat-ing: cooling with airdehumidification canno longer be switchedon using Audio 20/COMAND Online; seethe separate operatinginstructions.

The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactiva-ted due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

THERMATIC/THERMOTRONICwithout auxiliaryheating: the indicatorlamp in the¿ but-ton flashes three timesor remains off. Thecooling with air dehu-midification functioncan also no longer beactivated using Audio20/COMAND Online(see the separate oper-ating instructions).

The cooling with air dehumidification function has been deactiva-ted due to a malfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automaticmode

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" function must be activatedmanually in automatic mode. If necessary,"Cooling with air dehumidification" can alsobe deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-

cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can mist up more quickly. Therefore,only switch off cooling with air dehumidifica-tion for a short period.


Climatecontrol

Automatic controlX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front controlunit.

orX Set the desired temperature usingAudio 20/COMAND Online; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

X To activate: press theÃ rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above theÃ rockerswitch lights up.

X To switch tomanual operation: press theH rocker switch up or down.

orX Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMANDOnline; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

orX Press the upper or lower section of the_ rocker switch.

orX Set the air distribution using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operat-ing instructions.The indicator lamp above theÃ rockerswitch goes out.

In automaticmode, if you adjust the airflow orair distribution manually, the indicator lampabove theÃ rocker switch goes out. Thefunction which has not been changed man-ually, however, continues to be controlledautomatically. When the manually set func-tion switches back to automatic mode, theindicator lamp above theÃ rocker switchlights up again.

Setting the climate modeThis function is only available withTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control.

In automatic mode you can select the follow-ing airflow settings for the driver's and front-passenger areas:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less of a draughtX To set: set the climate mode using Audio20/COMAND Online (see separate operat-ing instructions).

Setting the temperature

THERMATIC automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch.

orX Set the temperature using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operat-ing instructions.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 22 †.

THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol

General notes

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones


You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.

Setting the temperature in the front com-partment using the front control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch.


Setting the temperature in the rear com-partment using the front control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Set the temperature with thew rockerswitch on the front control panel.


X Press the upper or lower section ofthe! rocker switch.The climate control menu in Audio 20/COMAND Online opens.

X Select the synchronisation function; seeseparate Audio 20/COMAND Online oper-ating instructions.The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

Setting the temperature in the rear com-partment using the rear control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of thew rocker switch onthe rear control panel (Y page 154).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 22 †.The set temperature appears on the rear-compartment display.

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-

ter ventsP Directs the airflow through the centre

and side air ventsO Directs the airflow through the foot-

well air ventsS Directs the airflow through the centre

and side air vents as well as the foot-well air vents

a Directs the airflow through the foot-well and demister vents

_ Directs the airflow through the demis-ter vents, the centre and side air ventsas well as the footwell air vents

b Directs the airflow through the centreand side air vents as well as the demis-ter vents

W Sets the air distribution to automatic

SettingTHERMOTRONIC automatic climate control:you can set the air distribution separately forthe driver's and front-passenger side.X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 181).X Press the_ button up or down.The various air distribution settings appearin Audio 20/COMAND Online.


Climatecontrol

X Press and hold the_ button upwardsuntil the desired position is reached.

orX Set the air distribution using Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the separate operat-ing instructions.

Setting the airflow

THERMATIC automatic climate controlX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theH rocker switch.


THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol

Setting the front-compartment airflowYou can set the airflow separately for thefront and rear compartment.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theH rocker switch.


Setting the rear compartment airflowX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Press the upper or lower section ofthe! rocker switch.The Audio 20/COMAND Online climatecontrol menu opens.

X Select the synchronisation function in theclimate control menu; see separate

Audio 20/COMAND Online operatinginstructions.The airflow setting for the front area isadopted for the rear compartment.

Setting the rear compartment airflowusing the rear control panelX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To increase/reduce: press the upper orlower section of theK/I rockerswitch on the rear control panel.The selected airflow level is shown in therear-compartment display.

Activating/deactivating the synchro-nisation function

General notesClimate control can be set centrally using thesynchronisation function. The temperaturesetting is adopted for the front-passengerside. For THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol, the temperature setting is adoptedfor the front-passenger side and rear com-partment.


THERMATIC automatic climate controlwithout auxiliary heatingX Press the0 rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp in the0 rockerswitch lights up or goes out.

orX Activate/deactivate the synchronisationfunction using Audio 20/COMAND Online;see the separate operating instructions).

The synchronisation function deactivates ifthe settings for the front-passenger side arechanged.


THERMATIC automatic climate controlwith auxiliary heatingX Activate/deactivate the synchronisationfunction using Audio 20/COMAND Online;see the separate operating instructions).

The synchronisation function deactivates ifthe settings for the front-passenger side arechanged.

THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trolX Activate/deactivate the synchronisationfunction using Audio 20/COMAND Online;see the separate operating instructions).

The synchronisation function is deactivated:Rif the settings for the front-passenger sideare changedRif the settings for the rear compartment arechanged

Demisting the windscreen

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-screen or to demist the inside of the wind-screen and the front side windows.Switch off the windscreen demisting functionas soon as the windscreen is clear again.

Activating/deactivating the wind-screen demisting functionX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To activate: press the¬ rocker switchon the front control unit up or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch lights up. The current climate con-trol settings are deactivated.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windscreen andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode offi If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated. In thiscase, the indicator lamp above the¿ button remains switched off.

X To deactivate: press the¬ rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¬ rockerswitch goes out. The previous settings arereactivated. Air-recirculation moderemains deactivated.

orX Press the top or bottom section of theÃrocker switch.

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function with the¿ rockerswitch.

orX Activate the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function via Audio 20/COMANDOnline; see the separate operating instruc-tions.For THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol with auxiliary heating, the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function can onlybe activated using Audio 20/COMANDOnline.

X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.

X If the windows continue tomist up, activatethe windscreen demisting function usingthe¬ rocker switch.i You should only select this setting untilthe windscreen is clear again.


Climatecontrol

Windows misted up on the outsideX Activate the windscreen wipers.X Switch on automatic mode using theÃrocker switch.i If you clean the windows regularly, theydo not mist up so quickly.

Rear window heating

General notesThe rear window heating has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the window is clear. It otherwiseswitches off automatically after severalminutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow heating may switch off.


X Press the¤ rocker switch up or down.The indicator lamp above the¤ rockerswitch lights up or goes out.


Problems with the rear window heating


The rear window heat-ing has switched offprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heat-ing can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can also temporarily deactivate the flowof fresh air manually if unpleasant odours areentering the vehicle from outside. The airalready inside the vehicle will then be recir-culated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can mist up more quickly, in partic-ular at low temperatures. Only use air-recir-culation mode briefly to prevent the windowsmisting up.


X To activate: press theg rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automat-ically:Rat high outside temperaturesRat high levels of pollution (THERMOTRONICautomatic climate control only)Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation sys-tem only)

The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch is not lit when automatic air-recircula-tion mode is activated. Outside air is addedafter about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode is deactivated auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 5 †Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 5 † ifthe cooling with air dehumidification func-tion is activated

Convenience opening/closing usingthe air-recirculation button

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating.When closingmake sure that no parts ofthe body are in the closing area.

G WARNINGDuring convenience opening parts of the bodycould be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.There is a risk of injury.


Climatecontrol

Z

When opening, make sure that nobody istouching the side window. If someonebecomes trapped, press theW switchimmediately to open/close the side windowin the door. The side window stops. To con-tinue closing the side window, pull on theW switch.

X Convenience closing feature (vehicleswith a sliding sunroof/panorama slid-ing sunroof): press and hold thegrocker switch up or down until the side win-dows and the sliding sunroof/panoramasliding sunroof start to close automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up. Air-recirculation mode isactivated.

X Convenience closing feature (vehicleswithout a sliding sunroof/panoramasliding sunroof): press and hold thegrocker switch up or down until the side win-dows start to close automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up. Air-recirculation mode isactivated.If you open the side windows or the slidingsunroof/panorama sliding sunroof man-ually after closing them with the conveni-ence closing feature, theywill remain in thisposition when opened using the conveni-ence opening feature.

If parts of the body are in the closing areaduring convenience closing, proceed as fol-lows:X Press theW button for opening/closingthe side windows.The side windows stop.

X To then open the side window, press theW button again.

X Only vehicles with sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof: press the

3 switch to open/close the sliding sun-roof/panorama sliding sunroof.The sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-roof stops.

X To then open the sliding sunroof/pano-rama sliding sunroof, pull back on the3button.

Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:Rthe side windows (Y page 106)Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-roof (Y page 111)

X Convenience opening feature (vehicleswith a sliding sunroof/panorama slid-ing sunroof): press and hold thegrocker switch up or down until the side win-dows and the sliding sunroof/panoramasliding sunroof start to open automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out. Air-recirculation mode isdeactivated.

X Convenience opening feature (vehicleswithout a sliding sunroof/panoramasliding sunroof): press and hold thegrocker switch up or down until the side win-dows start to open automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out. Air-recirculation mode isdeactivated.

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only availablewith THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-trol and THERMATIC automatic climate con-trol with auxiliary heating.Once the engine is switched off, it is possibleto make use of the residual heat of the engineto continue heating or ventilating the frontcompartment of the vehicle for approximately30 minutes. The heating or ventilation timedepends on the set interior temperature.


Activating/deactivatingX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 181).

X To activate: press the! rocker switchup or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch lights up.

The blower will run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.X To deactivate: press the! rockerswitch up or down.The indicator lamp above the! rockerswitch goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRwhen the auxiliary heating is switched on

Perfume atomiser

Operating the perfume atomiser

G WARNINGIf children open the perfume vial, they coulddrink the perfume or it could come into con-tactwith their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Donot leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consulta doctor. If perfume comes into contact withyour eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with cleanwater. If you continue to experience difficul-ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental noteFull perfume vials must notbe disposed of with house-hold rubbish. They must becollected separately and dis-posed of in an environmen-

tally responsible recyclingsystem.

Dispose of full perfume vialsin an environmentallyresponsible manner andtake them to a special wastecollection point.

: Perfume lid; Perfume vialThe perfume atomiser helps to improve driv-ing comfort.Using Audio 20/COMAND Online, you can:Rswitch the perfume atomiser on/off (seeseparate Audio 20/COMAND Online oper-ating instructions)Rregulate the perfume intensity (see the sep-arate Audio 20/COMANDOnline operatinginstructions)

The following conditions can affect your per-ception of the perfume intensity:Roperating mode of the automatic climatecontrolRinterior temperatureRtime of year/dayRair humidityRphysiological condition of occupants, e.g.fatigue or hunger

The perfume atomiser can only be operatedwhen the automatic climate control isswitched on and is only active when the glovecompartment is closed.The perfume atomiser is provided with a pre-filled perfume vial. You can also choose from


Climatecontrol

Z

a variety of filled perfume vials and an emptyvial which you can fill yourself.If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe theseparate information sheet attached to thevial.

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benzinterior perfumes, observe themanufactur-ers' safety notices on the perfume packag-ing.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when itis empty. Dispose of the used vial after use.X To insert the perfumevial: open the glovecompartment (Y page 369).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as faras it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out theperfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lidof the empty perfume vial to refill it your-self.

X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml ofthe desired liquid perfume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outsidethe vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfumecould drip into the interior and contaminateit.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with thesame perfume. Otherwise, youmight not ach-ieve optimum results from the perfume atom-iser.


Problems with the perfume atomiser


The vehicle interior isnot perfumed althoughthe perfume atomiser isactivated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as itwill go.X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not adequately filled.X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial.X Use a new pre-filled vial.X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of thesame perfume.

The perfume atomiser is faulty.X Have the perfume atomiser checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

IonisationIonisation is used to purify and freshen the airin the vehicle interior, which is conducive to apleasant climate.The ionisation of the interior air is odourlessand cannot, directly, be perceived in the vehi-cle interior.You can switch ionisation on/off using Audio20/COMAND Online (see the separate oper-ating instructions).Ionisation can only be operated when theautomatic climate control is switched on. Theside air vent on the driver's side must beopen.

Pre-entry climate control

General notesThe pre-entry climate control function is onlyavailable for hybrid vehicles.Before getting in, the driver's seat area can bebriefly warmed or ventilated in advance andthe air from the air vents can be pre-cooled.

The high-voltage battery must be sufficientlycharged before the pre-entry climate controlcan be activated.When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the followingfunctions are activated:Rautomatic climate controlRblowerRseat ventilationIf the vehicle is preheated, the seat heating isactivated.If you have switched on the perfume atomiseror ionisation using Audio 20/COMANDOnline, these will be activated together withthe pre-entry climate control.Switching on the perfume atomiser/ionisa-tion (see the separate Audio 20/COMANDOnline operating instructions).

Activating/deactivating the pre-entryclimate controlBefore the pre-entry climate control can beactivated, you must activate the function viaAudio 20/COMAND Online (see separateoperating instructions).


Climatecontrol

Z

X To activate pre-entry climate control:unlock the vehiclewith the key or KEYLESS-GO.The air-conditioning functions are activatedfor up to 120 seconds for preheating andfor up to 60 seconds for pre-cooling.

The pre-entry climate control switches offautomatically when the engine is started.Seat heating (heating), seat ventilation (ven-tilation), perfume atomiser and ionisationremain switched on after starting the engine.


Problems with the pre-entry climate control


The pre-entry climatecontrol cannot beswitched on or hasswitched itself off.

The charge status of the high-voltage battery is under the specifiedminimum charge status.X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill.The internal combustion engine drives the electric motor. Theelectric motor is operating as an alternator. The high-voltagebattery is charging.

Further information on charging the high-voltage battery(Y page 416).

The pre-entry climate control was started more than twice whenthe engine was switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Try again to switch the pre-entry climate control on.

The difference between the interior temperature and the desiredtemperature is too small.X Increase the difference between the interior temperature andthe desired temperature.

Remote activation of heating and ven-tilation system

General notesRemote activation is only available on vehi-cles with the BlueEFFICIENCY package.The driver's and front-passenger seat areascan also be heated or ventilated when theengine is switched off.The starter battery must be sufficientlycharged before remote activation can beswitched on.When the vehicle is heated, the followingfunctions are activated:Rseat heatingRrear window heatingRexterior mirror heatingWhen the vehicle is ventilated, the followingfunctions are activated:RblowerRseat ventilation

If you have activated ionisation using Audio20/COMAND Online (see separate operatinginstructions), it is activated together with theremote activation function.

Activating/deactivating the remoteactivation functionX To switch on remote activation: push theclimate control symbol button on the key.The air-conditioning functions are switchedon, for up to 10 minutes for heating and upto 120 minutes for ventilation.

Remote activation switches off automaticallyif:Rthe ignition is switched on, orRthe engine is startedSeat heating (heating), seat ventilation (ven-tilation) and ionisation remain switched onafter starting the engine.


Climatecontrol

Z

Problems with remote activation


Remote activation can-not be switched on orhas switched itself off.

Remote activation was started more than three times when theengine was switched off.X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds.X Try again to switch remote activation on.

The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.X Charge the starter battery.X Try again to switch remote activation on.

Auxiliary heating


G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficientventilation is not possible, toxic exhaustfumes can enter the vehicle, especially car-bon monoxide. This is the case, e.g. inenclosed spaces, or if the vehicle is stuck insnow. There is a risk of fatal injuries.You should switch off the auxiliary heating inenclosed spaces which do not have an extrac-tion system, e.g. a garage. If the vehicle isstuck in snow and youmust leave the auxiliaryheating running, keep the exhaust pipe andthe area around the vehicle clear of snow. Toguarantee a sufficient supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle away fromthe wind.

G WARNINGWhen the auxiliary heating is switched on,parts of the vehicle can become very hot.Flammable materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs may ignite if they come into contactwith:Rhot parts of the exhaust systemRthe exhaust gas itselfThere is a risk of fire.

When the auxiliary heating is switched on,make sure that:Rno flammable materials come into contactwith hot vehicle componentsRthe exhaust gas can escape from theexhaust pipe unhinderedRthe exhaust gas does not come into contactwith flammable materials.

The auxiliary heating is fitted under the frontwing on the right-hand side of the vehicle. Theemissions outlet is found behind the frontwheel on the right hand side of the vehicle.

! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion draws on the vehicle battery. After youhave heated or ventilated the vehicle amaximum of two times, drive for a longerdistance.

Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly oncea month for about ten minutes.The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-cle interior to the set temperature. Thisoccurs without using the heat of the runningengine. The auxiliary heating is operateddirectly using the vehicle's fuel. For this rea-son, the tank content must be at least atreserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliaryheating functions.The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-cally adjusts to changes in temperature andweather conditions. For this reason, the aux-


iliary heating could switch from ventilationmode to heating mode or from heating modeto ventilation mode.The auxiliary heating switches off when theengine is switched off. The auxiliary ventila-tion is not active if the engine is running.The auxiliary heating/ventilation switches offautomatically after 30minutes. This time limitcan be altered. To do this, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation tocool the vehicle interior to a temperaturelower than the outside temperature.

Before switching onX Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front controlunit.

orX Set the desired temperature usingAudio 20/COMAND Online; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

If you do not alter the temperature beforeswitching on the auxiliary heating, the lasttemperature setting will be adopted.Auxiliary heating or ventilation can also beswitched on if the manually set climate con-trol is activated. Optimum comfort can beattained when the system is set to automaticmode. Set the temperature to 22 †.You can activate or deactivate the auxiliaryheating/ventilation:Rusing the rocker switch on the centre con-sole (Y page 173)Rusing the remote control (Y page 173)The on-board computer can be used to spec-ify up to three departure times, one of whichmay be preselected:Rusing the remote control (Y page 173)Rusing Audio 20/COMAND Online; see theseparate operating instructions

Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-lation on/off using the centre consolerocker switchThe colours of the indicator lamps in therocker switch have the following meanings:Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched onRed Auxiliary heating switched onYellow Departure time preselected

X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventila-tionon:press rocker switch: up or down.The red or the blue indicator lamp aboverocker switch: lights up.

X To set the temperature: switch on auxili-ary heating/ventilation.Audio 20/COMAND Online is activated forapproximately one minute.

X Set the desired temperature usingAudio 20/COMAND Online; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.

X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion off: press rocker switch: up ordown.The red or the blue indicator lamp aboverocker switch: goes out.

Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-lation on/off using the remote control

General notesYour vehicle comes with one remote control.You may use two additional remote controlsfor your vehicle. For more information, pleasecontact a qualified specialist workshop.


Climatecontrol

Z

Store the remote control for the auxiliaryheating so that the auxiliary heating cannotbe switched on unintentionally. In particular,ensure that the remote control for the auxili-ary heating is kept out of the reach of chil-dren.The remote control has a range of approx-imately 300metres. This range is reduced by:Rsources of radio interferenceRsolid objects between the remote controland the vehicleRthe remote control being in an unfavoura-ble position in relation to the vehicleRtransmitting from an enclosed space

i The optimum range can be achieved if youhold the remote control vertically, pointingupwards when you press one of the but-tons.

If the remote control battery is low, the bat-tery symbol on the left of the display is shownas empty. Replace the remote control batteryand observe the important safety notes whendoing so (Y page 175).

Switching the auxiliary heating/ventila-tion on/off

Remote control: Display; u Switches on the auxiliary heating/

ventilation/checks status= . Sets the departure time? ^ Switches off the auxiliary heating/

ventilationA , Sets the departure time

X To switch on: press and hold theubutton.ONON is shown in the remote control display.

X To switch off: press and hold the^button.OFFOFF is shown in the remote control display.

Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-ing/ventilationX Briefly press theu button.The following messages may appear in thedisplay:

Display Meaning

The auxiliary heating/ventilation is switchedoff.

The auxiliary ventilationis switched on. The num-ber in the display showsthe remaining time (inminutes) for the auxiliaryventilation.

The auxiliary heating isswitched on. The numberin the display shows theremaining time (inminutes) for the auxiliaryheating.

A departure time hasbeen activated. Thedeparture time appearsin the display.


A departure time hasbeen activated. The aux-iliary ventilation is cur-rently activated. Thenumber in the displayshows the remainingtime (in minutes) for theauxiliary ventilation. Ifthe vehicle is not startedafter this time, the run-ning time is increased byfive minutes.

A departure time hasbeen activated. The aux-iliary heating is currentlyactivated. The number inthe display shows theremaining time (inminutes) for the auxiliaryheating. If the vehicle isnot started after thistime, the running time isincreased by fiveminutes.

If the engine has not yet reached operatingtemperature when it is started, the auxiliaryheating running time is increased. The auxili-ary heating continues to run until the operat-ing temperature is reached. If this is the case,they symbol appears in the remote con-trol display and the running time is zerominutes.

Setting the departure timeMake sure that the time set in the vehicle iscorrect before setting the departure time (seeseparate operating instructions). Otherwise,the auxiliary heating may switch on at thewrong time and at an unsuitable location.When setting the departure time, alsoobserve the important safety notes(Y page 172).

X Briefly press theu button.X Press the, or. button repeatedlyuntil the time to be changed appears in thedisplay.

X Press theu and^ buttons simulta-neously.TheÎ symbol in the remote control dis-play flashes.

X Press the, or. button to set thedesired departure time.i The longer you press the, or.button, the faster the time changes.

X Press theu and^ buttons simulta-neously.The new departure time is stored.

Activating the set departure timeX Briefly press theu button.X Press the, or. button repeatedlyuntil the desired departure time appears inthe display.

X Press theu button.TheÍ symbol, the departure time and,depending on the selected departure time,the letter A, B or C appear in the display.

Deactivating the set departure timeX Briefly press theu button.X Press the, or. button.The status of the auxiliary heating is shownin the display.

X Press the. button.The first departure time stored appears inthe display.

X Press the^ button.OFFOFF is shown in the remote control display.

Replacing the remote control battery

Important safety notesG WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.


Climatecontrol

Z

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

Replacing the battery

If the battery needs to be replaced, the bat-tery symbol on the left of the display is shownas empty. A CR2450 lithium battery isrequired when replacing the battery.X Press a pointed object into recess:.X Slide battery cover; backwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Remove old battery=.X Insert the new battery with the letteringfacing upwards.

X Slide battery cover; in the opposite direc-tion to the arrow on the remote control untilit engages.

X Use the remote control to check the vehi-cle's auxiliary heating functions.


Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

FAIL¨ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle isfaulty.X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer ifnecessary.

X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or offusing the remote control.

FAIL The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.X Charge the starter battery.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating usingthe remote control.

The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating usingthe remote control.

FAIL¯ The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or has switched itselfoff.The auxiliary heating is faulty.X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Adjusting the air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreenand the bonnet free of blockages, such asice, snow or leavesRnever cover the vents or ventilation grillesin the vehicle interior

Adjusting the air vents 177

Climatecontrol

Z

Adjusting the centre air vents

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel?,AorB to the left or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold centre airvent:,; or= by thumbwheel?,A orB and move it up or down or to the left orright.

Adjusting the side air vents

: Side window demister vent; Side air vent, left= Thumbwheel for left side air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side airvent; by thumbwheel= and move it upor down or to the left or right.

Setting the rear-compartment airventsRear air vents are not available in all vehicles.

Vehicles with THERMATIC automatic climate con-trol

Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC automatic climatecontrol: Rear-compartment air vent, left; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel? Rear control panelX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold rear airvent: or; by themiddle fin andmove upor down or to the left or right.

178 Adjusting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Useful information ............................ 180Running-in notes ............................... 180Driving ............................................... 180Manual transmission ........................ 190Automatic transmission ................... 193Refuelling ........................................... 200Parking ............................................... 207Driving tips ........................................ 211Driving systems ................................ 216Hybrid operation ............................... 269Towing a trailer ................................. 283

179

Drivingandparking

Useful information



Running-in notes

Important safety notesIn certain driving and driving safety systems,the sensors adjust automatically while a cer-tain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full sys-tem effectiveness is not reached until the endof this teach-in procedure.Brake pads/linings and discs that are eithernew or have been replaced only achieve opti-mum braking effect after several hundred kil-ometres of driving. Compensate for thereduced braking effect by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal.

The first 1,500 kmIf you treat the engine with sufficient carefrom the very start, you will be rewarded withexcellent performance for the remainder ofthe engine's life.RDrive at varying road speeds and enginespeeds for the first 1,500 km.RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during thisperiod, e.g. driving at full throttle.RWhen changing gears manually, change upin good time, before the rev counter needlereachesÔ of the way to the red area of therev counter.

RDo not shift down a gear manually in orderto brake.RVehicles with automatic transmission: tryto avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

After 1,500 km, youmay gradually acceleratethe vehicle to full road and engine speeds.You should also observe these notes on run-ning-in if the engine or parts of the drive trainon your vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the applicable speed limit.

Driving



G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brake

180 DrivingDrivingandparking

boosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only set the automatic transmission to therespective drive positions when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. Otherwise, you could damage thedrive train.

Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety instruc-tions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269).

Key positions

Key

g To remove the key1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windscreen wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 Starting the engine

i If the key does not belong to the vehicle, itcan still be turned in the ignition lock. How-ever, the ignition will not be switched onThe engine cannot be started.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open theshutters in the radiator trim by turning the keyto position2 in the ignition lock. After approx-imately 120 seconds the shutters open auto-matically. Further information on opening andcleaning the shutters (Y page 400).

Start/Stop button

General notesA checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the keydetermines whether a valid key is in the vehi-cle. This occurs, for example, when startingthe engine.To start the vehicle without actively using thekey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lockRthe key must be in the vehicleRthe vehicle must not be locked with the keyor KEYLESS-GO (Y page 91)

Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.Do not keep the key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another keyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfilmRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the key's functionality.

Driving 181

Drivingandparking

Z

If you lock the vehicle with the key's remotecontrol or with KEYLESS-GO, after a shorttime:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop buttonRyou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the but-ton on the front door (Y page 97), you cancontinue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehi-cle is in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for three seconds. Thisfunction operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine switch-off func-tion.

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windscreen wipers, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position

Removing the Start/Stop button

You can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the key.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and key operation whenthe transmission is in position P.When you insert Start/Stop button: intoignition lock;, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use Start/Stop button:.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle.


Starting the engine


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen doors, thereby endangering other per-sons or road usersRget out and be struck by oncoming trafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example

In addition, the children could also set thevehicle in motion, for example, if they:Rrelease the parking brakeRshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutralRstart the engineThere is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren and animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

General notesVehicles with a petrol engine: the catalyticconverter is preheated for up to 30 secondsafter a cold start. The sound of the enginemaychange during this time.

Manual transmissionYou can only start the engine when the clutchpedal is fully depressed.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Fully depress the clutch pedal.X Shift to neutral N.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P(Y page 193).The transmission position indicator in themultifunction display shows P(Y page 195).

You can also start the engine when the trans-mission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the keyTo start the engine using the key instead ofthe Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.X To start a petrol engine: turn the key toposition 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 181)and release it as soon as the engine is run-ning.

X To start a diesel engine: turn the key toposition 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 181).The% preglow indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X When the% preglow indicator lampgoes out, turn the key to position 3(Y page 181) and release it as soon as theengine is running.You can start the engine without preglow ifthe engine is warm.

Driving 183

Drivingandparking

Z

If the engine will not start:X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X Reinsert the key into the ignition lock aftera short waiting period.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).The indicator lamps in the instrument clus-ter light up (Y page 351).

X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181) and release it as soon asthe engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/StopbuttonThe Start/Stop button is only available onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function.The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehiclemanually without inserting the keyinto the ignition lock. The key must be in thevehicle and the Start/Stop button must beinserted in the ignition lock. This mode forstarting the engine operates independently ofthe ECO start/stop automatic engine startfunction.You can start the engine if a valid key is in thevehicle. Switch off the engine and always takethe key with you when leaving the vehicle,even if you only leave it for a short time. Payattention to the important safety notes.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 181).The engine starts.

X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 181).Preglow is activated and the engine starts.

Pulling away

Manual transmission

! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-ning thewheels. Otherwise, you could dam-age the vehicle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.X Release the electric parking brake(Y page 209).

X Release the brake pedal.X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gentlydepress the accelerator pedal.

Follow the shift recommendations in the mul-tifunction display for an economical drivingstyle (Y page 191).The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature, see the Digital Owner's Manual.

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease park. brakeRelease park. brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.


X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake (Y page 209) isautomatically released.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is theparking lock released. If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can stillbe moved but the parking lock remainsengaged.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature; see the Digital Owner's Manual.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Pulling away with a trailer

To ensure that you do not roll backwardswhen pulling away on an uphill slope, engagethe electric parking brake.

X Press and hold handle:.The electric parking brake continues tobrake and prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster remains lit.

X Depress the accelerator pedal.X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combinationis held by the driving force of the engine,release lever:.the electric parking brake is released.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

For further information on the electric parkingbrake, see (Y page 209).

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or adownhill gradient.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is in position N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

Driving 185

Drivingandparking

Z

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.When pulling away again, the engine startsautomatically. The ECO start/stop functionthereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-sumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayIf theè ECO symbol is shown in green inthe multifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine off automati-cally once the vehicle stops moving.The ECO start/stop function is activatedwhenever you switch on the engine using thekey or the Start/Stop button.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 187) or a malfunc-tion has caused the system to be deactivated,theè ECO symbol is not displayed.

Automatic engine switch-off

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland theè ECOsymbol is shown in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button lightsup greenRthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the systemRthe engine is at normal operating temper-atureRthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reachedRthe battery is sufficiently chargedRthe system detects that the windscreen isnot misted up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched onRthe bonnet is closedRno electrical connection is establishedbetween the vehicle and the trailer oranother carrier system (e.g. bicycle rack)Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened

If the conditions for automatic engine switch-off are not all fulfilled, theè ECO symbol isshown in yellow.All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is switched off automati-cally.

Vehicles with manual transmission


The ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically at low speeds.X Brake the vehicle.X Shift to neutral N (follow gearshift instruc-tion: to shift into neutralN, if necessary).

X Release the clutch pedal.The engine is switched off automatically.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

Automatic engine start

General notesThe engine is started automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO buttonRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-screen when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's charge status is too low

Vehicles with manual transmission! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal isdepressed.

The engine is started automatically when youdepress the clutch pedal.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if:Ryou switch to drive program S+Rin transmission position D or N, the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot activeRyou shift from transmission position PShifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.If you shift the transmission from R to D, theECO start/stop function is available againonce theè ECO symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Switching off/on the ECO start/stopfunction

X To switch off: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; and theè ECO sym-bol in the multifunction display go out.

X To switch on: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If all conditionsfor automatic engine switch-off(Y page 186) are met, theè ECO sym-bol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 186) are met, theèECO symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-tifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will

Driving 187

Drivingandparking

Z

then not be switched off automatically whenthe vehicle stops.Selecting drive program S+ deactivates theECO start/stop function. If you press ECObutton:, the ECO start/stop function isactivated.


Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 232) or DISTRONICPLUS (Y page 222).

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 183).

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in theignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop buttonrepeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster goout.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 183). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. Thereserve fuel warninglamp is lit and the fuelgauge display is at thereserve level.

The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 418).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 183).If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 189

Drivingandparking

Z


Vehicles with a petrolengine:The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture display is showingmore than 120 †. Adisplay message mayalso appear in the mul-tifunction display and awarning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 393). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continuedriving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Manual transmission

Gear lever! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal isdepressed.

! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,you should always push the gear lever allthe way to the right. Otherwise, you couldshift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gearand damage the transmission.If you shift down at too high a speed (trans-mission braking), this can cause the engineto overrev, leading to engine damage.Do not use the clutch bite point to keep thevehicle stationary on uphill gradients.There is otherwise a risk of damaging theclutch.

! On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a

trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 ingood time. This uses the engine's brakingeffect. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.

k Reverse gear1 -6 Forward gears

190 Manual transmissionDrivingandparking

Shifting to neutral N

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Move the gear lever to position N:.

Engaging reverse gear! Only shift into reverse gear R when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you coulddamage the transmission.

X Move the gear lever firmly to the left,beyond the point of resistance, then for-wards.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. For furtherinformation on the ECO start/stop function;see (Y page 186).

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-mendation: when shown in the multi-function display of the instrument cluster.

C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition: in driveprogram E the accelerator pedal also trans-mits double pulses. Additional informationfor drive programs (Y page 192).

AGILITY SELECT switchUse the AGILITY SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected, the following vehicle charac-teristics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 186)Rthe climate control settings

- THERMATIC (Y page 153)- THERMOTRONIC (Y page 156)Rthe rear window heating operation period(Y page 164)Rthe performance of the seat heating(Y page 123)

If the ignition is switched off for less than fourhours, the previously selected drive programis activated when the engine is next started. Ifthe ignition is switched off for more than fourhours, drive program C is activated when theengine is next started.

Manual transmission 191

Drivingandparking

Z

X Push AGILITY SELECT switch: up or downuntil the desired drive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five secondsthe display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive program set-tings are displayed in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display.

Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty drivingcharacteristics

S Sport Sporty driving character-istics

C Comfort Comfortable and econom-ical driving characteristics

E Eco Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 192).

Drive programs

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties ofthe drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRC 180 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition:availability of the economical acceleratorpedal

Information about the selection of drive pro-gram I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 canbe found in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits extremely sporty driv-ing characteristicsRthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicleswith AIRMATIC)Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving charac-teristicsRthe suspension exhibits stiff springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC)

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-cal driving characteristics.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.

Drive program E (Eco)Drive program E is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economi-cal driving characteristics.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Rthe performance of the air-conditioning andheating systems are reduced.

192 Manual transmissionDrivingandparking



G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Bear in mind that power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmission isinterrupted when the engine is switched off.For this reason, shift the automatic transmis-sion to P when the engine is switched off andthe vehicle is stationary. Apply the electricparking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-ing away.Hybrid Vehicles: observe the safety instruc-tions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269).

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns toits original position. The current transmissionposition P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-sion position display in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 195).

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high, do not shiftthe automatic transmission directly from DtoR, fromR toD or directly toP. Otherwise,the automatic transmission could be dam-aged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse gear

Automatic transmission 193

Drivingandparking

Z

i Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the key andremove the keyRyou switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's doorRyou open the driver's door when the vehicleis stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. For furtherinformation on the ECO start/stop function,see (Y page 186).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they can:Ropen doors and endanger other persons orroad usersRclimb out and be injured by the trafficRoperate vehicle equipment and, for exam-ple, trap themselves.

Children could also set the vehicle in motion,for example by:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take the keywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle. Alwayskeep the key out of reach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the key: if you then open one of thefront doors or remove the key from the igni-tion, the automatic transmission shifts to P.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen one of the front doors, the automatictransmission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:With the key:X Switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

194 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

With the Start/Stop button:X Switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and drive program E orS.

: Status symbol drive program; Transmission position= Gear

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.The arrows in the transmission position dis-play show how and into which transmissionpositions you can change using the DIRECTSELECT lever.

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from roll-ing away when stopped.Do not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 193) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. In order to securethe vehicle, always engage theelectric parking brake in addition tothe parking lock.The automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically if you:Rremove the keyRswitch off the engine when in Ror D and open one of the frontdoors

In the event of a malfunction of thevehicle's electronics, the transmis-sion may be locked in position P.Have the vehicle electronicschecked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.


Drivingandparking

Z

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission to positionNif the vehicle is in danger of skid-ding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch off the engine usingthe key or the Start/Stop button,the automatic transmission shiftsto neutral N automatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can lead todamage to the transmission.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. Gearshifting is deter-mined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 197)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currently selec-ted drive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is condu-cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-erated by the double-clutch function dependson the drive program selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting the trans-mission repeatedly between transmissionpositionsD and Rmay help to free the vehicleif it has become stuck in mud or snow.The vehicle's engine management restrictsrepeated shifting between gears D and R upto a maximum speed of 9 km/h.To shift back and forth between transmissionpositions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECTlever up and down past the point of resist-ance.

Towing a trailerTowing a trailer is not possible with all mod-els. For further information, see(Y page 284).X Drive in the middle of the engine speedrange on uphill gradients.

X Manual shifting: depending on the uphillor downhill gradient, shift into a gear(Y page 198) in which the engine will run inthe middle of the engine speed range.


This also applies if cruise control,DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC areactivated.

AGILITY SELECT switchUse the AGILITY SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected, the following vehicle charac-teristics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringRthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 186)Rthe climate control settings



X Push AGILITY SELECT switch: up or downuntil the desired drive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five seconds

the display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive program set-tings are displayed in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display.



S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty drivingcharacteristics

S Sport Sporty driving character-istics

C Comfort Comfortable and econom-ical driving characteristics

E Eco Particularly economicaldriving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 197).Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles,you can temporarily change gear yourself.Further information on the manual drive pro-gram (Y page 198).

Drive programs

Drive program I (Individual)In drive program I the following properties ofthe drive program can be selected:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steeringTo permanently select the gears in the driveprogram I using the steering wheel paddles,select the permanent manual gearshift pro-gram.Information about the selection of drive pro-gram I with COMAND Online or Audio 20 canbe found in the Digital Owner's Manual.


Drivingandparking

Z

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)Drive program S+ is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits extremely sporty driv-ing characteristicsRthe vehicle pulls away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRas a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-sibly being higherRthe suspension exhibits particularly stiffspringing and damping settings (vehicleswith AIRMATIC)Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available

Drive program S (Sport)Drive program S is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving charac-teristicsRthe vehicle pulls away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRas a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-sibly being higherRthe suspension exhibits stiff springing anddamping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC)

Drive program C (Comfort)Drive program C is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economi-cal driving characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.

Drive program E (Eco)Drive program E is characterised by the fol-lowing:Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economi-cal driving characteristics.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. The vehicle is driven in the lowengine speed range and thewheels are lesslikely to spin.Rduring deceleration, the engine is discon-nected from the drive train. The vehicleuses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel(overrun mode).Rthe performance of the air-conditioning andheating systems are reduced.

Manual gearshifting

General notes

: Left steering wheel gearshift paddle:shifts down

; Right steering wheel gearshift paddle:shifts up


Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles,you can temporarily change gear yourself.The transmission must be in position D.

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steeringwheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 198).Manual gearshifting is activated tempora-rily. The selected gear appears in the mul-tifunction display.

Further information on activating manualgearshifting in hybrid vehicles (Y page 278).

Shifting gearsPulling on the left or right gear shift paddleallows you to shift gears yourself for a limitedtime. Depending on which gearshift paddle ispulled, the automatic transmission immedi-ately shifts into the next gear up or down, ifpermitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 198).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine dam-age by not shifting down.Automatic downshifting occurs whencoasting.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual gearshifting, itwill remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual gearshifting is deactivated, thegears will be selected automatically.You can also deactivate manual gearshifting:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel gear-shift paddle and hold it in place(Y page 198).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift thetransmission position.

orX Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to changethe drive program (Y page 197).Manual gearshifting is deactivated.


Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Problems with hybrid operation (Y page 282).

Transfer caseThis section only applies to vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC). The front and rearaxles are constantly driven.

! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a two-axle roller dynamometer. Oth-erwise, the braking system or the transfercase could be damaged. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more informationon performance tests.

! Since ESP® engages automatically, theignition must be switched off (the key orStart/Stop button must be in position 0 or1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedusing a brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with only oneaxle raised (not permitted for vehicleswith 4MATIC).

The brake system could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.

Refuelling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefuelling.

G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel

200 RefuellingDrivingandparking

vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skinwith water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come intocontact with fuel immediately.

G WARNINGElectrostatic charge can cause sparks andthereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk offire and explosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. This discharges any electrostaticcharge that may have built up.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefuelling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.

G WARNINGVehicles with a diesel engine:If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with apetrol engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrongfuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuelsystem. Even small amounts of the wrongfuel can result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with adiesel engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrongfuel. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel sys-tem. Even small amounts of the wrong fuelcould result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. The repair costs are high.Notify a qualified specialist workshop andhave the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuelcan. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-tion system could otherwise be blocked byparticles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, some fuel mayspray out when you remove the fuel pumpnozzle.Further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 468).

Refuelling

General notesObserve the important safety notes(Y page 200).If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the out-side, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the8 fuel filler cap is dis-played in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Refuelling 201

Drivingandparking

Z

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tyre pressure table? Fuel type to be refuelledX Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the key having beenremoved.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck isdesigned for refuelling at diesel filling pumps.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.


Problems with the fuel and fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.There is a risk of fire or explosion.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same asthe key having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-pletely dry.X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds(Y page 181).

X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of ten secondsuntil it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start:X Turn the ignition on again a maximum of ten seconds(Y page 181).

X Start the engine again continuously for a maximum of ten sec-onds until it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Refuelling 203

Drivingandparking

Z


The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe key battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 91).orX Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element(Y page 93).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

AdBlue® (BlueTEC vehicles only)

Important notes on useTo function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gasaftertreatment must be operated with thereducing agent AdBlue®. Topping up AdBlue®is part of the maintenance work.When the supply of AdBlue® is down toapproximately 3.0 litres, the RefillRefillAdBlue See Owner's ManualAdBlue See Owner's Manual message isshown in the multifunction display.When the AdBlue® supply drops to a mini-mum, the RefillRefill AdBlueAdBlue NoNo startstart inin XXkmkmmessage is shown in themultifunction dis-play.If you drive the vehicle faster than 15 km/h,the Refill AdBlue See Owner's ManualRefill AdBlue See Owner's Manualmessage goes out after approximately oneminute.If the Refill AdBlue No start in X kmRefill AdBlue No start in X kmmessage is shown in the multifunction dis-play, you can still drive the vehicle over thedistance shown. If the AdBlue® is not toppedup, you will subsequently be unable tostart the engine. If the Refill AdBlueRefill AdBlueStart not possibleStart not possible message appears inthemultifunction display and the engine doesnot start, you must top up AdBlue®.

X Add at least 3.5 l of AdBlue®.X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec-onds.

X Start the engine.

i You can also have the AdBlue® tank refil-led at a qualified specialist workshop.

Before driving your vehicle outside Europe,have the AdBlue® supply checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop.Further information about BlueTEC exhaustgas aftertreatment and about AdBlue® canbe obtained from any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.

Important notes on the refilling proce-dure

AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for theexhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.It is:Rnon-toxicRcolourless and odourlessRnon-flammableIf you open the AdBlue® tank, small amountsof ammonia vapour may be released.Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour andare particularly irritating to the skin, tomucousmembranes and to the eyes. Youmayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,


nose and throat. You may also experiencecoughing and watery eyes.Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that maybe released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.Do not swallow AdBlue® or let it come intocontact with skin, eyes or clothing. KeepAdBlue® away from children.If you or others come into contact withAdBlue®, observe the following:Rimmediately rinse AdBlue® off your skinwith soap and water.Rif AdBlue® comes into contact with youreyes, immediately rinse them thoroughlywith clean water. Seek medical attentionimmediately.Rif AdBlue® is swallowed, immediately rinseyour mouth out thoroughly. Drink plenty ofwater. Seek medical attention immedi-ately.Rchange immediately out of clothing thathas come into contact with AdBlue®.

! Only use AdBlue® in accordance withISO 22241. Do not mix any additives withAdBlue®, and do not dilute AdBlue® withwater. This may destroy the BlueTECexhaust gas aftertreatment system.

! In order to fill the AdBlue® tank, the vehi-cle must be parked on a level surface. TheAdBlue® tank can only be filled as intendedwith the vehicle parked on a level surface.Fluctuations in capacity will thus be avoi-ded. Filling a vehicle standing on an unevensurface is not permitted. There is a dangerof overfilling, which can cause damage toBlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment com-ponents.

! Surfaces which have come into contactwith AdBlue® while refilling should berinsed immediately with water, or removeAdBlue® with a moist cloth and cold water.If AdBlue® has already crystallised, use asponge and cold water to clean the area.

AdBlue® residue crystallises after a certainamount of time and soils the affected sur-faces.

! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and mustnot be added to the fuel tank. If AdBlue® isadded to the fuel tank, this can lead toengine damage.

Have the AdBlue® tank refilled at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. However, you can alsotop up the AdBlue® tank:Rat a filling station with an AdBlue® fillingpumpRwith AdBlue® refill bottlesRwith an AdBlue® refill canisterWhen the pump nozzle switches off automat-ically during filling at a filling pump, theAdBlue® tank has been completely filled. Donot fill the AdBlue® tank any further. AdBlue®may leak out.To avoid transporting already opened refillcontainers in the vehicle, completely emptyrefill bottles or canisters when filling theAdBlue® tank, if possible.Further information on AdBlue®(Y page 472).

Opening the AdBlue® filler cap

Example: Saloon

Refuelling 205

Drivingandparking

Z

X Switch the ignition off.X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn blue AdBlue® filler cap; anti-clock-wise and remove it.AdBlue® filler cap; is secured with a plas-tic strip.

i The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you unlock or lock thevehicle.

AdBlue® refill canisters

! Do not tighten the disposable hose withtoo much force. The disposable hose mayotherwise be destroyed.

X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top ofAdBlue® refill canister;.

X Place disposable hose: on the opening ofAdBlue® refill canister; and screw it onclockwise until hand-tight.

Disposable hose: remains closed untilyou fasten disposable hose: to theAdBlue® filler neck of the vehicle.

X Place disposable hose: on the filler neckon the vehicle and screw it on clockwiseuntil hand-tight. When you feel resistance,disposable hose: is sufficiently secured.

X Lift up and tip AdBlue® refill canister;.Filling stops when the AdBlue® tank is com-pletely filled. Do not fill the AdBlue® tankany further. AdBlue® refill canister; canbe removed when it has been only partiallyemptied.

X Turn disposable hose: on the filler neckof the vehicle anti-clockwise and remove it.

X Turn disposable hose: on the opening ofAdBlue® refill canister; anti-clockwiseand remove it.

X Reseal AdBlue® refill canister; with thecap.

AdBlue® refill canisters are available at manyfilling stations or at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre. AdBlue® refill canisters are often soldwith a filler hose. A filler hose that does notexactly fit the vehicle's AdBlue® tank offersno protection against overfilling. AdBlue®may leak out as a result of overfilling.Mercedes-Benz offers a special disposablehose with overfill protection. You can obtainthis from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.AdBlue® is available in a variety of containersand receptacles. Only use the disposablehose with the Mercedes-Benz AdBlue® refillcanisters.

AdBlue® refill bottle

! Screw on the AdBlue® refill bottle onlyhand-tight. It may otherwise be destroyed.


X Unscrew the protective cap from AdBlue®refill bottle:.

X Place AdBlue® refill bottle: on the fillerneck as shown and screw it on hand-tight.

X Press AdBlue® refill bottle: towards thefiller neck.The AdBlue® tank is filled. This could last upto one minute.When AdBlue® refill bottle: is no longerpressed, filling stops and the bottle may betaken off again after being only partiallyemptied.

X Release AdBlue® refill bottle:.X Turn AdBlue® refill bottle: anti-clockwiseand remove it.

X Screw the protective cap onto AdBlue®refill bottle: again.

AdBlue® refill bottles are available at manyfilling stations or at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre. Refill bottles without a threaded sealoffer no protection against overfilling.AdBlue®may leak out as a result of overfilling.Mercedes-Benz offers special refill bottleswith a threaded cap. These are available atany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Closing the AdBlue® filler cap

Example: SaloonX Fit AdBlue® filler cap; on the filler neckand turn it clockwise.

X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in thedirection of arrow:.

X Drive faster than 15 km/h.The Refill AdBlue See Owner's Man‐Refill AdBlue See Owner's Man‐ualualmessage goes out after approximatelyone minute.

If the RefillRefill AdBlueAdBlue SeeSee Owner'sOwner's ManualManualmessage continues to be shown in the multi-function display, you must top up with moreAdBlue®.

Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rial can come into contact with hot vehiclecomponents. In particular, do not park on drygrassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brake

Parking 207

Drivingandparking

Z

boosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.


! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be appliedRon vehicles with manual transmission,engage first gear or reverse gearRon vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission must be in position P andthe key must be removed from the ignitionlockRthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe kerb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-entsRthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similarobject, for example, on uphill or downhillgradientsRa laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similarobject, for example, on uphill or downhillgradients

Switching off the engine


G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with manual transmissionX Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobiliser is activated.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the key: turn the key to position 0 inthe ignition lock and remove it.The immobiliser is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press theStart/Stop button (Y page 181).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to key position 1. When the driv-er's door is open, this corresponds to keyposition 0: "key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the key: if you then open one of thefront doors or remove the key from the igni-tion, the automatic transmission shifts to P.With the Start/Stop button: if you thenopen one of the front doors, the automatictransmission shifts to P.

208 ParkingDrivingandparking

If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:With the key:X Switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

With the Start/Stop button:X Switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off while the vehi-cle is in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for about three seconds.This function operates independently of theECO start/stop automatic engine switch-offfunction.

Electric parking brake

General notes


The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or if there is a malfunc-tion in the system, it may not be possible toapply the released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it fromrolling away.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:engage first gear.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake if the on-board voltage is low orif there is a malfunction in the system. Con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.The electric parking brake carries out a func-tion check at regular intervals when theengine is switched off. Noises that occur arenormal.

Parking 209

Drivingandparking

Z

Applying/releasing manually

X To apply: push handle:.When the electric parking brake is applied,the red! indicator lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the key is removed.

X To release: pull handle:.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rwhen the key is in position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 181) orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is applied auto-matically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill (vehicles with automatic trans-mission) orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary orRif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehi-cle at a standstill

In addition, at least one of the following con-ditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine is switched offRthe driver's door is open and the seat belt isnot fastened

Rthere is a system malfunctionRthe power supply is insufficientRthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy periodThe red! indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.The electric parking brake is not automati-cally applied if the engine is switched off bythe ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake of your vehicle isreleased automatically when all of the follow-ing conditions are fulfilled:Rthe engine is runningRVehicles with automatic transmission:the transmission is in position D or RRVehicles with manual transmission: agear is engagedRthe seat belt is fastenedRyou depress the accelerator pedalVehicles with automatic transmission:when the transmission is in position R theboot lid must be closed.Vehicles with manual transmission: whenreverse gear R is engaged, the boot lid mustbe closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closedRVehicles with automatic transmission:you are shifting from transmission positionP or have previously driven faster than3 km/hRVehicles with manual transmission: youhave previously driven faster than 3 km/h

Ensure that you do not depress the acceler-ator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise, theparking brake will be released and the vehiclewill start to move.

210 ParkingDrivingandparking

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle: of the elec-trical parking brake (Y page 209).

The vehicle is braked as long as you keephandle: of the electric parking brakedepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle: is depressed, the greater thebraking force.During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release park. brakeRelease park. brake messageappearsRthe red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is applied.

Parking up the vehicleIf you leave the vehicle parked up for longerthan four weeks, the batterymay be damagedby exhaustive discharging and further dam-aged in the event of this occurring again.X Disconnect the battery or connect it to atrickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longerthan six weeks, it may suffer from lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety notesfor the high-voltage battery (Y page 269).

Driving tips

General driving tips


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tyres should always be inflated to therecommended tyre pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theService Booklet or by the service intervaldisplay.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic, onshort journeys and in hilly terrain.

ECO displayThe ECO display shows you how economicalyour driving style is. The ECO display assistsyou in achieving the most economical drivingstyle for the selected settings and prevailingconditions. Consumption can be significantlyinfluenced by your driving style.

Driving tips 211

Drivingandparking

Z

: Acceleration; Coasting= Constant? Additional range achievedRange? is shown under Bonus fr. startBonus fr. startand represents the additional range achievedsince the beginning of the journey as a resultof an adapted driving style.If the fuel level has dropped into the reserverange, the Reserve fuelReserve fuel message is shownin the multifunction display instead ofrange?. In addition, the8 warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up(Y page 360).

The ECO display consists of three sections,with an inner and outer area. The sectionscorrespond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: mod-erate acceleration, especially athigher speedsRthe outer area empties and theinner area is grey: sporty accel-eration

; Coasting (evaluation of all decel-eration processes):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: antic-ipatory driving, keeping your dis-tance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle cancoast without use of the brakes.Rthe outer area empties and theinner area is grey: frequent heavybraking

= Constant (continuous evaluationover the entire journey):Rthe outer area fills up and theinner area lights up green: con-stant speed and avoidance ofunnecessary acceleration anddecelerationRthe outer area empties and theinner area is grey: fluctuations inspeed

The three inner areas display the current driv-ing style and light up green as a result of aparticularly economical driving style.Depending on the driving situation, up to twoareas may light up simultaneously.At the beginning of the journey, the threeouter areas are empty and fill up as a result ofeconomical driving. A higher level indicates amore economical driving style. If the threeouter areas are completely filled at the same

212 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

time, the driver has adopted the most eco-nomical driving style for the selected settingsand prevailing conditions. The ECO displayborder lights up.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. The additionally achievedrange displayed under Bonus fr. startBonus fr. startdoes not indicate a fixed consumption reduc-tion.In addition to driving style, the actual con-sumption is affected by other factors, suchas:RloadRtyre pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRthe use of electrical consumersThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.An economical driving style involves driving ata moderate engine speed.To achieve a higher value in the categories"acceleration" and "smooth driving":Robserve the gearshift recommendationRdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehi-cles with the AGILITY SELECT switch)

On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. onthe motorway, only the outer area for "con-stant" will change.The ECO display summarises the driving stylefrom the start of the journey to its completion.Therefore, there are more marked changes inthe outer areas at the start of a journey. Dur-ing a prolonged driving time, these changesare smaller. For more marked changes, per-form a manual rest (Y page 299).Further information on the ECO display(Y page 298).

Brakes


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradientsChange into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. Take particularnote of this when driving a laden vehicle andwhen towing a trailer.This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONICPLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated.This will use the braking effect of the engine,so less braking will be required to maintainvehicle speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and couldeven cause the braking system to fail. There isa risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If heavy demands are made on the brakes, donot park the vehicle immediately. Drive on fora short while. This allows the airflow to coolthe brakes more quickly.

Driving tips 213

Drivingandparking

Z

If the brakes have been used onlymoderately,you should occasionally test their effective-ness. To do this, brake more firmly from ahigher speed while paying attention to thetraffic conditions. This improves the grip ofthe brakes.

Wet road surfacesIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after a car wash orafter driving through deep water.Youwill have to depress the brake pedalmorefirmly.Maintain a greater distance to the vehi-cle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salt-treated roads, a layer ofsalt may form on the brake discs and pads.This can increase the braking distance con-siderably.RIn order to prevent a layer of salt forming,apply the brakes occasionally while payingattention to the traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal at theend of the journey and when starting thenext journey.RMaintain a much greater distance to thevehicle in front.

New brake discs and brake pads/liningsBrake pads/linings and discs that are eithernew or have been replaced only achieve opti-mum braking effect after several hundred kil-ometres of driving. Compensate for the

reduced braking effect by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only fitting the following brake discsand brake pads/linings:Rbrake discs that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz or that are ofan equivalent standard of quality

Other brake discs or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake discs and brakepads/linings on an axle at the same time.Always fit new brake pads/linings whenreplacing brake discs.The vehicle is equipped with lightweightbrake discs to which the wheel assembly withrim and threaded connection is matched.The use of brake discs other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz may alter trackwidth and is subject to approval, if applicable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakediscs, such as when changing wheels, canlead to a reduction in comfort when drivingwith lightweight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake discs,particularly on the brake plate.

Driving on wet roads

AquaplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-planing occurring, even if:Ryou are driving at low speedsRthe tyres have adequate tread depthFor this reason, drive in the following mannerin the event of heavy rain or in conditions inwhich aquaplaning can occur:Rlower your speedRavoid tyre ruts

214 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Ravoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads

! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling infront or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.These notes must be observed under allcircumstances. You could otherwise dam-age the engine, the electronics or the trans-mission.

If you must drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe water level, in the case of still water,may not exceed a maximum point of thelower edge of the vehicle bodyRyou should drive no faster than walkingpace

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.This increases the risk of skidding and havingan accident.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a

window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.You should drive particularly carefully on slip-pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-tion, steering and braking manoeuvres. Donot use cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to neutral.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position N.

X Try to bring the vehicle under control byusing corrective steering.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.Further information on driving with snowchains (Y page 431).Further information on driving with summertyres (Y page 430).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 430).

Driving tips 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands forinnovative driver assistance and safety sys-tems which enhance comfort and support thedriver in critical situations. With these intelli-gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benzhas set a milestone on the path towardsautonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewell thought-out system– for the safety of thevehicle occupants and that of other roadusers.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 74).

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. Change intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients. Take particular note ofthis when driving a laden vehicle and whentowing a trailer. By doing so, you will makeuse of the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions are appropriate for maintaining asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 30 km/h.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account road,weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control isonly an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,

for braking in good time, and for staying inlane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed(e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads)Ron smooth or slippery roads. Braking oraccelerating can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; LIM indicator lamp= To store the current speed and to call up

the last stored speed? To store the current speed or a lower

speedA To switch between cruise control and var-

iable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control isselected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In addition, theé symbolappears in the multifunction display. In thespeedometer, the segments between thestored speed and the maximum speed lightup.

Selecting cruise control

X Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp: is off.If it is off, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow;.LIM indicator lamp: in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 30 km/h.X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically braking the vehicle.

i Vehicles with manual transmission:Ralways drive at adequate, but not exces-sive, engine speedsRchange gear in good time.Rif possible, do not change down severalgears at a time

Storing the current speed and calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe set speed.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up: or down; to the pressurepoint.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 km/h increments.

X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/hincrements: press the cruise control leverbriefly up: or down; beyond the pres-sure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 10 km/h increments.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-erate to overtake, cruise control adjuststhe vehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards=.

orX Brake.orX Briefly move the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow;.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp: in the cruise control leveris lit.


Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou apply the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 30 km/hRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rwhile driving a vehicle with manual trans-mission, you shift into neutral or depressthe clutch pedal for longer than six secondsRon vehicles with manual transmission, youshift to a gear that is too high, and as aresult the engine speed is too lowRon vehicles with automatic transmission,you shift into position N while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise con‐Cruise con‐trol offtrol off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

SPEEDTRONIC

General notesSPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so thatyou do not exceed the set speed. Change intoa lower gear in good time on long and steepdownhill gradients. Take particular note ofthis when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so,you will make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from over-heating and wearing too quickly.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.SPEEDTRONIC cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. SPEED-TRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time, and for stay-ing in lane.If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

You can set a variable or permanent limitspeed:Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-upareasRpermanent for long-term speed restric-tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyresfitted (Y page 221)

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speedstored.

Variable SPEEDTRONIC

General notes

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; LIM indicator lamp= To store the current speed and calling up

the last stored speed? To store the current speed or a lower

speedA To switch between cruise control or

DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-TRONIC

B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONICWith the cruise control lever, you can operatecruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari-able SPEEDTRONIC.

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control orDISTRONIC PLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.

You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.

Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the limit speed stored.X Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp: is on.If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow;.LIM indicator lamp: in the cruise controllever is on. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selec-ted.

Storing the current speed

You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.The current speed is stored and shown inthe multifunction display.The speedometer dial lights up betweenthe start of the scale and the stored speed.

Storing the current speed and calling upthe last stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.



Setting a speed

X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/hincrements: briefly press the cruise con-trol lever up: past the pressure point fora higher speed, or down; for a lowerspeed.

orX Keep the cruise control lever pressedbeyond the pressure point until the desiredspeed is set. Press the cruise control leverup: for a higher speed or down; for alower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up: to the pressure point for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed to thepressure point until the desired speed isset. Press the cruise control lever up: fora higher speed or down; for a lowerspeed.

Switching SPEEDTRONIC to passiveIf you depress the accelerator pedal beyondthe pressure point (kickdown), SPEED-TRONIC is switched to passive mode. The fol-lowing message appears in the multifunctiondisplay: SPEEDTRONIC passiveSPEEDTRONIC passive.You can then exceed the stored speed.SPEEDTRONIC is activated again if you:

Rdrive slower than the stored speed withoutkickdownRset a new speed orRcall up the last speed stored againThe SPEEDTRONIC passiveSPEEDTRONIC passive message in themultifunction display disappears.

Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONICIt is not possible to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC by braking.

There are several ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards=.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow;.LIM indicator lamp: in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-ted.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

Permanent SPEEDTRONICYou can use the on-board computer to limitthe speed permanently to a value between160 km/h(e.g. for driving onwinter tyres) andthe maximum speed (Y page 313).Shortly before the stored speed is reached, itappears in the multifunction display.Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active,even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated.

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,even if you depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. Take particularnote of this when driving a laden vehicle. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. Without your intervention,DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately toincrease the distance to the vehicle driving infront, or take evasive action, provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the rangebetween 0 km/h and 200 km/h.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly rec-ognise other road users and complex trafficconditions.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be prepared tobrake, particularly if DISTRONIC PLUS warnsyou.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this deceleration is not sufficient,DISTRONIC PLUS alerts you with a visual andacoustic warning. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Apply the brakes yourself in these situationsand try to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations. To prevent dam-age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the follow-ing or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof an accident nor override the laws of phys-ics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road andweather conditions or traffic conditions intoaccount. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle


in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime, and for staying in lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon smooth or slippery roads. Braking oraccelerating can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,for example, in multi-storey car parks

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, it may unexpectedly accelerate tothe speed stored.This speed can:Rbe too high for a filter lane or a slip roadRbe so high in the right lane that you passvehicles driving on the left (left-hand drivecountries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you passvehicles driving on the right (right-handdrive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To activate or reduce speedB To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and

variable SPEEDTRONICC To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUSYou can operate DISTRONIC PLUS and varia-ble SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise controllever.LIM indicator lamp= on the cruise controllever indicateswhich function you have selec-ted:RLIM indicator lamp== off: DISTRONICPLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp== on: variableSPEEDTRONIC is selected.

Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS

X Checkwhether LIM indicator lamp: is off.

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selec-ted.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow;.LIM indicator lamp: in the cruise controllever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selec-ted.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsTo activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the followingconditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be running. It may take upto two minutes of driving beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use.Rthe electric parking brake must bereleased.RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-vening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and the reardoors must be closed.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must beselected with the cruise control lever(Y page 223).

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down= until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS inactiveDISTRONIC PLUS inactivemessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. The set distance to a slower-movingvehicle in front will then not be maintained.You will be driving at the speed you deter-mine by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is30 km/h.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up a stored speed and this is dif-ferent from the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or brakes. If you do not knowwhat the stored speed is, the vehicle mayaccelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.Take the traffic conditions into accountbefore calling up the stored speed. If you donot know what the stored speed is, store thedesired speed again.



X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.


orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front. If novehicle is detected in front, your vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

i The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at alltimes.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty drivingstyle when you have selected the S or S+drive program (Y page 197). Accelerationbehind the vehicle in front or to the set speedis then noticeably more dynamic. If you haveselected the C or E drive program, the vehicleaccelerates more gently. This setting is rec-ommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the overtaking lane,DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if:Ryou are driving faster than 70 km/hRyou switch on the respective turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are met, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONICPLUS monitors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles).

Driving systems 225

Drivingandparking

Z

Road and traffic conditions

i The following function is only available invehicles with the Driving Assistance Pluspackage.The function is not operational in all coun-tries.

DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional informationfrom your navigation system so that it canadapt to certain traffic situations. This is thecase if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS is active and you:Rapproach or drive around a roundaboutRapproach a T-junctionRturn off at a motorway exitEven if the vehicle in front leaves the detec-tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarilymaintains the current driving speed and doesnot accelerate. This is based on the currentmap data in the navigation system.Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back tothe speed you set.The system takes into account the fact thatovertaking on the right is not permitted onmotorways or high-speed major roads atspeeds above 80 km/h. The driving speed isadjusted to the speed of the queue of vehiclesin the adjacent lane to the left.

i Prevention of overtaking on the rightapplies to countries where traffic drives onthe right. In countries where traffic driveson the left, overtaking on the left is preven-ted accordingly.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 228).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.After a short period, the vehicle is secured bythe electric parking brake, thus relieving theservice brake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activatedand:Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver'sdoor is openRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function


Ra system fault occursRthe power supply is insufficientIf amalfunction occurs, then the transmissionmay also be shifted into position P automat-ically.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and adjusts the vehicle's speedto the new speed stored.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-ments: briefly press the cruise controllever up: or down; to the pressurepoint.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 1 km/h increments.

X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/hincrements: press the cruise control leverbriefly up: or down; beyond the pres-sure point.The last stored speed increases or decrea-ses in 10 km/h increments.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 228).

i Make sure that you maintain the mini-mum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

Driving systems 227

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru-ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments between the speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed; light up. Thesegments likewise light up if a vehicle in frontis detected in the fast lane.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator: current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 307) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.

X Select the Assistance graphicAssistance graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 306).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text onlyappears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 307) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance graphics display.X Select the Assistance graphicAssistance graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 306).

You will see the stored speed for approx-imately five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS


There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow=.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp; in the cruise control leverlights up.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS offoffmessage inthe multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou apply the electric parking brake or if thevehicle is automatically secured with theelectric parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle has skiddedRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS offDISTRONIC PLUS off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bendRVehicles which are not driving in themiddleof their laneROther vehicles changing laneRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, entering and exiting a bend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles which are not driving in the mid-dle of their lane

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicleswhich are not driving in the middle of their

Driving systems 229

Drivingandparking

Z

lane. The distance to the vehicle in front willbe too short.

Other vehicles changing lane

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the carriagewaybecause of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehiclein the centre of the driving lane by means ofmoderate steering interventions in a speedrange from 0 - 200 km/h.It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of camera system: at the top of thewindscreen.


At speeds of more than 60 km/h SteeringAssist focuses on clear lane markings (leftand right).In a speed range from 0 - 60 km/h Stop&GoPilot focuses on the vehicle in front, takinginto account lane markings, e.g. when follow-ing vehicles in a traffic jam.If these conditions are not present, SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provideassistance.DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order forthe function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.It cannot take into account road, weather ortraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time, and for staying in lane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-fic conditions and does not detect all roadusers. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the carriageway,your vehicle could come into contact with thekerb or other road boundaries. In the case ofdeviations in road markings, beware of otherroad users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly nextto your vehicle.Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane orprojecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.after intentionally driving over a lanemarking,can be corrected at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-cle back to the lane. In such cases, you muststeer the vehicle yourself to ensure that itdoes not leave the lane.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-aged or covered, for instance by a sticker,in the vicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the road

The system is switched to passive and no lon-ger assists you by performing steering inter-ventions if:Ryou actively change laneRyou switch on the turn signalRyou take your hands off the steering wheelor do not steer for a prolonged period oftime

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannotprovide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen towing a trailerRa loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyrehas been detected and displayed

Driving systems 231

Drivingandparking

Z

Also observe the important safety notes forDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222).The steering interventions are carried outwith a limited steering moment. The systemrequires the driver to keep his hands on thesteering wheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the system will first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-bol appears in themultifunction display. If youhave still not started to steer and have nottaken hold of the steering wheel after fiveseconds at the latest, a warning tone alsosounds to remind you to take control of thevehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotswitch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUSremains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilot

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:DTR+:steering assist. onsteering assist. onmessage appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated but is not ready for a steering interven-tion, steering wheel symbol: appears ingrey. If the system provides you with supportby means of steering interventions, sym-bol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:DTR+:steering assist. offsteering assist. offmessage appearsin themultifunction display. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivatedautomatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen manoeuvring on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLDfunction is deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.



G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supplyRthe HOLD function is deactivated by theaccelerator pedal being depressed, e.g. bya vehicle occupantRthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered withRthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always deactivatethe HOLD function and secure the vehiclefrom rolling away.


Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if all ofthe following conditions are fulfilled:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe electric parking brake is releasedRVehicles with automatic transmission: thetransmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil: appears in the multifunction dis-play.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatictransmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Rthe transmission is in positionP on vehicleswith automatic transmission.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure until: disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a short period, the vehicle is securedby the electric parking brake, thus relievingthe service brake. The HOLD function isthen deactivated.

Driving systems 233

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake secures the vehicleautomatically if the HOLD function is activa-ted and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastenedRthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRa system fault occursRthe power supply is insufficientVehicles with automatic transmission: if afault occurs, then the transmission may alsobe shifted into position P automatically.Vehicles with manual transmission:The Brake immediatelyBrake immediately message can alsoappear in the multifunction display.X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmlyuntil the warning message in the multifunc-tion display goes out.The HOLD function is deactivated.

A horn will sound at regular intervals if youturn off the engine, take off your seat belt oropen the driver's door when the HOLD func-tion is activated. The horn alerts you to thefact that the HOLD function is still activated.If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tonebecomes louder. The vehicle cannot belocked until you have deactivated the HOLDfunction.

i Once you have switched off the engine,you cannot restart it until you have deacti-vated the HOLD function.

AIRMATIC

General notesAIRMATIC is an air suspension system withvariable damping for improved driving com-fort. All-round level control ensures the bestpossible suspension and constant groundclearance, even with a laden vehicle. Whenyou drive fast, the vehicle is lowered auto-matically to improve driving safety and toreduce fuel consumption. There is also the

option to manually adjust the vehicle level.AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level con-trol and the Adaptive Damping System ADS.Vehicleswith automatic transmission: thevehicle level can be set using the AGILITYSELECT switch (Y page 197) or the level but-ton (Y page 234). The setting always corre-sponds to the last selected function.Vehicles with manual transmission: thevehicle level can be set using the AGILITYSELECT switch (Y page 191) or the level but-ton (Y page 234). The setting always corre-sponds to the last selected function.


G WARNINGPeople's limbs may become trapped if theyare located underneath the vehicle orbetween the vehicle body and the tyres whenthe vehicle is lowering. There is a danger ofinjury.When lowering the vehicle, make sure no oneis underneath the vehicle or in the immediatevicinity of the wheel arches.

i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle isnot lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal"and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of80 km/h. Select the "Normal" setting for nor-mal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving


with snow chains or on particularly poor roadsurfaces. Your selection remains stored evenif you remove the key from the ignition lock.X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle israised by 25 mm compared to the normallevel.The Vehicle risingVehicle rising message appears inthe multifunction display.i The message disappears after ten sec-onds, irrespective of the level reached. Ifnecessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you:Rdrive faster than 120 km/hRdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 80 km/h.

The "Raised level" remains saved when youare not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button:.Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to the height of the currentlyselected drive program (Y page 197).

Suspension setting

General notesThe Adaptive Damping System automaticallycontrols the calibration of the dampers.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sport or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the key from the ignition lock.

Sport modeIn the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive pro-grams, the firmer suspension setting ensureseven better contact with the road. Select thismode when employing a sporty driving style,e.g. on winding country roads.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:select the S or S+ drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 197).Vehicles with manual transmission:select the S or S+ drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 191).The vehicle is lowered by 15mm comparedto the normal level.

Comfort modeIn the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs,the driving characteristics of your vehicle aremore comfortable. Therefore, select thismode if you prefer amore comfortable drivingstyle. Select Comfort mode also when drivingfast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of motorway.X Vehicles with automatic transmission:select the E or C drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 197).Vehicles with manual transmission:select the E or C drive program with theAGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 191).The vehicle is raised to the normal level.

When driving at speeds above 125 km/h, thevehicle is automatically lowered by 15 mm inthe E and C drive programs. When driving atspeeds below 80 km/h, the vehicle is raisedagain.

4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of an accident nor

Driving systems 235

Drivingandparking

Z

override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in the lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:Rwhen pulling away, only depress the accel-erator pedal as far as is necessaryRaccelerate less when driving

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz implied warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground orbe fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou usewinter tyres (M+S tyres), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substi-tute for your attention to the immediate sur-roundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects

when they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow andobjects which absorb ultrasonic sources.Ultrasonic sources, such as an automaticcar wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakesor a pneumatic drill, could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer towhitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-ures the minimum detection range to anobstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-pling.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically ifyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NPARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take into accountobstacles located:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. persons,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, tail sections or loading ramps ofgoods vehicles


: Example: sensors in the front bumper,left-hand side

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 401).

Front sensors

Centre Approx. 100 cm

Corners Approx. 60 cm

Rear sensors



Minimum distance



If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of thevehicle

; Segments on the right-hand side of thevehicle

= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is in theinstrument cluster. The warning display forthe rear area is located on the roof lining inthe rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if opera-tional readiness indicator= lights up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-

Driving systems 237

Drivingandparking

Z

minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Vehicles with AIRMATIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock.

Vehicles without AIRMATIC

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC; Indicator lampIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the key to position 2 in theignition lock.


Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deactivated.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 401).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking and when exit-ing a parking space. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 236).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that no persons, animals orobjects are in the manoeuvring range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

For vehicles with the trailer tow hitch foldedout, theminimum length for parking spaces isslightly longer.If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,you should not use Active Parking Assist.Once the electrical connection is establishedbetween your vehicle and the trailer, ActiveParking Assist is no longer available.PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldcause you to collide with other road users.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a

Driving systems 239

Drivingandparking

Z

sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tyres.

Active Parking Assist may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rparking or stopping prohibitionsRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRunsuitable surfacesParking tips:Ron narrow roads, drive as closely as possi-ble past the parking space.Rparking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.Rparking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.Rsnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 237) warning messages during theparking procedure.Ryou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be cancelled.Rwhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.Rnever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are fitted.Rmake sure that the tyre pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spacesthat are:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRon straight roads, not bendsRon the same level as the road, e.g. not onthe pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects.

This could cause a collision. There is a risk ofan accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and switch off Active ParkingAssist.

Further information on the detection range(Y page 236).Active Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces at right angles to the direc-tion of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low kerbRyou forward parkActive Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces that are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a kerbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomanoeuvre intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer


: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is activated automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately35 km/h.While in operation, the system inde-pendently locates and measures parkingspaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland are at least 1.5 m wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 1.0 m longer than your vehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 1.0 m wider than yourvehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if itis at right angles to the direction of travel.You will need to judge whether your vehiclewill fit in the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, youwill see parking symbol; as a status indi-cator in the instrument cluster. When a park-ing space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears.Active Parking Assist only displays parkingspaces on the front-passenger side as stand-ard. Parking spaces on the driver's side aredisplayed as soon as the turn signal on the

driver's side is activated.When parking on thedriver's side, this must remain switched onuntil you acknowledge the use of Active Park-ing Assist by pressing thea button on themultifunction steering wheel. The systemautomatically determines whether the park-ing space is parallel or at right angles to thedirection of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 15 m away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses are tam-pered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by a vehicleoccupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i Vehicles with automatic transmis-sion: if PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking symbolshows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to reverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift into position R.The Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo:Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay .

Driving systems 241

Drivingandparking

Z

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist active AcceleratePark Assist active Accelerateand brakeObserve surroundingsand brakeObserve surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Release the multifunction steering wheel.X Reverse the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times. When reversing, drive at a speedbelow 10 km/h. Otherwise, Active ParkingAssist will be cancelled.Vehicles with automatic transmission:Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe rear border of the parking space.Manoeuvring may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.Manoeuvring may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

Vehicleswith automatic transmission: thePark Assist active Select DObservePark Assist active Select DObservesurroundingssurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.Vehicles with manual transmission: thePark Assist active Engage forwardPark Assist active Engage forwardgearObserve surroundingsgearObserve surroundings messageappears in the multifunction display.X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to first gear while the vehicle is sta-tionary.Vehicles with automatic transmission:select transmission position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.

The Park Assist active AcceleratePark Assist active Accelerateand brakeObserve surroundingsand brakeObserve surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Vehicles with automatic transmission:Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe front border of the parking space.Manoeuvring may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone, if not before.

Vehicleswith automatic transmission: thePark Assist active Select RObservePark Assist active Select RObservesurroundingssurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.Vehicles with manual transmission: thePark Assist active Engage reversePark Assist active Engage reversegearObserve surroundingsgearObserve surroundings messageappears in the multifunction display.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the ParkPark AssistAssist switchedswitched offoffmes-sage appears and a warning tone sounds. Thevehicle is now parked.Vehicleswith automatic transmission: thevehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal. The brak-ing effect is cancelled when you depress theaccelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake appli-cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-ished, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of the


location. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the kerb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also preselect transmission posi-tion D. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Shouldthe transmission change take place tooearly, the parking procedure will be cancel-led. A sensible parking position can no lon-ger be achieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when you exit the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Akerb stone is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is manoeuvred into the park-ing space.Ra manoeuvring distance of at least 1.0 mmust be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position D or R.

Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to forward or reverse gear.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist active AcceleratePark Assist active Accelerateandand brakebrake ObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Release the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 10 km/h when exiting aparking space. Otherwise, Active ParkingAssist will be cancelled.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:depending on the message or as required,shift the transmission to position D or R.Vehicles with manual transmission:depending on the message or as required,engage forward or reverse gear.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark Assistactive Accelerate and brakeactive Accelerate and brakeObserveObserve surroundingssurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you reverse after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and reverse as prompted bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays, severaltimes if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist switched offPark Assist switched off message

Driving systems 243

Drivingandparking

Z

appears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognisethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Cancelling Active Parking AssistX Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be cancelled atonce. The Park Assist cancelledPark Assist cancelled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button(Y page 238).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately cancelled.The Park Assist cancelledPark Assist cancelled messageappears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is cancelled automati-cally if:Rthe electric parking brake is appliedRtransmission position P is selected in vehi-cles with automatic transmissionRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than 10 km/hRa wheel spins and ESP® intervenes or fails.The ÷ warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist cancelledPark Assist cancelled mes-sage.When Active Parking Assist is cancelled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator pedal again.

Reversing camera

General notes

Reversing camera: is in the boot lid handle.Reversing camera: is an optical parkingand manoeuvring aid. It shows the areabehind your vehicle with guidelines in theAudio 20/COMAND Online display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.

i The text shown in the Audio 20/COMANDOnline display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples ofreversing camera messages in theAudio 20/COMAND Online display.

Important safety notesThe reversing camera is only an aid. It is not asubstitute for your attention to the immediatesurroundings. The responsibility for safemanoeuvring and parking remains with you.Make sure that there are no persons, animalsor objects in range while manoeuvring andparking.Under the following circumstances, thereversing camera will not function, or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the boot lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)


Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 401)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thiscase, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The field of vision and other functions of thereversing camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. licence plate holder, bicycle rack).

i The reversing camera is protected fromraindrops and dust by means of a flap.When the reversing camera is activated,this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the manoeuvring proc-essRyou switch off the engineRyou open the bootObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 401).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the reversing camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the reversingcamera

X To activate: make sure that the key is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in Audio 20/COMAND Online; see the Digital Owner'sManual.

X Engage reverse gear.The reversing camera flap opens. The areabehind the vehicle is shownwith guide linesin the Audio 20/COMAND Online display.The image from the reversing camera isavailable throughout the manoeuvringprocess.

X To change the function mode for vehi-cles with trailer tow hitch: using theAudio 20/COMAND controller, select sym-bol: for the "Reverse parking" function orsymbol; for "Coupling up a trailer".The symbol of the selected function is high-lighted.

Further information on the Audio 20/COMAND controller, see the Digital Owner'sManual.To deactivate: the reversing camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Messages in the Audio 20/COMANDOnline displayThe reversing camera may show a distortedview of obstacles or show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thereversing camera in the following locations:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Driving systems 245

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking the course the tyreswill take at the current steering wheelangle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 237),additional measurement operational readi-ness indicator; appears in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display. If the PARKTRONICwarning displays are active or light up, warn-ing displays: and= are also active or lightup correspondingly in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display.


"Reverse parking" function

Reversing straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the reversing camera isswitched on (Y page 245).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully reverse until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the reversing camera isswitched on (Y page 245).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-ing space until yellow guide line; reachesparking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand reverse carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 247

Drivingandparking

Z

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the centre posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Reverse carefully until you have reachedthe end position.Red guide line: is then at the end of park-ing space=. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 1.0 mfrom the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbarThis function is only available on vehicles witha trailer tow hitch.X Before coupling up a trailer, set the heightof trailer drawbar; so that it is slightlyhigher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front oftrailer drawbar;.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.30 m from the ball coupling

; Trailer drawbar locating aid= Trailer drawbar? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer"

functionA Ball coupling


X Select symbol? using the Audio 20/COMAND controller, see the Audio 20/COMAND Online operating instructions.The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-ted. The distance specifications now onlyapply to objects that are at the same levelas the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid; points approx-imately in the direction of trailer drawbar=.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar=reaches red guide line.The distance between the trailer drawbarand the red guide line is now approximately0.30 m.

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 284).

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the reversing camera toselect a wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 237), a symbol for your own vehicleappears in the Audio 20/COMAND Onlinedisplay. If the PARKTRONIC warning displaysare active, warning displays= light up in theAudio 20/COMAND Online display in yellowor red respectively.

Object detectionThe reversing camera helps detect movingand stationary objects. If an object (person,vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, thisobject is marked with a bar. Objects locatedsome distance from the vehicle away aremarked with a yellow bar. If the distance tothe object is very small, the bar is displayed inred.Object detection only works in full screenmode.To ensure that you can use the function, itmust be switched on in Audio 20/COMANDOnline, see the separate operating instruc-tions.

360° camera (surround view)

General notesThe 360° camera is a camera system thatconsists of four cameras.The system evaluates images from the fol-lowing cameras:Rreversing cameraRfront cameraRtwo cameras in the exterior mirrorsThe cameras cover the immediate surround-ings of the vehicle. The system assists you,e.g. when parking or at exits with reducedvisibility.You can show pictures from the 360° camerain full-screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 dis-play. A split-screen view also includes a topview of the vehicle. This view is calculatedfrom the data supplied by the installed cam-eras (virtual camera).The seven split-screen views are:Rtop view and image from the reversing cam-era (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear view

Driving systems 249

Drivingandparking

Z

Rtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and trailer view (vehicles withtrailer tow hitch)Rtop view and images from the rear-facingmirror cameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the forward-facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the guidelinesin the COMAND display are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Important safety notesThe 360° camera is only an aid andmay showa distorted view of obstacles, show themincorrectly or not at all. The 360° camera isnot a substitute for attentive driving.You are responsible for safemanoeuvring andparking. Make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in range while manoeu-vring and parking.You are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to your surround-ings when parking and manoeuvring. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwiseendanger yourself and others.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction only in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the boot lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif the camera lenses mist up, e.g. whendriving into a heated garage in winter, caus-ing a rapid change in temperature

Rif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are fitted are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcould otherwise injure others or damageobjects when parking the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown atthe level of the trailer coupling.The camera in the rear area is protected bymeans of a flap. This flap opens when the360° camera is activated. Observe the noteson cleaning (Y page 401). For technical rea-sons, the flap may remain open briefly afterthe 360° camera has been deactivated.

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:RCOMAND Online/Audio 20 is switched on,see the Digital Owner's ManualRthe 360° camera360° camera function is switched oni If the 360° camera is activated at speedsabove 30 km/h, a warning messageappears.The warning message disappears if:Rthe vehicle's speed falls below 30 km/h.The 360° camera is then activated.Rthe message is confirmed with the%button.


Activating the 360° camera using thefunction button

X Press button:.The following appears depending onwhether transmission position D or R isselected:Rfull-screen view with image from thefront cameraRfull-screen view with image from thereversing camera

i You can also switch to the split-screenview from the full-screen view.

Activating the 360° camera usingCOMAND OnlineX To select 360° camera360° camera in the carouselmenu: turn and press the controller.The following appears depending onwhether transmission position D or R isselected:Ra split-screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split-screen with top view and theimage from the reversing camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearYou can show images from the 360° cameraautomatically by engaging reverse gear.

X Make sure that the key is in position2 in theignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMANDOnline, see the Digital Owner's Manual.

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display in split-screenmode. Yousee the top view of the vehicle and theimage from the reversing camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen views:X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide Z V the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller.

Switching to full screen mode:X 180° view180° view Turn and press the controller.i The full screen option is only available inthe following views:RTop view with image from the reversingcameraRTop view with image from the front cam-era

Displays in the COMAND display

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distortedview of obstacles or show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thesystem in the following locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin the area immediately above the handleon the boot lidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the vari-ous cameras in the virtual top view

Driving systems 251

Drivingandparking

Z

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Top view with image from the reversingcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the rear of the vehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and reversing camera image

= Guide line for themaximumsteering angle? Yellow lane marking the course the tyres

will take at the current steering wheelangle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle centre axis (locating aid)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 1.0 m from the rear of the vehicleD BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with image from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 4.0 m from the front of the vehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lane marking the course the tyreswill take at the current steering wheelangle (dynamic)


A Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.30 m from the front of the vehi-cle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 1.0 m from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and reversing camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis-tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top viewwith image from themirror cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirror (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirror (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the mirror camerasetting for the rear-facing view.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Vehicle centre point on the yellow guideline at a distance of approximately 1.0 mfrom the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar= Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 0.30m from the rear of the vehicle

Driving systems 253

Drivingandparking

Z

X Set the height of trailer drawbar; so thatit is slightly higher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front oftrailer drawbar;.

: Symbol for the trailer view setting; Trailer drawbar locating aid= Ball coupling? Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 0.30 m from the ball couplingX Select symbol: using the COMAND con-troller; see the COMAND Online operatinginstructions.The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-ted. The distance specifications now onlyapply to objects that are at the same levelas the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure trailer draw-bar locating aid; points approximately inthe direction of the trailer drawbar.

X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbarreaches red guide line?.The distance between the trailer drawbarand the red guide line is now approximately0.30 m.

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 284).The lines are shown at the level of the trailercoupling.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the full-screen setting with thereversing camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysIf the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONICand the function is activated (Y page 238),warning displays= in the COMAND displayare also active or light up accordingly.PARKTRONIC appears as follows:Ras red or yellow brackets around the vehi-cle symbol in top view in split-screen modeorRat the bottom right as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

i Full-screen mode can also be selected asfront view.

Select this viewwhen you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.

i To select split-screen view, select the% symbol in the display, then confirmwith the COMAND controller.

Object detectionThe 360° camera helps detect moving andstationary objects. If an object (person, vehi-cle, other obstacle) is detected, this object ismarked with a bar. Objects located some dis-tance from the vehicle away are marked witha yellow bar. If the distance to the object isvery small, the bar is displayed in red.


Object detection only functions in both full-screen modes.To ensure that you can use the function, itmust be switched on in COMAND Online (seethe separate operating instructions).

Stopping the 360° camera displayAs soon as the vehicle exceeds a speed of30 km/h, the function switches off. The viewwhich was active before the 360° camerawas displayed appears in the COMAND dis-play. You can also stop the 360° camera dis-play from split-screen view by selecting the% symbol in the display and then confirm-ing with the COMAND controller.Vehicles with automatic transmission: the360° camera display is also ended if youselect transmission position P.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys such as on motorwaysand trunk roads. It is active in the 60 km/h to200 km/h range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue orincreasing lapses in concentration on the partof the driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It may notalways detect fatigue or lapses in concentra-tion until too late, or may not detect them atall. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted, and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow 60 km/h or above 200 km/hRif you are driving with the active SteerAssist of DISTRONIC PLUSRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and startsassessing your tiredness again when you con-tinue your journey if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 307)of the on-board computer.X Select the assistance graphics display forATTENTION ASSIST using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 306).

The following information is displayed:Rthe length of the journey since the lastbreakRthe attention level determined by ATTEN-TION ASSIST (Attention levelAttention level), dis-

Driving systems 255

Drivingandparking

Z

played in a bar display in five levels fromhigh to lowRIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output awarning, the System suspendedSystem suspendedmessageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow 60 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 309).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

Selection StandardStandard: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Selection SensitiveSensitive: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Atten-tion Assist is adapted accordingly and thedriver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphic display.When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-ted, it is automatically reactivated after theengine has been stopped. The sensitivityselected corresponds to the last selectionactivated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: ATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSISTTake a break!Take a break!.In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If you

do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses in concentra-tion, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only hap-pen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.If a warning is output in the multifunction dis-play, a service station search is performed inCOMAND. You can select a service stationand navigation to this service station will thenbegin. This function can be activated anddeactivated in COMAND.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes

Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximumspeed permitted and overtaking restrictionsto the driver in the instrument cluster. Drivingonto a section of road in the wrong directiontriggers a warning. Traffic Sign Assist detectstraffic signs with camera system: attachedbehind the top of the windscreen. The dataand general traffic regulations stored in thenavigation system are also used to determinethe current speed limit.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicleis passed, the display of the speed limits andovertaking restrictions is updated.


The display can also be updated without avisible traffic sign if:Rthe vehicle changes roads (e.g. motorwayexit or slip road)Ra village or town boundary is passed whichis stored in the digital mapRthe last traffic sign detected by the camerahas not been repeated

If a sign indicating the end of a restriction(speed limit or overtaking restriction) ispassed, the sign is displayed for five seconds.The applicable traffic regulation then appearsin the instrument cluster.The camera also detects traffic signs with arestriction indicated by an additional sign(e.g. in wet conditions).The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximum permitted speed from any of theavailable sources, no speed limit is displayedin the instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, display: is shown in thespeedometer.

Important safety notesTraffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is notalways able to correctly display speed limitsand overtaking restrictions. Traffic signs

always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionallyimpaired or temporarily unavailable if:Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fogor sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from the sun being low inthe skyRthere is dirt, ice or misting on the wind-screen in the vicinity of the cameraRtraffic signs are hard to detect (dirt, ice,snow)Rthe traffic signs are insufficiently lit at nightRsigns are ambiguous (e.g. traffic signs onconstruction sites or in adjacent lanes)Rthe information in the digital street map ofthe navigation system is incorrect or out ofdate

Activating Traffic Sign AssistX Activate the Traffic Sign Assist displayusing the on-board computer(Y page 308).

If you have activated the display of TrafficSign Assist in the on-board computer, thetraffic regulations (speed limits and overtak-ing restrictions) are displayed in the instru-ment cluster. The wrong-way warningremains active even when the display hasbeen deactivated.

Instrument cluster display

Speed limit with overtaking restriction

Driving systems 257

Drivingandparking

Z

A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h(60 mph): and an overtaking restriction;apply.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles

for which the restriction in the additionalsign is relevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h(80 mph) and a speed limit of 60 km/h(60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply.

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed; Additional signs for wet conditionsA maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h(80 mph) applies in wet conditions and whenTraffic Sign Assist has determined that therestriction must be observed.

Cancelling the overtaking restriction

A maximum permitted speed of 60 km/h(60 mph): applies. The overtaking restric-tion no longer applies;. The crossed-out noovertaking traffic sign is displayed for fiveseconds.

End of a speed limit

No speed limit: applies here.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h ormph)depends on the country in which you aredriving. It is generally neither shown on thetraffic sign nor on the instrument clusterbut must be taken into account whenobserving the maximum permitted speed.


No entry (wrong-way warning)

If no entry signs or roundabout signs arepassed, warning message: is displayed inthe instrument cluster if Traffic Sign Assistdetects that you are driving in the wrongdirection. You will then also hear a warningtone. You should immediately check yourdirection of travel in order to avoid danger toyourself and other road users.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 259) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 261).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning display in the exterior mirrorsdraws your attention to vehicles detected inthe monitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audible col-lision warning.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speedof approximately 30 km/h.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles:Rovertaken too closely on the side, placingthem in the blind spot areaRwhen the difference in the speed ofapproach and overtaking is too great

As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warndrivers in these situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation andmaintain a safe distance at the sideof the vehicle.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the rear bumper. Make surethat the bumpers are free from dirt, ice orslush. The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may nolonger work properly.

Monitoring rangeIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired in the case of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,snow or sprayRnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicy-clesRvery wide lanesRnarrow lanesRvehicles not driving in the middle of theirlaneRbarriers or other road boundaries

Driving systems 259

Drivingandparking

Z

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the edge oftheir lane nearest your vehicle.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane bordersRwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside long vehicles, for example lor-ries, for a prolonged time

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of thesensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Warning display

: Warning displayBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 30 km/h. Vehicles in the mon-itoring range are then not indicated.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above30 km/h, warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warningalways lights up when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 12 km/h.If you select the reverse gear, Blind SpotAssist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.


Activating Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 309) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red until the engine is started.

Display in the assistance graphic

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, greyradar waves propagating backwards appearnext to the vehicle in the assistance display inthe multifunction display. Above a speed of30 km/h, the colour of the radar waves in theassistance display changes to green;. BlindSpot Assist is then ready for use.

Towing a trailerIf you couple up a trailer, make sure that youhave correctly established the electrical con-nection. This can be accomplished by check-ing the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist isthen deactivated. The Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistnotnot availableavailable whenwhen towingtowing aa trailertrailerSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual message appears inthe multifunction display.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of camera:at the top of the windscreen. Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.This function is available in the range between60 km/h and 200 km/h.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration through thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist cannot always clearlyidentify lane markings.In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep in lane, especially if LaneKeeping Assist alerts you.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.

Driving systems 261

Drivingandparking

Z

Always steer, apply the brakes or acceleratethe vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keep-ing Assist alerts you.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountroad, weather or traffic conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon-sible for the distance to the vehicle in front,for vehicle speed, for braking in good time,and for staying in lane.Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-cle in its lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-aged or covered, for instance by a sticker,in the vicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the road

Activating Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist onKeeping Assist onmessage appears inthe multifunction display. If all conditionshave been satisfied, there may be a warn-ing.If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h andlane markings are detected, the lines in theassistance graphic display (Y page 306)are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist isready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. Lane KeepingAssist is deactivated. The Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist offAssist offmessage appears in the multi-function display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the AssistanceAssistance menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssistAssist function (Y page 309).

X Select StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.StandardWhen StandardStandard is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis case, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.


AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis case, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognises certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-way.Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance PLUS packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 222),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 263) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 266).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist monitors the areason either side of the vehicle that are not visi-ble to the driver with two lateral, rear-facingradar sensors. A warning display in the exte-rior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles

detected in the monitored area. If you thenswitch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lanes, you will also receive a visualand audible collision warning. If a risk of sideimpact is detected, corrective braking mayhelp you avoid a collision. Active Blind SpotAssist evaluates the free space in the direc-tion of travel and to the side before making acourse-correcting brake application. For this,Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 30 km/h.

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and isnot a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react tovehicles:Rovertaking too closely on the side, placingthem in the blind spot areaRif the difference in the speed of approachand overtaking is too great

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation andmaintain a safe distance at the sideof the vehicle.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator grille. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in theradiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. Therear sensors must not be covered, e.g. bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-erwise no longer function properly.

Driving systems 263

Drivingandparking

Z

Monitoring rangeG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly nextto your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.The detection of vehicles may be impaired inthe case of:Rdirt on the sensors or obscured sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the edge oftheir lane nearest your vehicle.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane bordersRwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, forexample lorries, for a prolonged time

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not operational atspeeds below approximately 30 km/h. Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-cated.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above30 km/h, warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. Thiswarning lampalways lights up when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 12 km/h.If you select the reverse gear, Active BlindSpot Assist is not operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.


When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,grey radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display. Above aspeed of 30 km/h, the colour of the radarwaves in the assistance display changes togreen;. Active Blind Spot Assist is thenready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You will then heara double warning tone and red warninglamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-ing of red warning lamp:. There are no fur-ther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of aside impact in themonitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out.This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display; underliningthe danger of a side collision appears in themultifunction display.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between30 km/h and 200 km/h.Either a course-correcting brake applicationappropriate to the driving situation, or none atall, may occur if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, on both sides of your vehicleRa vehicle approaches too closely on thesideRyou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speedsRyou clearly brake or accelerateRa driving safety system intervenes, such asESP® or PRE-SAFE® BrakeRESP® is deactivatedRa loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre isdetected

Driving systems 265

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 309).

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 seconds.Grey radar waves propagating backwardsappear next to the vehicle in the assistancedisplay in the multifunction display.

Towing a trailerIf you couple up a trailer, make sure that youhave correctly established the electrical con-nection. This can be accomplished by check-ing the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assistis then deactivated. The radar waves next tothe vehicle are hidden in the assistance dis-play. The ActiveActive BlindBlind SpotSpot AssistAssist notnotavailableavailable whenwhen towingtowing aa trailertrailer SeeSeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual message appears in themultifunction display.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of camerasystem: at the top of the windscreen. Var-ious areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning,

a lane-correcting application of the brakescan bring the vehicle back into the originallane.If you select kmkm in the Display unitDisplay unitSpeed-/odometer:Speed-/odometer: function on the on-boardcomputer (Y page 312), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of an accident nor override the laws ofphysics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannottake account of road and weather conditions.It may not recognise traffic situations. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime, and for staying in lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.


The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflection from other vehicles(e.g. if the road surface is wet)Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up, dam-aged or covered, for instance by a sticker,in the vicinity of the cameraRif the radar sensors in the front or rearbumpers or the radiator grille are dirty, e.g.obscured by snowRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are highly variable shade conditionson the road

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand broken lane markings are detected, nolane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration through the steeringwheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationIf you leave your lane under certain circum-stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is intended to help you return thevehicle to the original lane.

G WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction dis-play. The brake application also slightlyreduces driving speed.This function is available in the range between60 km/h and 200 km/h.A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking rec-ognised as being solid or broken. Before this,a warningmust have been issued bymeans ofintermittent vibration through the steeringwheel. In addition, a lane with lane markingson both sides must be recognised.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detec-ted in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles,overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacentlanes can be detected.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

Driving systems 267

Drivingandparking

Z

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerateRyou cut the corner on a sharp bendRyou have switched on the turn signalRa driving safety system intervenes, such asESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot AssistRyou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRESP® is deactivatedRthe transmission is not in position DRon vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, theelectrical connection to the trailer has beencorrectly establishedRa loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyrehas been detected and displayedRan obstacle in the lane in which you aredriving has been detected

Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detectother road users or traffic situations. An inap-propriate brake application may be interrup-ted at any time if:Ryou steer slightly in the opposite directionRyou switch on the turn signalRyou clearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot AssistRlane markings are no longer detected

Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist onKeeping Assist onmessage appears inthe multifunction display. If all conditionshave been satisfied, a warning or steeringintervention may be made.If you drive at speeds above 60 km/h andlane markings are detected, the lines in theassistance graphic display (Y page 306)are shown in green. Active Lane KeepingAssist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. Active LaneKeeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneLaneKeeping Assist offKeeping Assist offmessage appears inthe multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive settingX In the AssistanceAssistance menu on the on-boardcomputer, select the Active Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist function (Y page 309).

X Select StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.When StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:


Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognises certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-way.Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Towing a trailerIf you couple up a trailer, make sure that youhave correctly established the electrical con-nection. This can be accomplished by check-ing the trailer lighting.

Hybrid operation

Points to remember

General notesHybrid technology combines a fuel efficientinternal combustion engine with a powerfulelectric motor. The hybrid system automati-cally selects the most efficient operatingmode for every driving situation. Drive thevehicle in the usual manner.To save fuel, the hybrid system switches offthe combustion engine as often as possibleduring the journey when power output

requirements are low. When power outputrequirements are low, the electricmotor pow-ers the vehicle. When power output require-ments are high, the combustion engine isswitched on, even during a journey. When thevehicle is stationary, the combustion engineis usually switched off. Consequently, there isusually no engine idling as with combustionengine vehicles.For pulling away and accelerating, the electricmotor supports the internal combustionengine using the power stored in the high-voltage battery. In addition, the power is usedfor partially electric driving, operation of theelectric coolant compressor and to supportthe 12 V on-board electrical system. In thisway the hybrid drive helps to reduce yourvehicle's fuel consumption.Observe the driving tips on hybrid operation(Y page 278).

RBS (Recuperative Brake System)If you release the accelerator pedal when thevehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation isinitiated. The electric motor is operated as agenerator when in overrun mode and whenyou brake. Hybrid technology converts thekinetic energy of the vehicle into electricityand stores it in the high-voltage battery.

Important safety notesAll of the vehicle's systems remain active, if:Rthe vehicle is stationary,Rthe combustion engine is switched off andRthe READY-indicator in the instrument clus-ter is lit.

If you remove your foot from the brake pedalwhile in transmission position D or R, thevehicle could pull away automatically.Observe the notes on the READY display ofthe ECO start/stop function (Y page 279).Vehicles with an electric motor generate sig-nificantly less noise than vehicles with inter-nal combustion engines. As a result, in certain

Hybrid operation 269

Drivingandparking

Z

situations your vehicle may not be heard byother road users. This is the case, for exam-ple, when you are parking and your vehicle isnot seen by other road users.This requires you to adopt a particularly antic-ipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allowfor the possibility that other road users maybehave unpredictably.

270 Hybrid operationDrivingandparking

Hybrid system overview

: Recuperative Brake System; 12 V battery= High-voltage battery? Electric cables for the high-voltage electrical systemA High-voltage battery coolingB Electric refrigerant compressorC Power electronics coolingD Electric vacuum pumpE Transmission with electric motorF Power electronics (DC/AC converter or DC/DC converter)You can deactivate the hybrid system manually. For further information on the high-voltagedisconnect device, see (Y page 43).


Drivingandparking

Z

Instrument cluster

: Charge level display for high-voltage battery (Y page 273); RBS warning lamp (Y page 362)= Electric motor power display (Y page 272)

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature display for a com-bustion engineYou can call up the coolant temperature usingthe on-board computer.X UseÑ on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.

X Press the: or9 button to selectCoolantCoolant.

Electric motor power display

The electric motor power display is on theright-hand side of the instrument cluster.The current charge level of the high-voltagebattery is shown as a percentage in chargelevel displayA. 100% corresponds to thehighest possible charge level of the high-volt-age battery.There are two further areas located to the leftand right of charge level displayA:RArea: to; (E-DRIVE):


This shows the electric output from theelectric motor, e.g. when driving using theelectric motor or in boost mode.When the motor is switched on, the displayis at:. When driving solely on electricity,the display fills up from: to; dependingon the power output demanded as a resultof pressing the accelerator pedal.If the display has reached limit;, addi-tional power output can only be provided bythe combustion engine. The combustionengine starts. If the display is approachinglimit; and you remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal, the display emptiesagain. The combustion engine is notswitched on. At low speeds, you canthereby control the electric drive usage sothat you only drive in electric mode.RArea= to? (CHARGE):This shows the recuperated energywhich isstored in the high-voltage battery as elec-trical energy.When the display reaches limit?, themax-imum recuperative braking power has beenexhausted. The conventional brakes areactivated.

Operating the on-board computerYou can display the current operating condi-tion of the hybrid system in the multifunctiondisplay and the COMAND display(Y page 273).You can display the current operating condi-tion of the hybrid system in the multifunctiondisplay and the Audio 20/COMAND Onlinedisplay (Y page 273).In the Audio 20/COMANDOnline display, youcan also call up a graphic display of the fuelconsumption and generated electricity(Y page 276).

Menus and submenus

Selecting messages in the Audio 20/COMAND Online displayX Press theØ button on the controller.The vehicle menu appears.

X To select EnergyEnergy flowflow: turn and press thecontroller.The energy flow is displayed.

X To select ConsumptionConsumption: turn and press thecontroller.Fuel consumption and the electric energygenerated are displayed.

X To exit the display: press the% buttonon the controller.

Selecting the energy flow display in themultifunction displayX UseÑ on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.


X Use: or9 to select Energy flowEnergy flow.The energy flow is displayed.

Energy flow display

Overview

: Internal combustion engine; Electric motor= Charge status of the high-voltage battery


Drivingandparking

Z

? High-voltage batteryA Energy flowThe active hybrid components are highligh-ted.The energy flow is indicated by arrows. Thearrows have a different colour depending onthe operating state:RGreen: energy recuperationRWhite: normal energy consumptionRRed: increased energy consumption, provi-ded by the vehicle's high-voltage electricalsystem

Automatic engine switch-off

The internal combustion engine and the elec-tric motor are switched off.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The combustion engine is shown in dark grey.The charge status of the high-voltage batteryis shown when the key is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Engine running while the vehicle is sta-tionary

The combustion engine is running while thevehicle is stationary. The high-voltage batteryis not being charged.The arrows for the energy flow are not shown.The combustion engine is highlighted.

Charging while the vehicle is stationary

The internal combustion engine drives theelectricmotor. The electricmotor is operatingas an alternator. The high-voltage battery ischarging.The arrow representing energy flow is shownin white.

Driving using the internal combustionengine

The internal combustion engine powers thevehicle.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.


Driving using the internal combustionengine and boost mode

If you rapidly depress the accelerator, theelectric motor supports the internal combus-tion engine by providing additional torque.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inred.

Driving using the internal combustionengine and energy recuperation

The internal combustion engine powers thevehicle.The electric motor is being operated as analternator, e.g. in overrun mode and whenbraking (Y page 279). The kinetic energy ofthe vehicle is converted into electrical energy.The high-voltage battery is charging.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.

Driving using the internal combustionengine and charging the high-voltage bat-tery

The internal combustion engine powers thevehicle. The internal combustion engine alsodrives the electric motor. The electric motoris operating as an alternator. The high-voltagebattery is charging.The arrows for the energy flow are shown inwhite.

Driving using the electric motor

The electric motor powers the vehicle. Thehigh-voltage battery supplies the electricmotor with electrical energy.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen.


Drivingandparking

Z

Driving using the electric motor andcharging the high-voltage battery

The electric motor is being operated as analternator, e.g. in overrun mode and whenbraking. The kinetic energy of the vehicle isconverted into electrical energy. The high-voltage battery is charging.The arrows for the energy flow are shown ingreen. The combustion engine is shown indark grey.

Displaying the total range

The approximate range is based on the cur-rent driving style.X UseÑ on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press: or9 to select the approxi-mate total range.

Displaying fuel consumption and gen-erated electrical energy

: Fuel consumption; Electrical energy generatedEvery bar of the graph displays the averagevalue for one minute.Fuel consumption indicator: may differfrom the indicator in the From startFrom start tripcomputer in the TripTrip menu.To reset values: the values are reset alongwith the From startFrom start trip computer(Y page 299).X To select ConsumptionConsumption: turn and press thecontroller.The Audio 20/COMAND Online displayshows fuel consumption: and electricalenergy generated; for the last15 minutes driven.

Starting the engine

READY indicator

X Switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal.


X Observe the notes on starting the engine(Y page 183).

X Turn the key to position 3 in the ignitionlock (Y page 183) or press the Start/Stopbutton once (Y page 184).The vehicle is operational whenREADY indi-cator: lights up.

Noiseless startThe vehicle starts in electricmodewithout theinternal combustion engine. The internalcombustion engine starts only after thepower demanded by the driver exceeds theavailable power that the electric motor cancurrently provide.Noiseless start operation is dependent on theoutside temperature and the operating tem-perature of the internal combustion engine.The vehicle is operational when READY indi-cator: lights up.

Pulling awayX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.Further information on pulling away(Y page 184).

Driving

AGILITY SELECT switch

Driving programsUse the AGILITY SELECT switch to change thedrive program. Depending on the drive pro-gram selected, the following vehicle charac-teristics will change:Rthe drive (engine and transmission man-agement)Rthe suspensionRthe steering

Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop func-tion (Y page 279)Rthe climate control settings



X Push AGILITY SELECT switch: up or downuntil the desired drive program is selected.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display. After five secondsthe display goes out and the status icon ofthe selected drive program appears.In addition, the current drive program set-tings are displayed in the Audio 20/COMAND Online display.



S+ Sport Plus RExtremely sporty drivingstyle with boost modeRElectric-only drive is notpossibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is not available


Drivingandparking

Z

S Sport RSporty driving style withboost modeRElectric-only drive is notpossibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is not available

C Comfort RComfortable, economi-cal driving styleRElectric-only drive ispossibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is available

E Eco RParticularly economicaldriving styleRElectric operation modeis used as often as pos-sibleRThe ECO start/stopfunction is available

Additional information for drive programs(Y page 197).Using the steering wheel gearshift paddles,you can temporarily change gear yourself.Further information on the manual drive pro-gram (Y page 278).

Manual gearshiftingUsing the steering wheel gearshift paddles,you can temporarily change gear yourself.The transmission must be in position D. Elec-tric-only operation is not possible when man-ually changing gear.Activating when driving with the electricmotor:X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 198).The combustion engine is switched on.Manual gearshifting is activated tempora-rily. The selected gear andM appear in themultifunction display.Pulling on the right-hand steering wheelgearshift paddle when manual gear chang-

ing is not active switches to overrun mode(Y page 280).

Activating when driving with the combustionengine:X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle (Y page 198).Manual gearshifting is activated tempora-rily. The selected gear andM appear in themultifunction display.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen manually changing gear.Further information on the manual drive pro-gram (Y page 198).

Driving tips

General driving tipsDrive carefully and maintain a suitable dis-tance from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequentand sudden acceleration as well as abruptbraking.During partially electric driving, pulling awayand acceleration, the electric motor supportsthe internal combustion engine.During overrun in transmission positionD andbraking, the electric motor operates as analternator.To reduce fuel consumption, use:Rrecuperative braking (Y page 269)Roverrun mode (Y page 280) or extendedoverrun mode (Y page 280)

For further information on the ECO start/stopfunction; see (Y page 279).Additional driving tips (Y page 211).

Stationary vehicleIf the vehicle is stopped, the combustionengine is, for the most part, switched off.Automatic climate control continues to func-tion. The electro-mechanically assisted steer-ing gear allows use of the power steeringwithout loss of comfort.


AccelerationDepending on the operating mode, pullingaway and driving under low load conditionsare performed:Rentirely by electric propulsionRin combination with the internal combus-tion engine

When accelerating at an increased or fullload, boost mode is utilised. The electricmotor supports the internal combustionengine by providing additional torque whenthe accelerator is depressed rapidly.

Overrun mode or brakingThere are three possible operating modeswhen the hybrid vehicle is decelerating:RWhen coasting and decelerating, energyrecuperation is already taking place(Y page 269). The electric motor functionsas an alternator and stores the recuperatedenergy in the high-voltage battery.RWhen braking gently, the electric motorincreases the deceleration of the vehicle.Energy recuperation is increased(Y page 269). The electric motor functionsas an alternator and stores the recuperatedenergy in the high-voltage battery.RDuring heavy braking, the service brake isalso used to slow down the vehicle. Bothsystems work together.

Driving in the cityEnergy is recuperated during frequent decel-eration and stopping in city traffic.The vehicle can be driven by the electricmotor alone up to a speed of approximately35 km/h, e.g.:Rwhile approaching a traffic lightRin stop-and-start trafficThe vehicle is driven by the electric motoralone only when all conditions for the auto-matic engine switch-off are fulfilled.Further information on the automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 280).

Driving on inter-urban roadsThree phases are possible when driving oninter-urban roads:Rrapid acceleration (boost mode)Rconstant energy consumptionRenergy recuperationDepending on the characteristics of theroute, there may be a lot of recuperatedenergy available. This reduces consumptionand emissions.

Driving on the motorwayWhen driving on a motorway, the followinghave a particularly positive effect on fuel con-sumption and emissions:Rthe decrease in wasted power when usingrecuperative brakingRthe decrease in wasted power in overrunmode when the combustion engine isswitched off

Manoeuvring and turningThe hybrid drivemakes it possible tomanoeu-vre and turn solely using the electric motor.

ECO start/stop function

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches theinternal combustion engine off automaticallywhen the vehicle stops moving and at highspeeds (Y page 280).All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. theautomatic climate control.The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive programs C, E and I. Electric-onlyoperation is only possible in drive programs Cand E.


Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic engine switch-offThe internal combustion engine is switchedoff automatically if:Rthe driver removes his foot from the accel-erator pedal and a speed of 160 km/h isnot exceeded (Y page 280)Rthe combustion engine and the transmis-sion have reached operating temperatureRthe driver's seat belt is fastened and thedriver's door is closedRthe driver only slightly depresses the accel-erator pedal in order to, for example, main-tain the current speed for a limited distanceRthe bonnet is closed and engaged properlyRthe high-voltage battery is charged suffi-cientlyRthere are no faults in the hybrid systemThe internal combustion engine will not beswitched off automatically, if:Rthe self-diagnosis function of the enginecontrol unit is still activeRthe climate control of the vehicle requires itRthe high-voltage battery is being charged(Y page 274)Rautomatic emissions tests are runningRthe operating temperature of the engine,transmission and catalytic converter hasnot yet been reached

Automatic engine startThe internal combustion engine, which hasbeen automatically switched-off, starts auto-matically in certain situations, when:Rthe power demand from the driver via theaccelerator pedal is greater than the elec-tric motor alone can provideRthe driver switches to drive program S or S+Rthe driver has activated manual gearshift-ing

Rthe charge level of the high-voltage batteryhas reached the lower limitRthe settings of the automatic climate con-trol require it, e.g. at external temperaturesabove 30 †

Overrun modeThis operating mode is available in the speedrange below 160 km/h.The combustion engine is switched off and isdisconnected from the drive train.The electric motor:Rsimulates an overrun torque which is equiv-alent to the overrun torque of the combus-tion engineRfunctions as a generator and produces thenecessary energy for the auxiliary consum-ers and charges the high-voltage battery

Extended overrun modeOverrun mode allows you to increase thevehicle range.When the vehicle is in overrun operatingmode:X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshiftpaddle.Energy recuperation is reduced to the min-imal amount of energy required. The vehi-cle rolls faster and further, e.g. on long andsteep downhill gradients or while coastingtowards a set of traffic lights.

You can see the reduction in energy recuper-ation in the electric motor CHARGE display(Y page 272).The "extended overrun" operating mode isdeactivated again if:Rthe combustion engine startsRyou depress the brake pedal


ParkingX Apply the electric parking brake.The red! indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift theautomatic transmission to P.

X Switch the ignition off.The READY indicator in the instrument clus-ter goes out.

Further information on parking and switchingoff the internal combustion engine(Y page 208).


Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with hybrid operation

Internal combustion engine


You cannot start theinternal combustionengine. The multifunc-tion display shows nodisplay messages. TheREADY indicator in themultifunction display isoff.

For example, the self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybridsystem is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Try to start the internal combustion engine again.If the internal combustion engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You wish to pull away,but the ECO start/stopfunction does not startthe internal combus-tion engine. The READYindicator in the multi-function display is off.

The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster light up.X Move the transmission selector lever to P.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Start the engine.

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hybrid system


The hybrid system wasdeactivated automati-cally.

You have been in an accident.The hybrid system remains deactivated if:Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a fewseconds.Rthe red SRS warning lamp 6 in the instrument cluster is lit.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The hybrid system wasdeactivated automati-cally. The multifunctiondisplay also shows adisplay message.

An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid system or anelectrical connection has been disconnected.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 314).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


Towing a trailer


G WARNINGThe braking system can overheat if you leaveyour foot on the brake pedal while driving.This increases the braking distance and couldeven cause the braking system to fail. There isa risk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle/trailercombination if it begins to swerve. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even overturn.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-tion by increasing speed. Decrease yourspeed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-essary.

G WARNINGIf the maximum the permissible load for a car-rier system is exceeded, the carrier couldcome loose from the vehicle and endangerother road users. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never exceed the permissible noseweightwhen using a carrier.

Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball cou-pling may cause damage to the following:Ryour vehicleRthe trailerRthe ball couplingRthe trailer tow hitchThe vehicle/trailer combination couldbecome unstable.If the noseweight used is lower than the min-imum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/

trailer combination could also become unsta-ble.To avoid hazardous situations:Rmake sure to check the noseweight beforeeach journey.Ruse a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-sible to the maximum noseweight.Rdo not exceed the maximum permissiblenoseweight.Rdo not use a noseweight lower than theminimum permissible trailer drawbar nose-weight.

Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

The applicable permissible values, whichmust not be exceeded, can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the identification plates of the trailer towhitch and the trailerRon the vehicle identification plateIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.You will find the values approved by the man-ufacturer on the vehicle identification platesand those for the towing vehicle under "Tech-nical data" (Y page 478).

G WARNINGIf you release the ball coupling or it does notengage correctly when folding in, it will swingout. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,there is an increased risk of an accident andinjury.Only release the ball coupling if the pivotingrange is unobstructed. Always make sure thatthe ball coupling engages when folding in.

Towing a trailer 283

Drivingandparking

Z

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

When reversing the vehicle towards thetrailer, make sure there is nobody betweenthe trailer and the vehicle.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradi-ent-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis can impair the vehicle's handling char-acteristics. Adapt your driving style accord-ingly. Maintain a safe distance. Drive care-fully.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weather con-ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-tion.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notesTrailer towing is not permissible on the fol-lowing models:RC 180 BlueEFFICIENCY EditionRC 220 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY EditionWhen towing a trailer, set the tyre pressure onthe rear axle of the towing vehicle for a max-imum load; see the tyre pressure table in thefuel filler flap (Y page 432).

On vehicles without level control, the heightof the ball coupling will alter according to theload placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use atrailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.You will find fitting dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 477).When towing a trailer, the ECO start/stopfunction is deactivated. Theè ECO sym-bol appears yellow in the multifunction dis-play. For further information on the ECOstart/stop function; see (Y page 186).

Driving tips

Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabilisa-tion (Y page 82).The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what the max-imum permitted speed is. Observe the legallyprescribed maximum speed in the relevantcountry.For certainMercedes-Benz vehicles, themax-imum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. See the "Technicaldata" section to find out whether this appliesto your vehicle (Y page 478). If you utilise anyof the added maximum rear axle load whentowing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combina-tion may not exceed a maximum speed of100 km/h for reasons concerning the oper-ating permit. This also applies in countries inwhich the permissible maximum speed forvehicle/trailer combinations is above100 km/h.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer and it willconsume more fuel.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients.This also applies if cruise control, DISTRONICPLUS or SPEEDTRONIC are activated.This will use the braking effect of the engine,so less braking will be required to maintainvehicle speed. This relieves the load on the

284 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

brake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not countersteer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle infront than when driving without a trailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brakegently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbingcapabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engine,and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decrease with increas-ing altitude.

Folding out the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly engaged,the trailer can detach. There is a risk of anaccident.Always engage the ball coupling as described.

G WARNINGIf you release the ball coupling or it does notengage correctly when folding in, it will swingout. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,there is an increased risk of an accident andinjury.Only release the ball coupling if the pivotingrange is unobstructed. Alwaysmake sure thatthe ball coupling engages when folding in.

Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,you must fold out the ball coupling.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.

X Open the boot lid.X Pull release knob: until the ball couplingunlocks.The ball coupling folds out from under therear bumper.The indicator lamp on the release knobflashes. The trailer socket folds away auto-matically.

X Press the ball coupling in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages in a vertical posi-tion.The indicator lamp on the release knobgoes off.The multifunction display shows theTrailerTrailer hitchhitch CheckCheck locklock mech.mech.mes-sage until the ball coupling is engaged.

X Remove the protective covering from theball coupling and store it in a safe place.

Hybrid vehicles: observe the safety instruc-tions for hybrid vehicles (Y page 269).


Drivingandparking

Z

Coupling up a trailerX Make sure that the transmission is in posi-tion P.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Position the trailer horizontally behind thevehicle.

X Couple up the trailer.X Establish the electric connection betweenthe vehicle and the trailer.

X Check that the trailer lighting system isworking.

X Push the combination switch upwards/downwards and check whether the corre-sponding turn signal on the trailer is flash-ing.A connected trailer is only recognisedwhenthe electrical connection is establishedcorrectly and when the lighting system isworking properly. The functioning of othersystems, e.g. ESP®, PARKTRONIC, ActiveParking Assist, Active Blind Spot Assist orLane Keeping Assist also depends on this.

Uncoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-run brake, you could trap your hand betweenthe vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This posesa risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicleis lowered. This can cause you or others tobecome trapped between the vehicle bodyand tyres, or underneath the vehicle. Thisposes a risk of injury.Make sure that no-one is in the immediatevicinity of the wheel arch or underneath thevehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with anengaged overrun brake. Otherwise, yourvehicle could be damaged by the rebound-ing of the overrun brake.

! Remove the installed adapter cablebefore folding in the ball coupling. Other-wise, damage may occur to the rearbumper and the adapter cable.

X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-tion P.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Secure the trailer against rolling away.X Remove the trailer cable and decouple thetrailer.

Folding in the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf you release the ball coupling or it does notengage correctly when folding in, it will swingout. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,there is an increased risk of an accident andinjury.Only release the ball coupling if the pivotingrange is unobstructed. Alwaysmake sure thatthe ball coupling engages when folding in.

Fold the ball coupling back in if you are notusing the trailer tow hitch.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthe trailer cables are disconnected.

X Place the protective covering on the ballcoupling.

X Open the boot lid.


X Pull release knob: until the ball couplingunlocks.The ball coupling folds down fromunder therear bumper. The indicator lamp on therelease knob flashes.Do not attempt to speed this process up byapplying additional pressure with your foot.The system could otherwise be mechani-cally damaged.

X Press the ball coupling in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages audibly behindthe bumper.The indicator lamp on the release knobgoes out and the message in the multifunc-tion display disappears.

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with apower rating of up to 240 W to the perma-nent power supply and with a power ratingof up to 180 W to the power supply that isswitched on via the ignition lock.

The trailer batterymay not be charged fromthe power supply.

When it leaves the factory, your vehicle'strailer socket is equipped with a permanentpower supply and a power supply that isswitched on via the ignition lock.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.The power supply that is switched on via theignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin10.The trailer's permanent power supply isswitched off in the event of low vehicle supplyvoltage and after six hours at the latest.You can find more information about fittingthe trailer electrics at a qualified specialistworkshop.X To switch the connected power supplyon or off: turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2 or 0 respectively (Y page 181).

Bulb failure indicator for LED lampsIf LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an errormessagemay appear in themultifunction dis-play even if there is no fault. The reason forthe error message may be that the currenthas fallen below the minimum of 50 mA.To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failureindicator, each LED chain in the trailer lightingmust be guaranteed a minimum current of50 mA.

Trailer with 7-pin connector

General notesTrailer with 7-pin connector: you can con-nect to the 13-pin socket on the ball couplingusing an adapter or, if necessary, an adaptercable. Both can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.


Drivingandparking

Z

Fitting the adapter

! Make sure that there is sufficient cableplay so that the cable cannot becomedetached when cornering.

! Remove the installed adapter cablebefore folding in the ball coupling. Other-wise, damage may occur to the rearbumper and the adapter cable.

X Open the socket cover.X Insert the plug connector with lug: intogroove= on the socket. Turn bayonet con-nection; clockwise to the stop.

X Let the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, securethe cable to the trailer with cable ties.


Problems with trailer towing


The released ball cou-pling cannot beengaged.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The ball coupling doesnot unlock, eventhough:Rthe vehicle is station-aryRno trailer cable isconnectedRthe release knob tounlock the ball cou-pling has been pulledfor more than a sec-ond.

The on-board voltage is insufficient.X Start the engine.If the ball coupling still does not unlock:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


Drivingandparking

Z

Useful information ............................ 292Important safety notes ..................... 292Displays and operation ..................... 292Menus and submenus ...................... 297Display messages ............................. 314Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 351

291

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information




G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognise functionrestrictions relevant to safety. The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be impaired. Thereis a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at all

times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, park the vehicle safely as soon aspossible. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop.For an overview, see the instrument clusterillustration (Y page 34).


Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted using brightness controlknob:.X Turn brightness control knob: up ordown.If the light switch (Y page 137) is set toÃ, T or L the brightness isdependent upon the brightness of theambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are illuminated. A dimming functionis not possible in daylight.

292 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 216):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated(Y page 219):The segments light up from the start of thescale to the selected limit speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 222):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Rev counter! Do not drive in the overrevving range.Doing so will damage the engine.

The red band in the rev counter indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 295).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

The analogue coolant temperature gauge is inthe instrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 34).In the on-board computer in the ServiceServicemenu there is a digital coolant temperaturegauge (Y page 307).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 120 †.At high outside temperatures and when driv-ing uphill, the coolant temperature may riseto the end of the scale.

Displays and operation 293

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe key to position 1 in the ignition lock.

Vehicles with manual transmission: if youremove the key then quickly re-insert it andturn to position 1, the on-board computer/instrument cluster is not activated.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.Left control panel

ò RCalls up a main menu

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls through listsRSelects a menu or functionRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the track or station listand selects an audio track orvideo sceneRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or a telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RRapid scrolling in all listsRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:selects a station, audio track orvideo scene using rapid scrollingRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu: startsrapid scrolling if the phone bookis open

a RIn all menus: confirms the selec-ted entry in the listRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMedia menu:opens the list of available radiosources/mediaRIn the TelephoneTelephone menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialling the selected num-ber

ñ Switches off LINGUATRONIC, seethe separate operating instructions

% Press briefly:RBackRIn the RadioRadio/MediaMediamenu: dese-lects the track or station list orlist of available radio sources/mediaRHides display messagesRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume


-board

computerand

displays

8 RMute

ó Switches on LINGUATRONIC, seethe separate operating instructions

Multifunction display

Multifunction display (example: vehicles with auto-matic transmission): Drive program (Y page 195); Transmission position (Y page 195)= Display panel for display messages,

menus and menu lists? TimeA Outside temperature (Y page 293)B Additional speedometer (Y page 312)The unit displayed in additional speedometerB in the multifunction display is inverse tothe speedometer unit in the instrument clus-ter.X To call up the menu list in display panel=: press theò button on the steeringwheel.Display panel= shows the selected menuor submenu and display messages.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation, for

manual transmission

(Y page 191) or when shiftingmanually (automatic transmis-sion) (Y page 198)

XjY Active Parking Assist(Y page 239)

¯ Cruise control (Y page 216)È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 219)READYREADY READY indicator for the hybrid

system (Y page 272)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist PLUS

(Y page 139)è ECO start/stop function

(Y page 186)ë HOLD function (Y page 232)a DISTRONIC PLUS Steering

Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(Y page 230)

120 km/h!120 km/h! Maximum permissible speedexceeded (only for certain coun-tries)

Head-up display

General notesThe head-up display projects informationfrom the navigation system and the driverassistance system above the dashboard intothe driver's field of vision.A requirement for the display of the contentsis that the following functions are available inthe vehicle and are switched on:RNavigationRDISTRONIC PLUSRCruise control and SPEEDTRONICRTraffic Sign AssistThe head-up display allows the driver to seeall of the information without having to takehis eyes off the road.

Important safety notesThe head-up display is only an aid and is not asubstitute for attentive driving.

Displays and operation 295

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Speed limits and overtaking restrictions arenot always correctly displayed. Traffic signsalways have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The visibility of the head-up display is influ-enced by the following conditions:Rthe driver's seat positionRthe positioning of the display imageRthe general light conditionsRsunglasses with polarisation filtersRwet road surfacesRblocking of sunlight by objects on the dis-play cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections ofthe display may fade. This can be reversed byswitching the head-up display off and onagain.

i Vehicles with the head-up display areequipped with a special windscreen.Should repairs be necessary, have thewindscreen replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.


Switching the head-up display on/off

X Press button:.When the head-up display is switched on,the display appears in the driver's field ofvision.


-board

computera

nddisplays

Head-up display

Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display:: Navigation messages; Current speed= Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 222)

The selected cruise control speed (Y page 216)The selected SPEEDTRONIC speed (Y page 219)

If Traffic Sign Assist is activated in the head-up display sub-menu, detected traffic signs arealso shown in the display.In the Settingsmenu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options:RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 310)RSetting the position (Y page 310)RAdjusting the brightness (Y page 310)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress theò button on the steering wheelto call up the list of menus and select a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 294).Depending on the equipment fitted in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 298)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 300)RRadioRadio menu (Y page 302)

RMediaMedia menu (Y page 302)RTelephoneTelephone menu (Y page 304)RAssistance graphicAssistance graphic menu(Y page 306)RServiceService menu (Y page 306)RSettingsSettings menu (Y page 307)

Menus and submenus 297

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip meter: and total distancerecorder; is shown.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to selectapproximate range: and current fuel con-sumption;.

Approximate range: that can be covered iscalculated according to your current drivingstyle and the amount of fuel in the tank. Ifthere is only a small amount of fuel left in thefuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being

refuelledC instead of approximaterange:.Recuperation display= shows you if energyhas been recuperated from the kinetic energyin overrun mode and saved in the battery.Recuperation display= depends on theengine installed and is therefore not availablein all vehicles.Information on the total electric range inhybrid vehicles can be found in the "Hybriddrive" section (Y page 276).

ECO display




X Use the: or9 button to select ECODISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 211).

298 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"

: Distance; Duration= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to selectFrom startFrom start or From resetFrom reset.

The values in the From startFrom start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From resetFrom reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 299).The From startFrom start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded.The From resetFrom reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 kilometres.

Digital speedometer




X Press the: or9 button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values




X Press the: or9 button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip meterR"From start" trip computerR"From reset" trip computerRECO displayIf you reset the values in the ECO display, thevalues in the "From start" trip computer arealso reset. If you reset the values in the "Fromstart" trip computer, the values in the ECOdisplay are also reset.

Navigation menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation messages.Further information on navigation can befound in the separate Audio 20 or COMANDOnline operating instructions.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.


X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.


Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination; Estimated arrival time= Distance to the next change of direction? Current road

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road to which the change of directionleads

; Distance to the change of direction= Change-of-direction symbol? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white)A Possible lane (light grey)B Lane not recommended (dark grey)On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-tions can be displayed for the next change ofdirection if the digital map supports this data.During the change of direction, new lanesmay be added.


-board

computerand

displays

Lane not recommendedB: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Possible laneA: you will be able to completethe next change of direction in this lane only.Recommended lane?: in this lane you willbe able to complete the next change of direc-tion and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom-mendation


; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is to bemade, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. This shortenstowards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced changeof direction. The change of direction startsonce the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen-dation


; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol? Lane recommendation

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

: Additional informationOther possible additional information:RNewNew route...route... or CalculatingCalculating route...route...A new route is calculated.RRoad not mappedRoad not mappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognised,e.g. off-road position.RNo routeNo routeNo route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Radio menu

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position= Name of artist? Name of trackStation; is displayed with the station fre-quency or station name. Thememory positionis only displayed along with station; if thishas been stored.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.


X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the RadioRadio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.Currently selected station; appears inthe multifunction display.

X To open the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station list:press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station from the station listusing rapid scrolling: press and brieflyhold the: or9 button.

X To select a waveband or station preset:pressa briefly.

X Use: or9 to select the wavebandor station preset.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i You can store your stations in Audio 20 orCOMAND Online, see the separate operat-ing instructions.

i DAB radiomode (DigitalAudioBroadcast-ing) is an optimised digital transmissionstandard designed for themobile receptionof radio transmissions.

Media menu

Changing the media source

You can change the media source and play-back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time inthe MediaMedia menu.You can change the media source and play-back mode (audio, video or TV) at any time inthe MediaMedia menu.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.


X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the MediaMedia menu.


X To open/close the media sources list:pressa briefly.The list shows the followingmedia sources,for example:


-board

computerand

displays

Rdisc (CD/DVD)Rmemory card (SD/SDHC)RMEDIA REGISTERRUSB storage deviceRBluetooth® audio device

Observe the additional information on mediasupport and on media mode in the separateAudio 20 or COMAND Online operatinginstructions.

Audio player or audio media operation

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memorystick

; Current track= Name of artist? Name of albumA Folder nameAudio files from various audio players ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment fitted in the vehicle.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.




X To select audio player or data carrier:pressa briefly, to open the list of mediasources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing audio player or audio media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the track list: press: or9briefly.

X To select next/previous track from thetrack list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a track from the track listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until the desired track isreached.If you press and hold the: or9button, the rapid scrolling speed isincreased. Not all audio devices or mediasupport this function.

If the corresponding track information isstored on the audio drive or audio media, themultifunction display may display the follow-ing:Rtrack numberRtrack nameRartistRalbumThe track information does not appear inaudio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode:external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.




On-board

computerand

displays

Z


X To select DVD single drive or data car-rier: pressa briefly, to open the list ofmedia sources.

X Use: or9 to select the correspond-ing DVD player or DVD media.

X Pressa to confirm.X To open the scene list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select the next or previous scenefrom the scene list: briefly press: or9.

X To select a scene from the scene listusing rapid scrolling: press andhold: or9 until desired scene: isreached.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

TV operation

: Station frequency with memory position; Programme information, e.g. the name of

the film= Name of channel listThe memory position is only displayed alongwith channel: if this has been stored.X Switch on COMAND Online; see the sepa-rate operating instructions.




X To select TV: pressa briefly to openthe list of media sources.

X Use: or9 to select TV.X Pressa to confirm.X To open the channel list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a channel from the channellist: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a channel from the channellist using rapid scrolling: press andbriefly hold the: or9 button.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

i You can store TV channels in COMANDOnline, see the separate operating instruc-tions.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGOperating the integrated information systemsand communications equipment in the vehiclewhile driving will distract you from traffic con-ditions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate these devices if road traffic con-ditions permit. If you are unsure about thesurrounding conditions, pull over to a safelocation and make entries only while the vehi-cle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone, see the sepa-rate telephone operating instructions.

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND Online,see the separate operating instructions.


-board

computerand

displays

X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket(Y page 386).

orX Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio20 or COMAND Online, see the separateoperating instructions.


X Press: or9 on the steering wheelto select the TelephoneTelephone menu.


You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RTelephone readyTelephone ready or the name of the net-work provider: the mobile phone has founda network and is ready to receive.RTelephone No serviceTelephone No service: there is no net-work available or the mobile phone issearching for a network.

i You can obtain further information aboutsuitable mobile phones and connectingmobile phones via Bluetooth®:Rfrom any Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Accepting a call

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelephoneTelephonemenu, a displaymessage appearsin the multifunction display.

If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill accept a call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

If you are not in the TelephoneTelephonemenu, you canstill reject or end a call.

Dialling a number from the phone bookX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the:,9 ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe: or9 button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialling.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ling.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

RediallingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialled in the redial memory.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ling.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance graphic menu


X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AssistanceAssistancegraphicgraphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.

X Press: to display the ATTEN-TION ASSIST assessment.

The assistance graphic shows you the statusof and/or information from the following driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 228)RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 256)RDistance warning function and autono-mous braking system of COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 308)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 82)RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 259) or ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 263)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 255)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 261) or ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 266)

Service menu

Introduction

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages in the mes-sage memory (Y page 314)RRestarting the tyre pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 437)RChecking the tyre pressure electronically(Y page 434)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 395)RDisplaying the coolant temperature(Y page 307)RDisplaying the AdBlue® level and range(Y page 307) (BlueTEC vehicles only)


-board

computerand

displays

Displaying the coolant temperatureThe coolant temperature is also shown in theinstrument cluster in the rev counter.Observe the notes on coolant temperature(Y page 293).X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Use: or9 to select the CoolantCoolantsubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.The coolant temperature is shown in a bardisplay.

Displaying AdBlue® level and rangeThis menu is only available in BlueTEC vehi-cles.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Select the AdBlueAdBlue submenu using: or9.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.The range andAdBlue® level appear in a bargraph in the multifunction display.

Observe the information and notes on "Refu-elling" (Y page 204).

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettingsmenu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging assistance settings(Y page 307)RChanging head-up display settings(Y page 310)RChanging the light settings (Y page 311)RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 312)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 313)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 313)

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP®Observe the "Important safety notes" sectionin the description of ESP® (Y page 80).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilises the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelFor further information about ESP®, see(Y page 80).X Start the engine.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the:or9button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.


X Use: or9 to select the Assis‐Assis‐tancetance submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectESPESP.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.If the å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the vehicle is readyto drive, ESP® is deactivated.

If the ÷ and å warning lamps light upcontinuously, ESP® is not available due to amalfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 357).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 315).

Activating/deactivating the message dis-play for Traffic Sign AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectTraffic Sign AssistTraffic Sign Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate or deactivate: pressa.When the display is activated, recognisedtraffic signs are displayed in the multifunc-tion display for five seconds.

For further information about Traffic SignAssist, see (Y page 256).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUSX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Use9 or: to select CollisionCollisionPreventionPrevention.


X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS is deactivated, theæ symbolappears in the multifunction display in theAssistance graphicAssistance graphic menu.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 77).


-board

computerand

displays

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.


X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the AssistanceAssistancegraphicgraphic menu in the multifunction dis-play.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 82).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.


X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind SpotAssist is activated, grey radar waves prop-

agating backwards appear next to the vehi-cle in the Assistance graphicAssistance graphic menu inthe multifunction display.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 259).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 263).

Setting ATTENTION ASSISTX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to selectAttention AssistAttention Assist.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the Assis‐Assis‐tance graphictance graphicmenu in the multifunctiondisplay when the ignition is on.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 255).

Setting Lane Keeping AssistX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select Lane Keep‐Lane Keep‐ing Assisting Assist.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection StandardStandard or Adap‐Adap‐tivetive is displayed.

X To change the setting: pressa again.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist; see (Y page 261).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist; see (Y page 266).

Head-up display submenu

Switching other displays on/offThis function is only available if the vehicle isequipped with Navigation and/or Traffic SignAssist.In the on-board computer, you can selectwhich contents are shown on the windscreenwhen the head-up display is activated(Y page 295).X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theHead-up displayHead-up display submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 buttons to selectDisplay contentDisplay content.

X Pressa to confirm.Switching the Traffic Sign Assist displayon/offX Press thea button to save the setting.When you activate the Traffic SignTraffic SignAssistAssist display, recognised traffic signs areshown on the windscreen when the head-up display is activated.

Switching the navigation messages dis-play on/offX Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist:press: to select Navigation mes‐Navigation mes‐sagessages.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When you switch on the NavigationNavigation mes‐mes‐sagessages display, navigation messages areshown on the windscreen when the head-up display is activated.

For more information on navigation, see theseparate operating instructions.Further information on Traffic Sign Assist(Y page 256).

Setting the positionYou can adjust the position of the displayedcontents on the windscreen.X Switch on the Head-up display(Y page 296).





X Pressa to confirm.X Use the: or9 button to select thePositionPosition function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Use the: or9 button to set theposition from Level +5Level +5 to Level -5Level -5.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Using the Memory function, you can save andcall up the position of the head-up display asa single memory preset (Y page 130).

Adjusting the brightnessYou can adjust the brightness of the displayedcontents on the windscreen.


-board

computerand

displays

X Switch on the head-up display(Y page 296).





X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightnessBrightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to set thebrightness from Level +5Level +5 (bright) toLevel -5Level -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Light submenu

Switching the Intelligent Light Systemon/offX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theIntelligent Light SystemIntelligent Light System function.If the Intelligent Light SystemIntelligent Light System func-tion has been switched on, the cone of lightand the L symbol in the multifunctiondisplay are shown in white.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When you activate the IntelligentIntelligent LightLightSystemSystem, you activate the following functions:RMotorway modeRActive light function

RCornering light functionRExtended range foglampsIf you set the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the right/left, the multifunctiondisplay shows the Inactive for left-Inactive for left-side trafficside traffic or Inactive for right-Inactive for right-side trafficside traffic display message instead ofthe IntelligentIntelligent LightLight SystemSystem function inthe LightsLights submenu (Y page 311). This dis-playmessagewill only appear if the setting fordriving on the left/right is set opposite to yourvehicle's country version.Further information on the Intelligent LightSystem (Y page 138).

Setting the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the left/rightThis function is only available on vehicles withthe Intelligent Light System.You can use this function to switch betweensymmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam(Y page 134).X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DippedDippedbeams Setting forbeams Setting for function.You will see the selected setting: right-right-side trafficside traffic or left-side trafficleft-side traffic.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If you change the setting, conversion doesnot take place until the next time the vehi-cle is stationary.

If you set the dipped-beam headlamps fordriving on the right/left, then motorwaymode and the extended range foglamps areunavailable. These are only deactivated if thesetting for driving on the left/right is setopposite to your vehicle's country version.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

A qualified specialist workshop can set thedipped-beam headlamps for driving on theleft/right.

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display unit Speed-/odometer:Display unit Speed-/odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometres or miles inthe multifunction display.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument clusterInstrument cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay unit Speed-/odometerDisplay unit Speed-/odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm orMilesMiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:Rdigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRtotal distance recorder and the trip meterRtrip computerRcurrent consumption and the rangeRnavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionUsing the Permanent displayPermanent display function youcan enable outside temperature and addi-tional speedometer displays in the statusarea of the multifunction display.





X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Perma‐Perma‐nent displaynent display function.

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection Outside tempera‐Outside tempera‐tureture or Additional speedometerAdditional speedometer is dis-played.

X To change the setting: pressa again.

Switching the additional speedometeron/offUnited Kingdom only:The speed is shown continuously in mphmph as adigital display in the status area. The addi-tional speedometer cannot be switched on oroff.Use the DigitalDigital speedospeedo function to choosewhether the status area in the multifunctiondisplay shows the speed digitally. The unit inthe additional speedometer is always inverseto the speedometer unit.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.




X Pressa to confirm.X Use: or9 to select the DigitalDigitalspeedospeedo function.The current selection is displayed.

X To switch on/off: press thea buttonagain.


-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle submenu

Setting permanent SPEEDTRONICX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLimit speed (winter tyres)Limit speed (winter tyres) function.You will see the current setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjustpermanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments often (240 km/h240 km/h to 160 km/h160 km/h). The OffOff set-ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONICoff.

X Press thea button to store the entry.For further information on permanent SPEED-TRONIC (Y page 221).

Restoring the factory settingsX Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.



X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory settingsFactory settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset all settings?Reset all settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:the LimitLimit speedspeed (winter(winter tyres)tyres) functionin permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be setin the VehicleVehicle submenu.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differfrom the symbols in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOwner's Manual.With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone.You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the messagememory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 232)RParking (Y page 207)

Hides display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Useò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.X Press: or9 to select the message memory.If there are no display messages, you will see No messagesNo messages in the multifunction display.If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

314 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems


!÷currently unavail‐currently unavail‐able See Owner'sable See Owner'sManualManual

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),BAS (Brake Assist System), PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill startassist, ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brakelights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and ActiveBlind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷inoperative Seeinoperative SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist,ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.TheJ, ÷, å and ! warning lamps may also light upin the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

Display messages 315

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsG WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷inoperative Seeinoperative SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist,ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


÷currently unavail‐currently unavail‐able See Owner'sable See Owner'sManualManual

ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist,ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights,STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active BlindSpot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function, for example, may not be complete.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steer-ing movements at a speed above 20 km/h.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


T!÷inoperative Seeinoperative SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS,PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabili-sation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL,Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock, for example, if you brake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance may increase in an emergency brakingsituation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

JBrake immediatelyBrake immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function is active.orWith the HOLD function activated, you have:Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt orRswitched off the engineA tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress thebrake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-pears.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).You can restart the engine.

!Release parkingRelease parkingbrakebrake

The red! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is notfulfilled (Y page 209).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.


-board

computerand

displays


The red! indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake (Y page 209).

!Parking brake SeeParking brake SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.


The yellow!warning lamp and the red! indicator lamp arelit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


The red! indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warninglamp is lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If the red! indicator lamp continues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 439).X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.

X Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The red! indicatorlamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brakehas been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply the electric parking brake.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.


If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209).

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply orrelease the electric parking brake, the red! indicator lampflashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible toapply the electric parking brake manually.X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition.The electric parking brake is applied automatically.

X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically.


If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually:X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 209).

!ParkingParking brakebrake inop‐inop‐erativeerative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The red! indicatorlamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brakehas been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Rectify the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied or released:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Apply or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow!warning lamp lights up and the red! indicatorlamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.



On-board

computerand

displays

Z


!Turn on the igni‐Turn on the igni‐tion to releasetion to releasethe parking brakethe parking brake

The red! indicator lamp lights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Switch the ignition on.

JCheck brake fluidCheck brake fluidlevellevel

There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the redJ warning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGBraking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the fault.

#Check brake padCheck brake padwearwear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist Pluscurrently unavail‐currently unavail‐able See Owner'sable See Owner'sManualManual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too lowOnce the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Restart the engine.


-board

computerand

displays


Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist Plusinoperativeinoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE inopera‐PRE-SAFE inopera‐tive See Owner'stive See Owner'sManualManual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionscurrently limitedcurrently limitedSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too lowOnce the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionslimited See Own‐limited See Own‐er's Manualer's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS might also be deactivated.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Radar sensorsRadar sensorsdirty See Owner'sdirty See Owner'sManualManual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RPRE-SAFE® PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUSPossible causes:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety systemis impaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out. All driving systems/driving safety systems are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors (Y page 401) in the following locations:Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

üü If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belttongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts(Y page 50).


-board

computerand

displays


ýý If this symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belttongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.

G WARNINGA seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not beenengaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide theintended level of protection.This poses an increased risk of injury.X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seatbelts (Y page 49).

Further information on the status indicator for the rear seat belts(Y page 50).

6RestraintRestraint sys.sys. mal‐mal‐function Consultfunction Consultworkshopworkshop

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on the restraint system (Y page 44).

6FrontFront leftleft malfunc‐malfunc‐tion Consult work‐tion Consult work‐shopshoporFront rightFront rightmalfunction Con‐malfunction Con‐sult workshopsult workshop

The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear left malfunc‐Rear left malfunc‐tion Consult work‐tion Consult work‐shopshoporRear rightRear rightmalfunction Con‐malfunction Con‐sult workshopsult workshop

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunc-tioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.



On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Rear centre mal‐Rear centre mal‐function Consultfunction Consultworkshopworkshop

The rear centre restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6LeftLeft windowbagwindowbag mal‐mal‐function Consultfunction ConsultworkshopworkshoporRightRightwindowbag malfunc‐windowbag malfunc‐tion Consult work‐tion Consult work‐shopshop

There is a malfunction in the left or right windowbag. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right windowbagmay either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Front-passengerFront-passengerairbag disabledairbag disabledSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

The front-passenger front airbag is disabled during the journeyalthough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the systemdetects may be too low.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front airbag does not deploy during an acci-dent.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant on the front-passenger seat step out of thevehicle.

X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps in the centreconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, the automaticfront-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disa-bled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 54).Rthe display messages Front-passengerFront-passenger airbagairbag enabledenabledSeeSee Owner'sOwner's ManualManual or Front-passengerFront-passenger airbagairbag disa‐disa‐bled See Owner's Manualbled See Owner's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutionspassenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are notmet, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation feature (Y page 54).

Front-passengerFront-passengerairbagairbag enabledenabled SeeSeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

The front-passenger front airbag is enabled during the journeyalthough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the systemweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to theweight applied to the seat.

G WARNINGThe airbag may deploy unintentionally.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure there are no objects applying additional force to theseat.The systemmay otherwise detect the additional force and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps in the centreconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ONindicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds.Rthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, the automatic


-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutionsfront-passenger front airbag deactivation system has disa-bled the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 54).Rthe display messages Front-passengerFront-passenger airbagairbag enabledenabledSeeSee Owner'sOwner's ManualManual or Front-passengerFront-passenger airbagairbag disa‐disa‐bled See Owner's Manualbled See Owner's Manual must not appear in the multi-function display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or ON indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how the automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation system classifies the occu-pant.If the conditions are notmet, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Further information on the automatic front-passenger front airbagdeactivation feature (Y page 54).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.


bLeft corneringLeft corneringlightlight or Right cor‐Right cor‐nering lightnering light

The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft dipped beamLeft dipped beamor Right dippedRight dippedbeambeam

The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 142).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bTrailer left tailTrailer left taillamplamporTrailerTrailerright tail lampright tail lamp

The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


bTrailer left indi‐Trailer left indi‐catorcatororTrailerTrailerright indicatorright indicator

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

bTrailer brake lampTrailer brake lamp

The trailer brake lamp is faulty.X Observe the separate operating instructions provided by thetrailer manufacturer.

bRear left indica‐Rear left indica‐tortor or Rear rightRear rightindicatorindicator

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 142).


bFront left indica‐Front left indica‐tortor or Front rightFront rightindicatorindicator

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 142).


bLeftLeft mirrormirror indica‐indica‐tortor or Right mir‐Right mir‐ror indicatorror indicator

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isfaulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft brake lampLeft brake lamp orRight brake lampRight brake lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bThird brake lampThird brake lamp

The third brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft-hand tailLeft-hand taillamp/ brakelamp/ brakelamplamporRight-handRight-handtail lamp/ braketail lamp/ brakelamplamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


bLeft tail lampLeft tail lamp orRight tail lampRight tail lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bLeft mainLeft mainbeambeamorRight mainRight mainbeambeam

The left or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 142).


bNumber plate lampNumber plate lamp

The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear fog lampRear fog lamp

The rear foglamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bFrontFront leftleft parkingparkinglamplamp or FrontFrontright parking lampright parking lamp

The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bReversing lightReversing light

The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 142).


bLeft daytime driv‐Left daytime driv‐ing lamping lamp or RightRightdaytime drivingdaytime drivinglamplamp

The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive Light Sys‐Active Light Sys‐tem inoperativetem inoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bIntell. Light Sys‐Intell. Light Sys‐tem inoperativetem inoperative

The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain availablewithout the Intelligent Light System.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

The exterior lighting is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.X Check the fuses (Y page 424).X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notesas you do so.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAUTOAUTO lightslights inoper‐inoper‐ativeative

The light sensor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch off lightsSwitch off lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssistAssist PlusPlus inoper‐inoper‐ativeative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist Plus cur‐Assist Plus cur‐rentlyrently unavailableunavailableSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of visionRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, displaymessage AdaptiveAdaptive HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist PlusPlus availableavailable againagainis displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is operational again.


-board

computerand

displays

Engine


+TopTop upup coolantcoolant SeeSeeOwner’s ManualOwner’s Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 393).

X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

?? The fan motor is faulty.X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continuedriving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g.driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

?Coolant Stop vehi‐Coolant Stop vehi‐cle Switch enginecle Switch engineoffoff

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGNever drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engineis overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire.In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause seriousburns, which can occur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by frozen slush.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 120 †. The engine mayotherwise be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 †.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


#See Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Rfaulty alternatorRdefective power electronics (hybrid vehicles)Rtorn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions, and switch off the engine.

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop vehicle SeeStop vehicle SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Observe the instructions in the# See Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manualdisplay message.


#Start engine SeeStart engine SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window heating and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes, or drive for a longerdistance.The battery charges.


-board

computerand

displays


4Check eng. oilCheck eng. oillev. when nextlev. when nextrefuellingrefuelling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling, at the latest(Y page 392).

X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cool-ing system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4AddAdd 11 litrelitre engineengineoiloil whenwhen nextnext refu‐refu‐ellingelling

Display message only for AMG vehicles:The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.X Check the engine oil level when next refuelling, at the latest(Y page 392).

X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if theengine oil needs topping up more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys when there is too little coolant in the cool-ing system. Otherwise the engine will be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Engine oil levelEngine oil levelStop vehicleStop vehicleSwitch engine offSwitch engine off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 392).X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 392).

8Reserve fuel levelReserve fuel level

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel leveldrops into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

CC There is very little fuel in the fuel tank.The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


¸ReplaceReplace airair cleanercleaner

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and mustbe replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!CleanClean thethe fuelfuel fil‐fil‐terter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. Thewater must be drained off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Refill AdBlue SeeRefill AdBlue SeeOwner’s ManualOwner’s Manual The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning

tone also sounds.X Refill AdBlue® as soon as possible (Y page 204).

Refill AdBlue NoRefill AdBlue Nostart in ... mistart in ... mi The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A

warning tone also sounds.X Refill AdBlue® immediately (Y page 204).i If you drive the vehicle faster than 15 km/h the RefillRefillAdBlueAdBlue NoNo startstart inin ...... mimimessage goes out after approx-imately one minute.

RefillRefill AdBlueAdBlue Eng.Eng.start not possiblestart not possible The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can

no longer start the engine.X Add at least 3.5 l of AdBlue® (Y page 204).X Turn the ignition on for approximately one minute.The system requires approximately one minute after refilling todetect the change in the AdBlue® level.

X Start the engine.

Check AdBlue SeeCheck AdBlue SeeOwner’s ManualOwner’s Manual The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Eng.Eng. startstart notnot pos‐pos‐siblesible The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds. You can no longer start the engine.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays

Hybrid system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ÛMalfunctionMalfunction

The hybrid system is malfunctioning.X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or towed with therear axle raised to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

dMalfunctionMalfunction

The drive system is malfunctioning.The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning.The drive power is restricted.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a break!Take a break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that youget enough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention Assistinoperativeinoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle risingVehicle rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

¨Vehicle risingVehicle risingPlease waitPlease wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop vehicle Vehi‐Stop vehicle Vehi‐cle too lowcle too low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a shortperiod.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h.X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontwings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movementis too great.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise thevehicle.


¨MalfunctionMalfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-acteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist currentlyAssist currentlyunavailable Seeunavailable SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual orActive Lane Keep‐Active Lane Keep‐ing Assist cur‐ing Assist cur‐rentlyrently unavailableunavailableSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of visionRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere are no lane markings for a long or extended periodRthe lanemarkings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowOnce the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Clean the windscreen.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist inopera‐Assist inopera‐tivetive or ActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist inoperativeAssist inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistcurrently unavail‐currently unavail‐able See Owner'sable See Owner'sManualManual or ActiveActiveBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistcurrently unavail‐currently unavail‐able See Owner'sable See Owner'sManualManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-erative. Possible causes:Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerangeRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation

Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistnotnot availableavailable whenwhentowing a trailertowing a trailerSeeSee Owner'sOwner's ManualManualor Active BlindActive BlindSpot Assist notSpot Assist notavailableavailable whenwhen tow‐tow‐ing a trailer Seeing a trailer SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated whiletowing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assistinoperativeinoperative orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist inoperativeAssist inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ParkPark AssistAssist cancel‐cancel‐ledled

The driver's door is open.X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process withthe driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter-vention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure not to touch themultifunction steering wheel.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 239).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ParkPark AssistAssist inoper‐inoper‐ativeative

PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty.X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems withPARKTRONIC" section (Y page 239).

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty.X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine.

If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbolis not shown in the multifunction display):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic SignTraffic SignAssist currentlyAssist currentlyunavailable Seeunavailable SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of visionRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogX Clean the windscreen.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-play message disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic SignTraffic SignAssist inoperativeAssist inoperative

Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 232).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 232).

DISTRONIC PLUS offDISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 222).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSavailable againavailable again

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 222).


-board

computerand

displays


DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS cur‐cur‐rentlyrently unavailableunavailableSee Owner's ManualSee Owner's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also tem-porarily inoperative.Possible causes:Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe on-board voltage is too lowA warning tone also sounds.Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSinoperativeinoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS sus‐sus‐pendedpended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 222).

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS andandSPEEDTRONIC inop‐SPEEDTRONIC inop‐erativeerative

DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tonealso sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


DTR+: steeringDTR+: steeringassist. currentlyassist. currentlyunavailable Seeunavailable SeeOwner's ManualOwner's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are tempo-rarily inoperative. Possible causes:Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of visionRvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fogRthere are no lane markings for a long or extended periodRthe lanemarkings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snowOnce the causes listed above no longer apply, the displaymessagegoes out.DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Clean the windscreen.

DTR+: steeringDTR+: steeringassistant inopera‐assistant inopera‐tivetive

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are malfunc-tioning.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

CruiseCruise controlcontrol andandSPEEDTRONIC inop‐SPEEDTRONIC inop‐erativeerative

SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SPEEDTRONIC LimitSPEEDTRONIC Limit- - - mph- - - mph

While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store thespeed.

Cruise controlCruise control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store thespeed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 216).

120 km/h!120 km/h!Maximum speedMaximum speedexceededexceeded

Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-ded.In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!120 km/h!.X Drive more slowly.


-board

computerand

displays

Tyres


Tyre pressureTyre pressureCheck tyresCheck tyres

The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tyres or fittednew wheels and tyresRthe tyre pressure in one or more tyres is not correct

G WARNINGUnderinflated tyres pose the following risks:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincreaseRthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which maygreatly impair tyre tractionRthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmanoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tyre (Y page 408).

X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyrepressure.

X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyrepressure is correct (Y page 437).

Check tyre pres‐Check tyre pres‐suressures thenthen restartrestartRun Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicator

The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 437).

RunRun FlatFlat IndicatorIndicatorinoperativeinoperative

The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Rectify tyre pres‐Rectify tyre pres‐suresure

The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyrepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 433).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 435).

Check tyre(s)Check tyre(s) The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGUnderinflated tyres pose the following risks:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincreaseRthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which maygreatly impair tyre tractionRthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired



X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 433).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

WarningWarning tyretyre defectdefect The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicleRyou could lose control of the vehicleRcontinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire




-board

computerand

displays


Tyre press. moni‐Tyre press. moni‐tor currentlytor currentlyunavailableunavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as thecause has been rectified.

Wheel sensor(s)Wheel sensor(s)missingmissing

There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tyre press. moni‐Tyre press. moni‐tortor inoperativeinoperative NoNowheel sensorswheel sensors

The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. Thetyre pressure monitor is deactivated.X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driv-ing for a few minutes.

Tyre press. moni‐Tyre press. moni‐tor inoperativetor inoperative

The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


To start engine,To start engine,shift to either Pshift to either Por Nor N

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary batteryAuxiliary batterymalfunctionmalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Apply brake toApply brake todeselect Park (P)deselect Park (P)positionposition

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Risk of vehicleRisk of vehiclerolling Transmis‐rolling Transmis‐sion not in Psion not in P

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in positionR,N orD.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).

Without changingWithout changinggear,gear, consultconsult work‐work‐shopshop

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Only select ParkOnly select Park(P) when vehicle(P) when vehicleis stationaryis stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Clutch overheatedClutch overheatedAvoidAvoid pullingpulling awayawayEngage/disengageEngage/disengageclutch quickly ifclutch quickly ifreq.req.

The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operatingtemperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds.Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over lon-ger distances.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Leave the engine running.The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running.

orX If possible, continue driving at a steady speed.X Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow theclutch to slip.The clutch may also cool down during the journey.

It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutchhas cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch isfully operational again.


-board

computerand

displays


N The boot lid is open.X Close the boot lid.

MM The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is inmotion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Close the bonnet.

Active bonnet mal‐Active bonnet mal‐function See Own‐function See Own‐er's Manualer's Manual

The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to amalfunction or because it has already been triggered.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

CC At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors.

_Rear left seatRear left seatbackrest notbackrest notlockedlocked or RearRearright seat back‐right seat back‐rest not lockedrest not locked

Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

_Rear centre back‐Rear centre back‐rest not lockedrest not locked

Saloon with through-loading facility in the rear compartment:The centre rear seat backrest is not engaged.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

jCheck trailerCheck trailerhitch lockhitch lock

The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.A warning tone also sounds.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Engage the trailer coupling's ball coupling in the end position(Y page 285).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


&Pre-entry climatePre-entry climatecontrol (via key)control (via key)available againavailable againafter engine startafter engine start

Hybrid vehicles: with the engine switched off, you have attemptedto switch on the pre-entry climate control more than twice.X Let the engine run for ten seconds.After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is opera-tional again.

&Pre-entry climatePre-entry climatecontrol (via key)control (via key)inoperativeinoperative HVHV bat‐bat‐tery lowtery low

Hybrid vehicles: the on-board voltage is too low.The pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.X Drive for a considerable distance.The battery charges. The pre-entry climate control is operationalagain as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-ficient.

&FunctionFunction availableavailableagainagain afterafter engineenginestartstart

Vehicles with BlueEFFICIENCY package: you have attempted toswitch on the pre-entry climate control (eHeat/eVent) more than3 times with the engine switched off.X Let the engine run for ten seconds.After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is opera-tional again.

&inoperative Bat‐inoperative Bat‐tery lowtery low

The on-board voltage is too low.The auxiliary heating (Y page 172) has switched itself off. Theauxiliary heating or pre-entry climate control (eHeat/eVent) can-not be switched on.X Drive for a considerable distance.The battery charges. The auxiliary heating or the auxiliary cli-mate control ("eHeat/eVent" function) is operational again assoon as the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient.

&inoperativeinoperative RefuelRefuelvehiclevehicle

There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannotbe switched on (Y page 172).X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

&inoperative Seeinoperative SeeOwner's Man.Owner's Man.

The auxiliary heating is temporarily malfunctioning or faulty.X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt(Y page 172).

X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


ÐPowerPower steeringsteering mal‐mal‐function See Own‐function See Own‐er's Manualer's Manual

The power steering assistance is faulty.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

ÐSteering malfunc‐Steering malfunc‐tion See Owner'stion See Owner'sManualManual

The electric steering lock is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 207).X Do not drive on and consult the nearest qualified specialistworkshop.

_Before startingBefore startingthe engine, turnthe engine, turnthethe steeringsteering wheel.wheel.

The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly.X Insert the key into the ignition lock again.

Telephone No ser‐Telephone No ser‐vicevice

Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥TopTop upup washerwasher fluidfluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 394).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Key


ÂKey does notKey does notbelong to vehiclebelong to vehicle

You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.X Use the correct key.

ÂReplace keyReplace key

The key needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂChange key batter‐Change key batter‐iesies

The key batteries are discharged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 94).

ÂKey not detectedKey not detected(white display mes-sage)

The key is currently undetected.X Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

If the key still cannot be detected:X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

ÂKey not detectedKey not detected(red display message)

The key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Locate the key.X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-sage.


-board

computerand

displays


Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves,the key is not detected whilst the engine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.

ÂRemove startingRemove startingbutton, thenbutton, theninsert keyinsert key

The key is continually undetected.The key detection function has a temporary malfunction or isfaulty. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.


Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü N Only for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for6 seconds after the engine starts.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fastentheir seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).

ü NOnly for certain countries: the red seat belt warning lamp lights up after theengine starts. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 351

On-board

computerand

displays

Z


NN Signal typePossible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon asthe driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the same time, youare driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time, you aredriving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in asecure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

352 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems



J N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is runningor the ECO start/stop function is activated.Hybrid vehicle: the yellow brake system warning lamp is shown in drivingcondition READY.

G WARNINGThe brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Hybrid vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in driving con-dition READY.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



J N The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Hybrid vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in driving con-dition READY.A warning tone also sounds.There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGBraking efficiency may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the fault.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.


-board

computerand

displays



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in driving conditionREADY.ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) has been deactivated due to a fault. ThereforeBAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation,Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keep-ing Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems,such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will be unavail-able.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in driving conditionREADY.EBD is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS,COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, ESP® trailer stabilisation,Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLDfunction, hill start assist, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, Active LaneKeeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rearwheels could therefore lock, for example, if youbrake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



J÷å!

N The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lampand the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running.Hybrid vehicle: The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFFwarning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are shown in driving conditionREADY.ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to a fault. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUS, COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailer stabilisation,crosswind driving assistance, adaptive brake lights, STEER CONTROL, ActiveLane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above. The front and rearwheels could therefore lock, for example, if youbrake hard.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. Thebraking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding orat least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 81), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 80).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in driving conditionREADY.ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®,PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist,ESP® trailer stabilisation, Crosswind Assist, adaptive brake lights, STEERCONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functionslisted above.The braking distance may thus increase in an emergency braking situation.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or theECO start/stop function is activated.Hybrid vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in driving conditionREADY.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.There is an increased danger of skidding and risk of an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 81), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 80).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



! N The red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/orthe yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe airbags or belt tensionersmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may not be triggered.This poses an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop imme-diately.

Further information on the restraint system (Y page 44).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine



; N The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up while the engine isrunning.There may be a fault, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)Rin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running inemergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 203).X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency runningmode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp is on while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level drops into thereserve range.X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the bar display.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is faulty.The coolant temperature is no longer beingmonitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving under any circum-stances.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blockedor the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 393).

X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling systemchecked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. byfrozen slush.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 120†.The engine may otherwise be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 120†. The airflow to the engine radi-ator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine is overhea-ted can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compart-ment to catch fire.In addition, steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, whichcan occur just by opening the bonnet.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions, and switch off the engine.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the enginehas cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 393).

X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine cooling systemchecked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. byfrozen slush.

X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue driving to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid putting the engine under heavy load as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

Hybrid system



J N The yellow RBS (Recuperative Brake System) warning lamp is on. In addi-tion, a warning tone may sound.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning. The automatic engine switch-off function may also bedeactivated.X Observe the messages in the multifunction display (Y page 314).X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



J N The red brake warning lamp is on. A warning tone also sounds.

G Risk of accidentRBS is malfunctioning.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstan-ces.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.X Increase the distance.

· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. Awarning tone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel attoo high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 82).For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 77).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tyres



h N The yellow tyre pressuremonitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)is lit.The tyre pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of thetyres.

G WARNINGWith tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increaseRthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impairtyre tractionRthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpairedThere is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeu-vres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 207).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tyres and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tyre(Y page 408).

X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 433).X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

h N The yellow tyre pressuremonitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computera

nddisplays

Vehicle



Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power steering assistance is faulty.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialistworkshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearestqualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Useful information ............................ 368Stowage areas ................................... 368Features ............................................. 376

367

Stow

ingandfeatures

Useful information



Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if the bootlid is open when the engine is running, espe-cially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a riskof poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe boot lid. Never drive with the boot lidopen.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, especiallywhen braking or abruptly changing directions.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:Rnever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the permissible axleloads for the vehicle (including occupants).Rthe boot is the preferred place to carryobjects.Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the boot as pos-sible.Rthe loadmust not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.Ralways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant lashing material. Pad sharpedges for protection.

i Load restraints are available at any quali-fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Stowage compartments


G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, lug-gage nets or stowage nets.

368 Stowage areasStow

ingandfeatures

RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the boot.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368).

Front stowage compartments

Glove compartment

X To open: pull handle: and open glovecompartment flap;.

X To close: fold glove compartment flap;upwards until it engages.

Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example,can be stored in the glove compartment. Forvehicles with a perfume atomiser(Y page 167) the storage space of the glovecompartment is restricted.

The glove compartment can only be lockedand unlocked using the emergency key ele-ment.

X To lock: insert the emergency key elementinto the lock and turn it 90° clockwise toposition2.

X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti-clockwise to position1.

Spectacles compartment

X To open: press marking:.The spectacles compartment opens down-wards.

X To close: press marking: again and thespectacles compartment returns upwardsand engages.

Make sure that the spectacles compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the front centreconsole

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECTleverX Briefly press trim; in the direction of thearrow.Cover: swings upwards.

Stowage areas 369

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled-up fluo-rescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicledocument wallet (front-passenger door) instowage compartment: in the doors.Bottles with a capacity of up to 1.0 l may bestored in doors;.

Stowage compartment/telephone com-partment under the armrest

X To open: press button: at the front.The stowage space opens.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, thefollowing may be in the stowage space:Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USBports and an SD card slot, e.g. for use withan iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player, see theseparate operating instructionsRa mobile phone bracketRa small stowage space in the upper frontsection

Rear stowage compartments

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest

X To open: fold down the seat armrest.X Press on the front of release catch: andfold the cover of the armrest upwards.

Additional stowage spaceDepending on the equipment, the followingadditional stowage areas are available in thevehicle:Rcard and coin holder in the dashboardabove the light switch (not suitable for hold-ing thin objects such as shopping tokens)Rthe open stowage compartment in thecentre consoleRstowage net in the front-passenger footwellRthemap pockets on the back of the driver'sand front-passenger seatRthe luggage nets on the left and right-handside in the boot

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 368).


ingandfeatures

Ski/snowboard bag


G WARNINGThe skibag in conjunction with the lashingstraps cannot restrain any objects other thanskis.Vehicle occupants could be struck in theevent of sudden braking or an accident, forinstance, if you:Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edgedobjects in the skibagRdo not secure the skibag with the lashingstraps

There is a risk of accident and injury.Store only skis in the skibag. Always securethe skibag with the lashing straps so that itcannot move around.

A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow-boards can be transported in the ski/snow-board bag.

Securing the ski/snowboard bag in theboot

X Fold themiddle rear seat backrest forwards(Y page 372).

X Slide the ski/snowboard bag between thetwo outside rear seat backrests. Ensurethat the wheels of the ski/snowboard bagare in the boot.

X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip:and place the skis or snowboards inside it.

X Close the ski/snowboard bag.X Pull tensioning strap; tight by the looseend until the skis or snowboards are heldfirmly inside the ski/snowboard bag.

X Engage tensioning strap= in a diagonalpattern on hooks? in lashing eyeletsAas shown.

Through-loading facility in the rearbench seat


G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt cannot protect as intended andcould result in additional injury.RObjects or loads in the boot cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

This poses an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged before every trip.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368).The outside and the middle rear seat backr-ests can be folded down separately toincrease the boot capacity. The division ratiois 40% to 20% to 40%.

Stowage areas 371

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Folding the rear seat backrest forwardX Vehicles without memory function: if nec-essary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forwards.

X Vehicles with memory function: when oneor both parts of the rear seat backrest arefolded forwards, the respective front seatmoves forward slightly, when necessary, inorder to avoid contact.

X Open the boot.X Fully insert the rear seat backrest headrestraints.

Left and right seat backrestX Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-rest release handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

Middle rear seat backrestX Pull release lever; forwards.Rear seat backrest: is released.

X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest;forwards.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

Left and right seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunc-tion display in the instrument cluster. Awarning tone also sounds.


ingandfeatures

Middle rear seat backrestX Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages.Red lock status indicator; is no longervisible.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 121).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

If you do not need the through-loading fea-ture, you should always engage the rear seatbackrests. This will prevent unauthorisedaccess to the boot from the vehicle interior.

Locking the centre rear seat backrest

In order to prevent the boot from beingaccessed by unauthorised persons, thecentre seat backrest can be locked using acatch. The centre seat backrest can only befolded forward together with the left seatbackrest.

X To lock: fold the left and centre seat backr-ests forward.Make sure that the centre andleft seat backrests are engaged and joinedtogether.

X Slide catch: upwards.The release mechanism of the centre seatbackrest is locked.

X To unlock: fold back the left and centreseat backrests.

X Slide catch: downwards from inside theboot.

Securing a load

Lashing eyelets

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 368).RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets.RDistribute the load on the lashing eyeletsevenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load. These are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route lashingmaterials across sharpedges or corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Boot

Saloon with through-loading feature in the rearbench seat

Stowage areas 373

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

X Fold up the lashing eyelets next to the rearseat backrest and put them through theslots in the carpet.

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear amaximum load of3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.

: Bag hook

EASY-PACK boot box


G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK boot box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the centre of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK convenience box ispulled out, no objectsmay be placed on the

frame of the box or pushed onto the framefrom above. Otherwise, the box could bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objectscan damage the EASY-PACK boot box andthen be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK boot box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the boot outside of the EASY-PACK boot box.

! If you exceed the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK boot box, objectscan be thrown out of the EASY-PACK bootbox and strike vehicle occupants. There is arisk of injury, particularly in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change indirection.Always observe the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK boot box. Alwaysstore and secure heavy objects in the bootoutside of the EASY-PACK boot box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK boot box is 10 kg. With a load of aboveapproximately 5 kg, the bottom of the boxmoves downward until it rests on the mat ofthe boot floor. Thus, overloading of the box isavoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

Example


ingandfeatures

X Pull the box out by handle: in the direc-tion of the arrow all the way to the stop.

X To lower the load surface: push thecentre of load surface; down by hand inthe direction of the arrow until load sur-face; has reached the desired positionand the box is the desired size.

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by han-dle: all the way to the stop.

Removing and fitting

ExampleX To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=

X Raise box: and press hooksA intoanchorage? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB anti-clock-wise and right-hand rotating catchBclockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchB clockwise and right-hand rotating catchB anti-clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it outfrom anchorages?.

Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat sur-face after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.

Stowage well under the boot floor! Remove the handle again before closingthe boot lid and snap it in tightly to preventthe handle flap from protruding. Otherwise,you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

Stowage areas 375

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Roof carrier


G WARNINGWhen a load is transported on the roof, thevehicle's centre of gravity rises and the han-dling changes. If you exceed the maximumroof load, the handling as well as steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the maximum roof load andadapt your driving style.

The maximum roof load can be found in the"Technical data" (Y page 476).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier is fittedyou can:Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama slid-ing sunroof fullyRopen the boot lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-ers, do not use metallic or hard objects toopen them.

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.Vehicleswith panorama sliding sunroof: ifa roof carrier is fitted, the panorama slidingsunroof cannot be opened. In order to allowventilation of the vehicle interior, you canraise the panorama sliding sunroof.If a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benzmakes contact with the panorama sliding

sunroof, the sunroof will lower slightly butremain raised in the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-age points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holders


G WARNINGThe cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-tainer in place during a journey. If you use acup holder during a journey, the drinks con-tainer could be flung around and liquid couldbe spilt. Vehicle occupants could come intocontact with the liquid and, in particular, bescalded by hot liquid. You could be distractedfrom the traffic situation and lose control ofthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only place containers of a suitablesize in the cup holder. Seal the container, inparticular when it contains hot liquid.

376 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, lug-gage nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the boot.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 368).

Cup holders in the front centre console

If you remove the cup holder insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stowage.Vehicles with manual transmission:X To remove: slide upper cup holder sec-tions: on the driver's and front-passenger sides inwards until they release.

X Slide the cup holder forwards slightly andthen pull it upwards;.

X To fit: insert the cup holder at the front andthen slide it backwards until it reachesedge= of the underside of the stowagecompartment. Insert the cup holder so thatthe wedge of the upper section of the cupholder faces forwards.

X Slide upper cup holder sections: on thedriver's and front-passenger sides out-wards, until both left and right sides;engage.

You can remove the rubber mat of the cupholder to clean it. Wash it with clean, luke-warm water only.

If you remove the cup holder insert, you canuse the resulting compartment for stowage.Vehicles with automatic transmission:X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X To remove: slide catch= forwards andpull out cup holder;.

Features 377

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

X To insert: insert cup holder; and slideback catch=.

X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

You can remove the rubber mat of the cupholder to clean it. Wash it with clean, luke-warm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: press the front of cup holder:or;.Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cupholder.The cup holder folds down automatically.

X To fold in: remove the container.The cup holder folds in automatically.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; backuntil it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

: Mirror light; Retainer= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into retainer; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

Roller sunblinds in the rear side win-dows! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic roller mech-anism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the motorway. Thiscould damage the inertia reel. Therefore,

378 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

either close the side window or retract theroller sunblind before driving at highspeeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at thetop of the window.

Rear window roller sunblind


G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening/closing process is stopped.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Extending/retracting the roller sun-blind

X Turn the key to position1 or2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To extend or retract: briefly press but-ton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly andretracts into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

Features 379

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with manual transmission:X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X To remove the insert: hold the sides ofinsert=, push it forward and lift it up;and out.

X To refit the insert: press insert= into theholder until it engages.


Vehicles with automatic transmission:X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at itsright side=.

X To remove the insert: hold the sides ofinsert?, push it forward and lift it up;and out.

X To refit the insert: press insert? into theholder until it engages.

X To close: close the cover of the ashtray.X Push cover: of the stowage compart-ment closed.

i You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: push ribbing=from the left side and pull insert:upwards.

X To fit the insert: fit insert: into theholder from above and press down into theholder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

380 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

Vehicles with manual transmission:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.


Vehicles with automatic transmission:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.


12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 181).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as bulbs or chargersfor mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.If you have connected a device to the 12 Vsocket, leave the cover of the stowage com-partment open. This prevents the cover frombeing blocked.

Socket in the front centre console

Vehicles with manual transmission:X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

Features 381

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Vehicles with automatic transmission:X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 369).

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: push cover: of the stowagecompartment closed.

Socket in the rear-compartment centreconsole

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

230 V socket


G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the230 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 230 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the230 V power socket is dry.RImmediately have the 230 V power socketchecked or replaced at a qualified special-ised workshop if it is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 230Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only attach appropriate objects to the powersocket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 230 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 230 V power socket provides an alter-nating voltage of 230 V so that small elec-tronic devices can be connected. These devi-ces, such as games consoles, chargers andlaptops, must not consume more than a max-imum of 150 watts altogether.Do not connect any multiple socket outlets tothe 230 V power socket.Requirements for operating these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect hasa suitable connector and conforms tostandards specific to the country you are in.Rthe electronic device connector is pluggedinto the 230 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board voltage is within a permissiblevoltage range.Rthe 12 V socket in the front centre consoleis working properly (Y page 381).

382 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

Using the 230 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap=.X Insert the electronic device connector into230 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: remove the connector from230 V power socket:.Make sure that you do not pull on the cable.

Features 383

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Problems with the 230 V power socket


The warning lamp onthe 230 V power socketis not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 416).

If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 230 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.

If the indicator lamp still does not light up after the converter coolsdown:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constantnominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device,the 230 V power socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-temInformation on these requirements can befound in the separate COMAND Online oper-ating instructions.

X To open: press cover: briefly.X To make an emergency call: press SOSbutton; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.You will see a message if:Ra connection to the Mercedes-Benzemergency call centre cannot be madeRa call has not been automatically forwar-ded to the public emergency call centre

In this case, dial the 112 emergency num-ber on your mobile phone.

You can find more information on theMercedes-Benz emergency call system in the

384 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

separate COMAND Online operating instruc-tions.

Mercedes-Benz Contact

General notesMercedes-Benz Contact offers fast assis-tance at the touch of a button – around theclock. For any queries about the vehicle,Mercedes-BenzContact offers a fast and easyconnecting call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Centre. You can, for example, requestan appointment or call for help in the event ofa breakdown.The Audio 20/COMAND Online display indi-cates that a call is active. During the call youchange to the navigation menu by pressingthe NAVI button in Audio 20/COMANDOnline, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.You can find more information aboutMercedes-Benz Contact in the separateAudio 20/COMANDOnline operating instruc-tions.

Breakdown assistance call button

X To call breakdown assistance: press but-ton: for breakdown assistance.The breakdown assistance call is initiated.The ConnectingConnecting callcallmessage appears inthemultifunction display. The audio systemis muted.Only in certain countries: a voice messageprompts you to confirm the data transmis-

sion. After confirmation, the required vehi-cle data is transmitted. During data trans-mission, you will see a corresponding sym-bol in the display. This may take a moment.You are then connected to an employee.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding Audio 20/COMAND Online button to end a call.

Info call buttonThis function is not available in all countries.

X To call: press info call button:.The breakdown assistance call is initiated.The ConnectingConnecting callcallmessage appears inthemultifunction display. The audio systemis muted.Only in certain countries: a voice messageprompts you to confirm the data transmis-sion. After confirmation, the required vehi-cle data is transmitted. During data trans-mission, you will see a corresponding sym-bol in the display. This may take a moment.You are then connected to an employee.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding Audio 20/COMAND Online button to end a call.

Features 385

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Mobile phone


G WARNINGOperating mobile communications equip-ment while driving distracts you from payingattention to traffic conditions. This could alsocause you to lose control of the vehicle. Thereis a risk of an accident.Use this device only when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating mobile communicationsequipment in the vehicle.If it is permitted by law to operate communi-cations equipment while the vehicle is inmotion, you may only do so if the traffic sit-uation permits. You may otherwise be dis-tracted from the traffic conditions, cause anaccident and injure yourself and others.Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and to thehealth of others. The use of an exterior aerialtakes into consideration the scientific discus-sion surrounding the possible health riskposed by electromagnetic fields.Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of anapproved exterior aerial. This ensures:Roptimal mobile phone reception quality inthe vehicleRthat mutual interference between the vehi-cle electronics and mobile phones is mini-mised

An exterior aerial has the following advan-tages:Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen-erated by a wireless device to the exteriorRthe field strength in the vehicle interior islower than in a vehicle that does not havean exterior aerial

Information on retrofitting two-way radiosand mobile phones (RF transmitters)(Y page 466).

General notesDepending on the vehicle equipment, thereare various mobile phone brackets that maybe fitted in your vehicle; in some cases, theseare country-specific.More information on suitable mobile phones,mobile phone brackets and on connectingBluetooth®-capable mobile phones toCOMAND Online/Audio 20 can be obtained:Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service CentreRon the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

The functions and services available whenyou use the phone depend on your mobilephone model and service provider.

Using a mobile phoneTo connect a mobile phone to the exterioraerial and charge it, insert it into the mobilephone bracket.X Open the telephone compartment(Y page 370).

X Place the mobile phone bracket into thepre-installed fitting; see the separate instal-lation instructions for the mobile phone fit-ting.

X Insert the mobile phone into the mobilephone bracket; see the separate installa-tion instructions for the mobile phone fit-ting.

i The mobile phone can also be operatedwithout being in the bracket. However, thecharging function and aerial function arenot available.

In order to use Bluetooth® (SAP profile) onyour telephone module, you must first insertthe telephone module into the pre-installedfitting. This connects it to the exterior aerial.If you wish to charge the mobile phone, thenyou must connect it to a USB port.Further information on the telephone modulewith Bluetooth® (SAP profile) can be found inthe Digital Owner's Manual.

386 FeaturesStow

ingandfeatures

Operating the mobile phoneYou can operate the telephone using the6 and~ buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel. You can operate other mobilephone functions via the on-board computer(Y page 304).When you remove the key from the ignitionlock, the mobile phone is disconnected fromthe vehicle. You can then no longermake callsusing the hands-free system.If a call is active and you remove the key fromthe ignition lock, the conversation is trans-ferred over to the mobile telephone. It is thenpossible to continue the conversation on themobile phone.

Floormats


X Slide the relevant seat back.X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat away fromretainers;.

X Remove the floormats.

Retrofitted anti-glare filmRetrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of thewindows can interfere with radio/mobiletelephone reception. This is particularly thecase for conductive or metallic-coated films.You can obtain information about anti-glarefilm from a qualified specialist workshop.

Features 387

Stow

ingandfeatures

Z

Useful information ............................ 390Engine compartment ........................ 390ASSYST PLUS .................................... 395Care .................................................... 396

389

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information



Engine compartment

Bonnet


G WARNINGAn unlocked bonnet may open while drivingand block your view. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Never unlock the bonnet while driving.

G WARNINGWhen being opened and closed, the bonnetmay suddenly fall into the closed position.There is a risk of injury to persons in the rangeof movement of the bonnet.Open and close the bonnet only when nobodyis in the range of movement.

G WARNINGIf you open the bonnet while the engine isoverheating or while there is a fire in theengine compartment, you could come intocontact with hot gases or other leaking ser-vice products. There is a danger of injury.Allow an overheating engine to cool downbefore opening the bonnet. If there is a fire inthe engine compartment, leave the bonnetclosed and notify the fire brigade.

G WARNINGThere are moving components in the enginecompartment. Certain components may con-tinue to move or suddenly move again evenafter the ignition has been switched off, e.g.the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.If you have to carry out work in the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever touch the dangerous areas surround-ing moving components, e.g. the rotationarea of the fanRremove jewellery and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts.

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem operate with a high voltage. If you touchthe live components, you could receive anelectric shock. There is a danger of injury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or the fuel injection system when theignition is switched on.

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Operating principle! An active bonnet that had been triggeredmust be repaired at a qualified specialistworkshop. The active bonnet function willthen be available again. The additionalpedestrian protection provided by theactive bonnet will then be restored.

The active bonnet is only available in certaincountries.The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injuryto pedestrians in certain accident situations.Raising the active bonnet increases the clear-ance to hard components, such as the engine.If the active bonnet has been triggered, it israised at the rear in the area around the hingeby approximately 85mm. The active bonnet istriggered by pyrotechnics.

390 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig-gered active bonnet yourself. If the activebonnet has been triggered, pedestrian pro-tection may be limited.

ResettingG WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

X With your hand flat, push down active bon-net: in the area around the hinges onboth sides (arrows) until you feel it engage.

If you can raise the active bonnet slightly inthe area around the hinges, it is not engagedcorrectly. Repeat the step.

Opening the bonnet

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, theradiator and parts of the exhaust system.There is a risk of injury when accessing theengine compartment.As far as possible, allow the engine to cooldown and only touch the components descri-bed in the following.

G WARNINGWhen the bonnet is open, and the windscreenwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before opening the bonnet.

! Make sure that the windscreenwipers arenot folded away from the windscreen. Oth-erwise, you could damage the windscreenwipers or the bonnet.

ExampleX Make sure that the windscreen wipers areswitched off.

X Pull release lever: on the bonnet.The bonnet is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-dle; up and lift the bonnet.If you lift the bonnet by approximately40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Engine compartment 391

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Closing the bonnetX Lower the bonnet and let it fall from aheight of approximately 20 cm.

X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-erly.If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator. Do not use ther-mal mats, insect protection covers or any-thing similar. Doing so can cause theOnboardDiagnostics System to display inaccurate val-ues. Some of these values are legally requiredand must always be correct.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1,000 km.The oil consumption may be higher than thiswhen the vehicle is new or if you frequentlydrive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe installed at a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait approximately30 minutes before carrying out the meas-urement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick


ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the oil dipsticktube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, top up with 1.0 l of engine oil.

Adding engine oil



andcare

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil does not spill outover the filler neck. Allow the engine to cooldown and thoroughly clean the componentsthat have come into contact with engine oilbefore you start the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen topping up the oil, take care not to spillany. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it isharmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRchanging the engine oil and oil filter aftermissing the change interval required bythe service systemRusing engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. Topping up withtoomuch engine oil can result in damage tothe engine or to the catalytic converter.Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: anti-clockwise and remove it.X Top up the engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, top up with 1.0 l of engineoil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Make sure that the cap locks securely intoplace.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 392).

For further information on engine oil, see(Y page 473).

Other service products

Checking the coolant level


G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is under pressure,particularly if the engine is warm. You couldbe scalded by hot coolant spraying out whenopening the cap. There is a danger of injury.

Engine compartment 393

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Allow the engine to cool before opening thecap. Wear gloves and protective eyewearwhen opening. Slowly turn the cap half a turnto allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level if the vehicle ison a level surface and the engine hascooled down.


orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 181).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below70 †.

X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 181) inthe ignition lock.

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 181).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn anti-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further anti-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 1.5 cmabovemarker bar= in the filler neck when

warm, there is enough coolant in coolantexpansion tank;.

X If necessary, top up with coolant that hasbeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 475).

Topping up the windscreen washer sys-tem


G WARNINGIf windscreen washer concentrate comes intocontact with hot components of the engine orthe exhaust system, it can ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.Make sure the windscreen washer concen-trate does not come into contact with the fillerneck.


andcare

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the taband open.

X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 litre, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to top up the washer fluid(Y page 349).Further information on windscreen washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 476).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messageThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see separate Service Booklet).You can obtain further information from aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 392).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for a few seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. daysService A in .. daysRService A dueService A dueRService A overdue by .. daysService A overdue by .. daysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter indicates which service is due. AAstands for a minor service and BB for a majorservice. A number or another letter may bedisplayed after the letter.Only for certain countries: the position afterthe letter AA or BB indicates any necessary addi-tional maintenance work. If you notify a quali-fied specialist workshop of this display, you

will receive a statement on the associatedcosts.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date shown inthe multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding service messagesX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch the ignition on.X Useò on the steering wheel to call upthe list of menus.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu andpressa to confirm.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS sub-menu and pressa to confirm.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display

! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.

ASSYST PLUS 395

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Have service work carried out as describedin the Service Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. aMercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display afterthe service work has been carried out. Youcan also obtain further information on main-tenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe prescribed service interval is based onnormal operation of the vehicle. Service workwill need to be performed more often if thevehicle is operated under arduous conditionsor increased loads, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used for travellingshort distancesRfor frequent operation in mountainous ter-rain or on poor road surfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

In these or similar operating conditions, havethe air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for exam-ple, changed more frequently. The tyres mustbe checked more frequently if the vehicle isoperated under increased loads. Furtherinformation can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Donot park up the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked up.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after the vehiclehas been washed. There is a risk of an acci-dent.

396 CareMaintenance

andcare

After washing the vehicle, brake carefullywhile paying attention to the traffic conditionsin order to restore full braking efficiency.


! Make sure:Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof areclosed completely.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating isswitched off (OFF button is depressed).Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-tion 0Rthe 360° camera or reversing camera isswitched off.

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.


! Make sure that the automatic transmis-sion is in neutral position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle may otherwise be damaged.ROperating with the key:Do not remove the key from the ignitionlock. Do not open the driver's door whenthe engine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmis-sion will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.ROperating with the Start/Stop button:

Do not open the driver's door when theengine is switched off or at very lowspeeds. Otherwise, when in transmissionposition D or R the automatic transmis-sion will automatically switch to parkposition P and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position Nneutral:Operating with the key:X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Select neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

Operating with the Start/Stop button:X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Select park position P.X Release the brake pedal.X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 181).

X Insert the key into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Select neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake, if nec-essary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the key inthe ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi-cle in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windscreen and the wiper

Care 397

Maintenance

andcare

Z

blades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-screen.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

High-pressure cleaning equipment

G WARNINGThe water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-ers) can cause damage not visible from theoutside to tyres or chassis components. Com-ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-aged tyres or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about

the correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzlearound when cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtyresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrim elementsRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.


Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

398 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resins,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Care and treatment of matt paintwork

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing makes the paintworkshiny.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matt finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matt finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light-alloy wheelswith a clear matt finish.The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of approved Mercedes-Benzcare products.

Cleaning vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind-ers) can cause damage not visible from theoutside to tyres or chassis components. Com-ponents damaged in this way can unexpect-edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-aged tyres or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Donot park up the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked up.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

Care 399

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindscreen and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGIf the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There is adanger of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windscreen orwiper blades.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windscreen could be damaged ifthe wiper arm hits against it suddenly.

X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.

X Clean the wiper blades carefully using adamp cloth.

X Fold the windscreen wipers back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the exterior lighting.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signal

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning AIRPANEL

! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-sure cleaner, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 30 cm between thevehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-zle. Information about the correct distanceis available from the equipment manufac-turer.

Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in theradiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, theadjustment range of the shutters may berestricted. The actuation mechanics of theradiator trim must then be cleaned with ahigh-pressure cleaner.

400 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.Shutters: open automatically afterapproximately 120 seconds.

X Clean the location points of shutters; inthe radiator trim with a high-pressurecleaner.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-sure cleaner, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 30 cm between thevehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-zle. Information about the correct distanceis available from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the reversing camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the reversing camera with a high-pressure cleaner.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X To open the cover of the reversing cam-era:with COMANDOnline or Audio 20 acti-vated, call up the vehicle menu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System settingsSystem settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Rear view cameraRear view camera: turn andpress the controller.

X To select Open camera coverOpen camera cover: turn andpress the controller.The reversing camera cover opens.

X To clean the reversing camera: use clearwater and a soft cloth to clean cameralens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a high-pres-sure cleaner.360

Care 401

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the key is in position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X To open the cover of the 360° camera:with COMAND Online or Audio 20 activa-ted, call up the vehicle menu: press theÑ button.

X To switch to the menu bar: slide¬ thecontroller.

X To select System settingsSystem settings: turn andpress the controller.

X To select the 360°360° cameracamera: turn and pressthe controller.

X To select Open camera coverOpen camera cover: turn andpress the controller.The cover of the 360° camera opens.

X To clean the 360° camera: clean cameralens: with clear water and a soft cloth.

If you drive at speeds above 30 km/h or withthe key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock,the cover of the 360° camera closes auto-matically.

Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental noteDispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-ronmentally-responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.

! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if itbecomes dirty or corroded.X Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wirebrush.

X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or abrush.

X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ballcoupling.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

i You can also have the maintenance workon the ball coupling and the trailer towhitchcarried out by a qualified specialist work-shop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or petrolRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

402 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfibre cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fibre cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. This could result in plasticparts breaking away when the airbags aredeployed. There is a danger of injury.Do not use care products and cleaning agentscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou could otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come in contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change colour tempora-rily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elementswith a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfi-bre cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofibre cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

Note that regular care is essential to makesure that the appearance and comfort of thecovers are retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It has natural surface properties, e.g.:Runevenness in structureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRsubtle colour differences

Care 403

Maintenance

andcare

Z

These are characteristics of leather and notmaterial faults.

Seat covers from other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofibre clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rubcarefully, and always wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean-ing results depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.RClean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts may be severely weakened ifbleached or coloured. This may lead to theseat belts, for example, tearing or failing in anaccident. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Never bleach or colour seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts attemperatures above 80 † or in direct sun-light.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the roof lining and carpetsX Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a softbrush or dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

404 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 406Where will I find...? ........................... 406Flat tyre ............................................. 408Battery (vehicle) ................................ 412Jump-starting .................................... 418Towing away and tow-starting ........ 420Electrical fuses ................................. 424

405

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information



Where will I find...?

Warning triangle

Removing/replacing the warning trian-gle

X To remove: open the boot lid.X Push warning triangle holder: on bothsides in the direction of the arrow and openit.

X Remove warning triangle;.X To replace: place warning triangle; backinto warning triangle holder:.

X Close warning triangle holder:.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold feet= down and out to the side.X Fold side reflectors; upwards to form atriangle and lock them at the top usingpress stud:.

First-aid kit

The first-aid kit: is in the boot in the left-hand stowage net.X Open the boot lid.X Remove first-aid kit:.Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit atleast once a year:. Replace the contents ifnecessary, and replace any missing items.

406 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

Fire extinguisher

X Pull tab: upwards.X Remove fire extinguisher;.Have fire extinguisher; refilled after eachuse and checked every one or two years. Itmay otherwise fail in an emergency.Observe the legal requirements for each indi-vidual country.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe towing eye is located in the stowage wellunder the boot floor.In vehicles withMOExtended tyres (tyres withrun-flat characteristics) and in hybrid vehi-cles, the towing eye is located in a bracketunder the parcel shelf.Apart from some country-specific variants,vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changingtools. If the vehicle is equipped with tyre-changing tools, these are kept in the stowagewell under the boot floor. Some tools forchanging a wheel are specific to the vehicle.For more information on which tyre changingtools are required and approved to perform awheel change on your vehicle, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop.Necessary tyre-changing tools can include,for example:RjackRwheel chockRwheel wrench

Rratchet ring spannerRcentring pin

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

(Example): Tyre inflation compressor; Tyre sealant filler bottle= Towing eyeX Open the boot lid.X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375).X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 409).

Vehicles with a tyre-change tool kit

(Example): Tyre inflation compressor; Tyre sealant filler bottle= Wheel wrench? Folding wheel chockA JackB Towing eyeThe tyre-change tool kit is kept in a tray in thestowage well under the boot floor.

Where will I find...? 407

Breakdow

nassistance

X Open the boot lid.X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375).

Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyreswith run-flat characteristics) andhybridvehicles

: Towing eyeX To remove the towing eye: open the bootlid.

X Pull towing eye: to the left and remove it.X To replace the towing eye: slide towingeye: with the thread into the rear end ofthe bracket.

X Push towing eye: on the eyelet towardsthe right until it engages in the bracket.

Flat tyre

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char-acteristics) (Y page 408)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tyres.Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 407)Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certaincountries) (Y page 461)

Vehicles with an Mercedes-Benz emergencycall system which are not equipped with aTIREFIT kit: in the event of a flat tyre, contactthe Customer Assistance Centre for theMercedes-Benz emergency call system(Y page 384).

Information on changing/fitting a wheel(Y page 437).X Stop the vehicle as far away as possiblefrom traffic on solid, non-slippery and levelground.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 207).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from the ignition lock.or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start func-tion or KEYLESS‑GOX Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the key having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock (Y page 181).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.X Place the warning triangle at a suitable dis-tance (Y page 406). Observe legal require-ments.

MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics)

General notesWith MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tyres. The affected

408 Flat tyreBreakdow

nassistance

tyre must not show any clearly visible dam-age.You can recognise MOExtended tyres by theMOExtended marking which appears on thetyre wall. You will find this marking next to thetyre size designation, the load-bearing capa-city and the speed index.MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-junction with an active tyre pressure losswarning system or tyre pressure monitoringsystem.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the displaymes-sages (Y page 343)Rcheck the tyre for damageRif driving on, observe the following notesThe maximum driving distance is approx-imately 80 km when the vehicle is partiallyladen and approximately 30 km when thevehicle is fully laden.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:RspeedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/manoeuvres, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tyre pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h.When replacing one or all tyres, make surethat you use only:Rthe tyre size specified for the vehicle andRtyre(s) marked "MOExtended"If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith an MOExtended tyre, a standard tyremay be used as a temporary measure. Make

sure that you use the proper size and type(summer or winter tyre).Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It istherefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fittyres that do not feature run-flat characteris-tics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can beobtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu-vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot-holes, off-road). This applies in particular to aladen vehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thefaulty tyre must be replaced.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tyre sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to4mm, particularly those in the tyre tread. Youcan use TIREFIT at outside temperaturesdown to Ò20 †.

Flat tyre 409

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tyre sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyrelarger than those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressuresor on a flat tyre.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive any further. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tyre sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tyre sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-pressor for longer than eight minutes at atime without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tyre infla-tion compressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre infla-tion compressor from the stowage spaceunder the boot floor (Y page 407).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tyre seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tyre sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tyre inflationcompressor.

410 Flat tyreBreakdow

nassistance

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytyre.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert plug? into a 12 V socket(Y page 381) in your vehicle.


X Press on/off switch= on the tyre inflationcompressor to I.The tyre inflation compressor is switchedon. The tyre is inflated.First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.The pressure may briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tyre inflation compressor run forfive minutes. The tyre should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tyrepressure reached" (Y page 411).If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tyre pressure not reached" (Y page 411).If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have itcleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-ethylene.

Tyre pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tyre.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 10 m.

X Pump up the tyre again.After a maximum of five minutes the tyrepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tyre pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tyre is too badlydamaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair thetyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyrepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tyre pressure reached

G WARNINGA tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tyre thathas been repaired using tyre sealant.

The maximum speed for a tyre sealed withtyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of theTIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-ment cluster where it will be easily seen bythe driver.

! After use, excess tyre sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

Flat tyre 411

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

H Environmental noteHave the used tyre sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tyre.

X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-tion compressor and the warning triangle.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tyre pressure withthe tyre inflation compressor.The tyre pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tyre pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tyre is toobadly damaged. The tyre sealant cannotrepair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyresand a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker withthe Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephonenumber, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the fuel fillerflap for values.

X To increase the tyre pressure: switch onthe tyre inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tyre pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next to pres-sure gaugeF.

X When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtyre.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve ofthe sealed tyre.

X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyreinflation compressor.The filler hose stays on the tyre sealantbottle.

X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-tion compressor and the warning triangle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tyre changed there.

X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery - important safety notesHybrid vehicles are equipped with a 12 V bat-tery and a high-voltage battery. The followingnotes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes on thehigh-voltage battery can be obtained in the"High-voltage battery – important safetynotes" section (Y page 415).

412 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Work on the battery, e.g. removing or fitting,requires specialist knowledge and the use ofspecial tools. Therefore, always have work onthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterymay lead to a malfunction, e.g. a short circuit.This, in turn, may restrict the functions of thesafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may then be compro-mised. You could then lose control of the vehi-cle, e.g.:Rwhen brakingRwhen making sudden steering movementsand/or travelling at an inappropriatespeed.

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or similar situa-tion, inform a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 74) and (Y page 80).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture is createdwhile the battery is charging and when jump-starting.

Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. Electro-static charge is created, for example:Rby wearing synthetic fibre clothingRdue to friction between clothing and theseatRwhen you pull or push the battery acrosscarpet or other synthetic materialsRwhen you rub the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain pollutants.It is illegal to dispose of themwith the household rubbish.They must be collected sep-

Battery (vehicle) 413

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

arately and disposed of in anenvironmentally responsiblerecycling system.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally responsiblemanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or to a col-lection point for used batter-ies.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the ServiceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always have work on the batteries carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.Should it, in exceptional circumstances, beabsolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, please observe thefollowing:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from roll-ing away.Rswitch off the engine and remove thekey. Make sure the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,you may damage electronic componentssuch as the alternator, for example.Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminalclamp, followed by the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.The vehicle electronicsmay otherwise bedamaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The batteries and the covers of the positiveterminal clamps must always be fittedsecurely during operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

WARNING

Fire, naked flames and smokingare prohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,in particular gloves, an apron and aface mask.Immediately rinse acid splashesoff with cleanwater. Consult a doc-tor if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In such cases, have the battery dis-connected at a qualified specialist workshop.You can also charge the battery with acharger recommended by Mercedes-Benz.


nassistance

For more information, please contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.Have the battery charge checked more fre-quently if you use the vehicle mainly for shorttrips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked up for a long period of time.When you park the vehicle, remove the key ifyou do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy,thus conserving battery power.Hybrid vehicles: if the battery charge is suf-ficient, the high-voltage battery can also sup-ply the 12 V battery with energy. This onlyhappens if the battery charge of the 12 V bat-tery requires this, e.g. after using electricalconsumers for an extended period with theengine switched off. As the on-board voltageis continuously monitored this can also beperformed when the engine is switched off.The battery charge of the 12 V battery and theon-board voltage are thereby kept stable for alonger period.

High-voltage battery - importantsafety notesOnly hybrid vehicles are equippedwith a high-voltage battery.


G WARNINGIn the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pres-sure of the high-voltage battery could exceeda critical value. In this case, flammable gasescapes through a vent valve in the vehicle'sunderbody. The gas can ignite. There is a riskof injury.Leave the danger area immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance, whilstobserving legal requirements.

G WARNINGIf the housing of the high-voltage battery hasbeen damaged, electrolyte and gases mayleak out. These are poisonous and caustic.There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes offwith water and seek medical attentionstraight away.

! Only charge the high-voltage battery inthe "Charging when stationary" operatingmode. Do not connect a battery charger tothe high-voltage battery. Otherwise, thevehicle's high-voltage electrical systemcould be damaged.

! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehi-cle standing idle for lengthy periods candamage the high-voltage battery.If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods, runit for a fewminutes once every six weeks tocharge up the high-voltage battery.During the charging process, switch off allelectrical consumers, e.g. the automaticclimate control or the seat heating.

If you wish to park your vehicle for severalweeks, ensure that the battery is at least 30%charged. If necessary, charge the high-volt-age battery while stationary before parkingthe vehicle (Y page 416).Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre ifyou wish to leave your vehicle parked up for along period of time.


Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Charging the 12 V battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-start connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 418).X Open the bonnet.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and earth point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery inthe jump-starting procedure (Y page 418).

Never charge the battery if it is still fitted tothe vehicle, unless you use a battery chargerwhich has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit spe-cially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesand tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz

is available as an accessory. This device per-mits charging of the battery in position. Con-tact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre forinformation and availability. Read the batterycharger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upat low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this caseyou may neither jump-start the vehicle norcharge the battery. The service life of a bat-tery that has been thawed may be reduced.The starting characteristics may be impaired,especially at low temperatures. Have thethawed battery checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Hybrid vehicles: if the battery charge is suf-ficient, the high-voltage battery can also sup-ply the 12 V battery with energy. This onlyhappens if the battery charge of the 12 V bat-tery requires this, e.g. after using electricalconsumers for an extended period with theengine switched off. As the on-board voltageis continuously monitored this can also beperformed when the engine is switched off.The battery charge of the 12 V battery and theon-board voltage are thereby kept stable for alonger period.

Charging the high-voltage batterywhen stationaryOnly hybrid vehicles are equippedwith a high-voltage battery.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

! Only charge the high-voltage battery inthe "Charging when stationary" operatingmode. Do not connect a battery charger tothe high-voltage battery. Otherwise, the


nassistance

vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemcould be damaged.

X Stop the vehicle if the internal combustionengine is running.The internal combustion engine drives theelectric motor. The electric motor is oper-ating as an alternator. The high-voltage bat-tery is charging.

If the high-voltage battery is too heavily dis-charged, recharge the high-voltage battery toat least 60% of its capacity. In the "Chargingwhen stationary" operating mode, you canobserve the charge status of the high-voltagebattery up to a maximum of 70% in theCOMANDdisplay and in themultifunction dis-play (Y page 274).


Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seekmedical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jump leads.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise,the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor chargethe battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced. The startingcharacteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. Have the thawed batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

418 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpleads. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:RThe jump leads are not damaged.RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal partswhile the jump leads are connected to the battery.RThe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P.X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral.X Make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 181). All indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster must be off. When using the key, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock andremove it (Y page 181).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating, lighting etc.X Open the bonnet.

Jump-starting 419

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryBusing the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal: on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to earth point? of your vehicle using thejump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.X First, remove the jump leads from earth point? and negative terminal=, then from pos-itive clamp: and positive terminal;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehiclefirst.

X Close coverA of positive clamp: after removing the jump leads.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Hybrid vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use theelectric drive for approximately 30 minutes.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained atany qualified specialist workshop.

Towing away and tow-starting


G WARNINGSafety relevant functions are restricted or nolonger available if:Rthe engine is not runningRthe brake system or power steering is mal-functioningRthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system

When your vehicle is towed away or towedstarted, you may require considerably moreeffort to steer and brake. There is a risk of anaccident.In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Beforebeing towed away or tow started, make surethe steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehi-cle can no longer be steered. There is a risk ofan accident.Always switch on the ignition when towingwith a tow rope or a towing bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rtowing eye may be torn offRcar/trailer combination may swerve oreven overturn

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

420 Towing away and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-matically in certain situations. To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate thesesystems in the following or similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing awayRin a car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar tothe towing eyes or, if available, to the trailertow hitch. You could otherwise damage thevehicle.

! Observe the following points when towingwith a tow rope:Rsecure the tow rope on the same side onboth vehicles.Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longerthan legally permitted.Mark the tow ropein the middle, e.g. with a white cloth(30 x 30 cm). This makes other roadusers aware that a vehicle is beingtowed.Ronly secure the tow rope to the towingeye.Robserve the brake lamps of the towingvehicle while driving. Always maintain adistance so that the tow rope does notsag.Rdo not use steel cables or chains to towyour vehicle. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! Pull away smoothly when towing away ortow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive poweris too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission toN anddo not open the driver's or front passeng-

er's door during towing. The automatictransmission may otherwise shift to posi-tion P, which could damage the transmis-sion.

! Youmay tow the vehicle for amaximumof50km. A towing speed of 50 km/hmust notbe exceeded.For towing distances over 50 km, the entirevehicle must be lifted up and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 468).Observe the legal requirements for the rele-vant countries when towing.It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-age, have it transported on a transporter ortrailer.Vehicles with automatic transmission:when towing a vehicle, the automatic trans-mission must be in position N. If the auto-matic transmission cannot be shifted to posi-tion N, have the vehicle transported on atransporter or trailer.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock toposition 2Rcannot release the electric parking brakeRcannot shift the transmission to position Non vehicles with automatic transmission

Deactivate the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 98). Youcould otherwise be locked out when pushingor towing the vehicle.Deactivate tow-away protection (Y page 86)before the vehicle is towed.

Towing away and tow-starting 421

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Fitting/removing the towing eye

Fitting the towing eye

The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes arelocated in the bumpers. They are at the rearand at the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit/stowage tray (Y page 407).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards andremove.

X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to thestop and tighten it.

Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have abracket at the back for the screw-in towingeye. Connect the towbar to the trailer towhitch (Y page 284).

Removing the towing eyeX Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray.

Towing the vehicle awaywith the rearaxle raisedHybrid vehicles: towing the vehicle with therear axle raised should only be carried out byprofessional recovery companies.Only vehicles without 4MATIC can betowed with the rear axle raised.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 137).

X Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.

X If necessary, turn the key in the ignitionlock to position 0 and remove the key fromthe ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take the key withyou.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 420).

Towing the vehicle with both axles onthe groundHybrid vehicles: hybrid vehicles may not betowed away with both axles on the ground if:Rthe multifunction display is not working orRthe multifunction display shows the~MalfunctionMalfunction orRd MalfunctionMalfunction is displayedIf the vehicle is in a dangerous location it maybe towed from the danger zone with bothaxles on the ground. In this case, the towingdistance may not be greater than 50 m and

422 Towing away and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

the towing speed must not exceed 10 km/h.For longer distances, have the vehicle loadedand transported or towed with the rear axleraised.Vehicleswith automatic transmission: theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto position P when you open the driver's orfront-passenger door or when you remove thekey from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

Vehicles with manual transmission:X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Depress the clutch pedal fully and shift toneutral.

Vehicles with manual or automatic trans-mission:X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 137).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual. In this case, only the turnsignals for the desired direction flash. Whenyou reset the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamps start flashing again.

Transporting the vehicleHybrid vehicles: transportation of the vehi-cle should only be carried out by professionalrecovery companies.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can beused to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-porter if you wish to transport it.X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and shift toneutral.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and engagefirst or reverse gear.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,the transmission may be damaged.

Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towedaway with both axles on the ground or be loa-ded up and transported.If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-ported on a transporter or trailer.

Towing away and tow-starting 423

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

In the event of damage to the electricalsystem: if the battery is defective, the auto-matic transmission will be locked in positionP. To shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N, you must provide power to the vehi-cle's electrical system in the same way aswhen jump-starting (Y page 418).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Do not tow-start vehicles with automatictransmission. You could otherwise damagethe automatic transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 418).

Before tow-starting, the following conditionsmust be fulfilled:Rthe battery is connectedRthe engine has cooled downRthe exhaust system has cooled downWhen tow-starting, it is important that youobserve the safety notes (Y page420) and thelegal requirements in each respective coun-try.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 137).

X Fit the towing eye (Y page 422).X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towingrope.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec-ond gear and continue to keep the clutchpedal fully depressed.

X Release the brake pedal.X Tow-start the vehicle.X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do notdepress the accelerator pedal while doingso.

X When the engine has been started, imme-diately depress the clutch pedal fully andshift to neutral.

X Pull over at a suitable place and stop thevehicle safely, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Use the electric parking brake to secure thevehicle and prevent it from rolling away.

X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.X Remove the towing eye (Y page 422).X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.

Electrical fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate, bridge or replace a faultyfuse with a fuse of a higher amperage, theelectric cables could be overloaded. This mayresult in a fire. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Always replace faulty fuseswith specified newfuses of the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognise bythe colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratingsare listed in the fuse allocation chart.If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Centre.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle disconnect faultycircuits. If a fuse blows, all the components onthe circuit and their functions will fail.

424 Electrical fusesBreakdow

nassistance

Before replacing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 207).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off(Y page 181).

orX When using the key, turn the key to position0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 181).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box on the driver's side of the dash-boardRfuse box in the front-passenger footwellRfuse box in the engine compartment on thedriver's sideRfuse box under the boot floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in thedirection of travel

The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box inthe boot (Y page 426).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull out cover: slightly at thebottom in the direction of arrow=.

X Fold cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow;.

X To close: fold in cover: until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.


X Open the front-passenger door.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: fold cover: out towards the rearand remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: at the rear.X Fold cover: forwards until it engages.

Electrical fuses 425

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the bonnet is open, and the windscreenwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windscreen wipers andthe ignition before opening the bonnet.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.


X Open the bonnet.X To open: press safety clips: on the covertogether.

X Remove fuse box cover; upwards.

X Remove any existing moisture from thefuse box using a dry cloth.

X Loosen screws=, fold up fuse box lid?and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is posi-tioned correctly in lid?.

X Insert lid? into the bracket at the rear ofthe fuse box.

X Fold down lid? of the fuse box and tightenscrews=.

Fuse box in the boot! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.


X Open the boot lid.X Lift the boot floor upwards (Y page 375).X To open: swing cover: upwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X To close: fold down cover: in the oppo-site direction to the arrow.Make sure that the cover is in the recessprovided for it.

i The fuse allocation chart is in a recess onthe side of the fuse box. You can find thecorresponding fuse rating and fuse type onthe fuse allocation chart.

426 Electrical fusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 428Important safety notes ..................... 428Operation ........................................... 428Winter operation ............................... 430Tyre pressure .................................... 432Changing a wheel .............................. 437Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 444Emergency spare wheel ................... 461

427

Wheelsandtyres

Useful information




G WARNINGIf wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tyres with thosethat fulfil the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRtypeWhen replacing tyres, make sure to fit thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRtype

G WARNINGA flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tyres without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tyre.Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyreswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and enquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tyres for your vehicle can befound under "Wheel/tyre combinations"(Y page 444).Information on air pressure for the tyres onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 202)Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 432)Modification work on the brake system andwheels is not permitted. The use of wheelspacers or brake dust shields is not permit-ted. This invalidates the general operatingpermit for the vehicle.

i Further information on wheels and tyrescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tyre pressures when the vehicle isheavily laden and, if necessary, adjust.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tyres are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tyre is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon

428 OperationWheelsandtyres

as possible to check the wheels and tyres fordamage. Hidden tyre damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tyresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tyres do not get deformed by the kerb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overkerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tyres

G WARNINGDamaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tyres regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tyres immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tyres of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftyre pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tyresRpuncturesRtears in the tyresRbulges on the tyresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tyre tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tyre (Y page 429). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tyre surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fitanything onto the valve other than the stand-ard valve cap or other valve caps approved foryour vehicle byMercedes-Benz. Do not fit any

other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres-sure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyrepressure as necessary (Y page 432).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 461).The service life of tyres depends on variousfactors, including the following:Rdriving styleRtyre pressureRmileage

Important safety notes on the tyretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipatewater. This means that on wet road surfaces,the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particularwhere speed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tyres.Minimum tyre tread depth for:Rsummer tyres: 3 mmRM+S tyres: 4 mmFor safety reasons, replace the tyres beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtyre tread depth is reached.

Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

Operation 429

Wheelsandtyres

Z

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetyre load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Pay special attention to country-specificrequirements for tyre approval. Theserequirements can stipulate a specific tyretype for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use ofcertain tyre types in certain regions and areasof operation can be highly beneficial. You canfind further information regarding tyres atspecialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialistworkshops or at any Mercedes-Benz ServiceCentre.ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to fit a differenttype or make in the event of a flat tyre.Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres withrun-flat characteristics)" section(Y page 408).ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto thewheels.RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds forthe first 100 km. They only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tyres which have too littletread depth. This otherwise significantlyreduces the traction on wet roads (aqua-planing).RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 461).

MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics)With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tyres.MOExtended tyres may only be used in con-junction with an activated tyre pressure losswarning systemorwith an activated tyre pres-

sure monitor and on wheels specifically tes-ted by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres witha flat tyre (Y page 408).

i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kitif you fit tyres that do not feature run-flatcharacteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFITkit can be obtained from a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 438).

Driving with summer tyresAt temperatures below +7 †, summer tyreslose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tyres on your vehi-cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at verycold temperatures could cause tears to form,thereby damaging the tyres permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tyres regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tyres immediately.

M+S tyres

G WARNINGM+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than4mmare not suitable for use in winter as they

430 Winter operationWheelsandtyres

do not provide sufficient traction. There is arisk of accident.M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than4 mm must be replaced.

At temperatures below+7†, usewinter tyresor all-season tyres. Both types of tyre areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tyres bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tyres will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tyres havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tyres of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tyres you havefitted.If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi-mum permissible speed than that of the vehi-cle, affix an appropriate warning sign in thedriver's field of vision. This can be obtained ata qualified specialist workshop.Under these circumstances, you should alsorestrict the maximum speed of the vehicleusing permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that itdoes not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed for the M+S tyres (Y page 221).When you have fitted the M+S tyres:X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 432).X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-tem (Y page 437).

X Restart the tyre pressure monitor(Y page 435).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 461).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf you have fitted snow chains to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheelsRfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fitsnow chains on steel wheels, youmay dam-age the hub caps. Remove the hub capsfrom the relevant wheels before fitting thesnow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre-sponding standard of quality.If you intend to fit snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyrecombinations (Y page 444).Ronly use snow chains if the road surface iscompletely snow-covered. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.Rlocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to fit snow chains.Rdo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 km/h.Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must driveat raised vehicle level if snow chains havebeen fitted (Y page 234).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® (Y page 81)when pulling away with snow chains fitted.This way you can allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increaseddriving force (cutting action).

Winter operation 431

Wheelsandtyres

Z

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 461).

Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure specifications

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tyres pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tyretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Observe the recommended tyre pressure andcheck the tyre pressure of all the tyres includ-ing the spare wheel:Rat least every two weeksRwhen the load changesRbefore embarking on a longer journeyRfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyrevalves, the tyre valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tyre pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. Thiscan also result in tyre pressure loss. There is arisk of accident.Only screw standard valve caps or valve capsspecifically provided by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tyre valve.

G WARNINGIf the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre

pressure that is too low may result in a tyreblow-out. There is a risk of accident.RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

H Environmental noteCheck the tyre pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

You will find a table of tyre pressures for var-ious operating conditions on the inside ofyour vehicle's fuel filler flap.Operation with an emergency sparewheel (Y page 461).Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tyres is the maximum tyrepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.The table inside the fuel filler flap may statetyre pressures for different load conditions.These are defined in the table as differentnumbers of passengers and amounts of lug-gage. The actual number of seats may vary;for more information, please refer to the vehi-cle's registration documents.If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pres-sures stated on the tyre pressure informationlabel apply for all tyres approved for this vehi-cle.

If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, thefollowing tyre pressure information is onlyvalid for that tyre size.

432 Tyre pressureWheelsandtyres

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with theelectronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyrepressure can be checked using the on-boardcomputer.If possible, only correct tyre pressures whenthe tyres are cold.The tyres are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parkedwith the tyresout of direct sunlight for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1.6 km

Depending on the ambient temperature, thespeed atwhich you are driving and the load onthe tyres, the tyre temperature and thus thetyre pressure changes by approximately10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi) per 10 †. Take thisinto account when checking the pressure ofwarm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if itis too low for the current operating condi-tions.Driving with tyre pressure that is too high ortoo low can:Rshorten the service life of the tyresRcause increased tyre damageRhave a negative effect on handling charac-teristics and thus driving safety (e.g. aqua-planing)

The tyre pressure values given for low loadsareminimumvalueswhich offer you good ridecomfort characteristics.However, you can also use the values givenfor higher loads. These are permissible andwill not adversely affect the running of thevehicle.

For Saloons at speeds of up to 210 km/h(does not apply to AMG vehicles, AMGSport models): despite what is stated on thetyre pressure information label (fuel fillerflap), at speeds of up to 210 km/h the valuesstated can be reduced as follows, without areduction in safety:RSaloons (except Eco models): Ò30 kPa(Ò0.3 bar/Ò4 psi)RSaloons (Eco models with 16 or 17 intyres on both axles): Ò60 kPa (Ò0.6 bar/Ò9 psi)

This does not apply to vehicles towing atrailer.This improves the ride comfort of your vehi-cle; however, fuel consumption may increaseslightly.

Tyre pressure monitor

General notesIf a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, thevehicle's wheels have sensors fitted thatmonitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.The tyre pressure monitor warns you if thepressure drops in one or more of the tyres.The tyre pressure monitor only functions ifthe corresponding sensors are fitted to allwheels.Information on tyre pressures is shown in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tyre pressure of each tyreis shown in the ServiceService menu of the multi-function display, see illustration (example).

Tyre pressure 433

Wheelsandtyres

Z

For further information on displaying thismessage, refer to the "Checking the tyre pres-sure electronically" section (Y page 434).

Important safety notesIt is the driver's responsibility to set the tyrepressure to the recommended cold tyre pres-sure suitable for the operating situation(Y page 432). Note that the correct tyre pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tyre pressuremonitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tyre pressure monitor afteradjusting to the cold tyre pressure(Y page 435). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. This willensure that a warning message will onlyappear if the tyre pressure drops significantly.The tyre pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tyre pressure(Y page 432).The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering manoeuvres.The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss ormalfunction. Dependingon how the warning lamp flashes or lights up,a tyre pressure that is too low or a malfunc-tion in the tyre pressure monitor is indicated:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetyre pressure on one or more tyres is sig-nificantly too low. The tyre pressure moni-tor is not malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Furtherinformation can be found under (Y page 343).

If the tyre pressuremonitor ismalfunctioning,it may takemore than tenminutes for the tyrepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the faulthas been rectified, the tyre pressure warninglamp goes out after you have driven for a fewminutes.The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a filling station using a pressuregauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tyrepressures.The operation of the tyre pressure monitorcan be affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radio head-phones, two-way radios) that may be beingoperated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tyre pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the key is in position 2(Y page 181) in the ignition lock.


X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press thea button.X Press the9 or: button to selectTyre pressureTyre pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tyre pressure for each wheelwill be displayed in the multifunction dis-play.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the TyreTyre pressurespressures willwill bebedisplayed after a few minutes ofdisplayed after a few minutes ofdrivingdriving message appears.After a teach-in period, the tyre pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels or


new sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tyre pressure values to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tyre pressureTyre pressuremonitor activemonitor active display message is showninstead of the tyre pressure display. The tyrepressures are already being monitored.If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, for afew minutes the system may continue toshow the tyre pressure of the wheel that hasbeen removed. If this occurs, note that thevalue displayed for the position where thespare wheel is fitted is not the same as thecurrent tyre pressure of the emergency sparewheel.

Warning messages of the tyre pressuremonitorIf the tyre pressure monitor detects a pres-sure loss in one ormore tyres, a warningmes-sage is shown in themultifunction display andthe yellow tyre pressure monitor warninglamp comes on.RIf the Please correct tyre pressurePlease correct tyre pressuremessage appears in the multifunction dis-play, the tyre pressure in at least one tyre istoo low and must be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the Check tyre(s)Check tyre(s)message appears inthe multifunction display, the tyre pressurein one or more tyres has dropped signifi-cantly and the tyres must be checked.RIf the Warning, tyre defectWarning, tyre defect appears inthe multifunction display, the tyre pressurein one or more tyres has dropped suddenlyand the tyres must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tyres" section(Y page 343).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are inter-changed, the tyre pressuresmay be displayedfor the wrong positions for a short time. Aftera few minutes of driving, this is rectified andthe tyre pressures are displayed for the cor-rect positions.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitorWhen you restart the tyre pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tyre pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetyre pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tyre pressure. However,you can also define reference values man-ually as described here. The tyre pressuremonitor then monitors the new tyre pressurevalues.X Use the table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap to ensure that the tyre pressure is setcorrectly in all four tyres for the currentoperating conditions.Also observe the notes in the section ontyre pressures (Y page 432).

X Make sure that the key is in position2 in theignition lock (Y page 181).




X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tyre pressure for the individual tyres orthe Tyre pressures will be dis‐Tyre pressures will be dis‐playedplayed afterafter aa fewfew minutesminutes ofof driv‐driv‐inging message.

X Press the: button.The Use current pressures as newUse current pressures as newreference valuesreference values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tyre press. monitor restartedTyre press. monitor restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Tyre pressure 435

Wheelsandtyres

Z

After you have driven for a fewminutes, thesystem checks whether the current tyrepressures are within the specified range.The new tyre pressures are then acceptedas reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tyre pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tyre pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

Brazil 2770-12-8001Model: MW2433A0381-13-8001Model: GG4

Dubai TRA, Registered NOER0092100/12TRA, Registered NOER0099792/12TRA, Registered NOER0076990/11Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10

Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMStransmitterType Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/114Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4433.92 Mhz.Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/190Model: Corax 3MRXMC34MA4Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2011/158Type Number: LPD

Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/11/07/2012MR7672 ANRT 2012/23/11/2012MR6706 ANRT 2011

Country Radio type approval number

Moldova 1024

Philip-pines

No: ESD-1206394CNo: ESD-1306995C

Serbia И 011 12

Singa-pore

Compliance with IDA StandardDA- 103365

SouthAfrica

TA-2012/719TA-2012/1540TA-2011/1370

Tyre pressure loss warning system

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settyre pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognise the tyre pressure losswarning by the Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat Indicatoractive Restart with OKactive Restart with OK message whichappears in the ServiceService menu of the multi-function display. Information on the messagedisplay can be found in the "Restarting thetyre pressure loss warning system" section(Y page 437).

Important safety notesThe tyre pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tyrepressure (Y page 432).The tyre pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tyrepressures. An even loss of pressure on sev-


eral tyres at the same time cannot be detec-ted by the tyre pressure loss warning system.The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering manoeuvres.The function of the tyre pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle'styres.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tyre pressure losswarning systemif you have:Rchanged the tyre pressureRchanged the wheels or tyresRfitted new wheels or tyresX Before restarting, make sure that the tyrepressures are set properly on all four tyresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tyre pressures can befound in the table on the fuel filler flap.The tyre pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tyre pressure. If an incorrecttyre pressure is set, these incorrect valueswill be monitored.

X Observe the notes in the section on tyrepressures (Y page 432).

X Make sure that the key is in position2 in theignition lock (Y page 181).




X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator activeRun Flat Indicator activeRestartRestart withwith OKOKmessage appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tyre pressure now OK?Tyre pressure now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator restartedRun Flat Indicator restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After a teach-in period, the tyre pressureloss warning system will monitor the settyre pressures of all four tyres.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tyre pressure now OK?Tyre pressure now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tyre pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Changing a wheel

Flat tyreYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assis-tance" section (Y page 408). Information ondriving with MOExtended tyres in the event ofa flat tyre can be found under "Breakdownassistance" (Y page 408).

Changing a wheel 437

Wheelsandtyres

Z

Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel:in the event of a flat tyre, the emergencyspare wheel is fitted according to the descrip-tion under "Fitting a wheel" (Y page 438).

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthewheels or tyres have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Interchange front and rear wheels only if thewheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied inthe area of the valve, as this could damagethe electronic components.Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels ofdiffering dimensions can render the generaloperating permit invalid.Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 438).The wear patterns on the front and rear tyresdiffer depending on the operating conditions.Interchange the wheels before a clear wearpattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyrestypically wear more on the shoulders and therear tyres in the centre.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can interchange the wheelsevery 5,000 to 10,000 km depending on thedegree of tyre wear. Ensure the direction ofrotation is maintained.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and,if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss

warning system (Y page 437) or the tyre pres-sure monitor (Y page 435).

Direction of rotationTyres with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels in a cool, dry and preferablydark place if they are not being used. Protectthe tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel.

Fitting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and engagefirst or reverse gear.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position P.

X Make sure that in vehicles with AIRMATIC,the vehicle level is set to "Normal"(Y page 234).

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe key from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver'sdoor.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the key having beenremoved.

438 Changing a wheelWheelsandtyres

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-func-tion or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 181).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tyre-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

i Apart from some country-specific var-iants, vehicles are not equipped with tyre-changing tools. Some tools for changing awheel are specific to the vehicle. For moreinformation on which tools are required toperform a wheel change on your vehicle,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Necessary wheel-changing tools mayinclude, for example:RjackRwheel chockRwheel wrenchRcentring pin

Securing the vehicle against rollingaway

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit(Y page 407).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On slight downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack


Wheelsandtyres

Z

must be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

Observe the following when raising thevehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack isused incorrectly, it could tip over while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suitable for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand positioning wheel chocks. Do notrelease the parking brake while the vehicleis raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tyres and the ground doesnot exceed 3 cm.Rnever place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.Rdo not lie under the vehicle.Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rdo not open or close a door or the boot lidwhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with steel wheels and wheeltrim: the wheel trim covers the wheel bolts.Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, youmust remove the hub cap.

Steel wheel with wheel trimX Using both hands, carefully reach into twowheel trim openings and remove the wheeltrim.

Vehicles with light-alloy wheels and hubcaps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hubcap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts,you must remove the hub cap. Two differentvariants can be fitted.

Light-alloy wheel with plastic hub capVehicles with plastic hub cap:X To remove: turn the centre cover of hubcap: anti-clockwise and remove.

X To fit:before fitting, ensure that hub cap:is in the open position. To do so, turn thecentre cover anti-clockwise.


X Put hub cap: in position and turn thecentre cover clockwise until you feel andhear hub cap: engage.

X Make sure that hub cap: is fittedsecurely.

Light-alloy wheel with aluminium hub capVehicles with aluminium hub cap:X To remove: take socket; and wheelwrench= from the vehicle tool kit(Y page 407).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach wheel wrench= to socket; andloosen hub cap: anti-clockwise.

X Remove hub cap:.X To fit: before fitting, check hub cap: andthe wheel area for soiling and clean if nec-essary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it isin the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach wheel wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be 25 Nm.

i Note that the hub cap should be tight-ened to the specified torque of 25 Nm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe hub cap fitted at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Usingwheel wrench=, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel arches and just in front of the rearwheel arches (arrows).Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protectthe vehicle body, the vehicle has covers fittednext to the jacking points on the outer sills.

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: foldcover? upwards.


Wheelsandtyres

Z

X Position jackB at jacking pointA.

X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-tioned vertically under the jacking point.

X Turn crankC clockwise until jackB sitscompletely on jacking pointA and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankC until the tyre is raised a max-imum of 3 cm off the ground.

Removing a wheel

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.The threads of the wheel bolts and wheelhubs could otherwise be damaged whenthe bolts are tightened.

When fitting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid apply-ing any external force on the brake discs. Thiscould impair the level of comfort when brak-ing.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw centring pin: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on"Changing a wheel" (Y page 438).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been


approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thecentring pin and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the centring pin.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible emergencyspare wheel: inflate the collapsible emer-gency spare wheel (Y page 462).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Vehicleswith a collapsible emergencyspare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emer-gency spare wheel using the tyre inflationcompressor before lowering the vehicle.The rim could otherwise be damaged.

X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standingfirmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is130 Nm.

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the tyre-change tool kit in the boot again.

X VehicleswithAMGequipment: insert thecover into the outer sill.

X Check the air pressure of the newly fittedwheel and adjust accordingly.Observe the recommended tyre pressure(Y page 432).

If you are driving with the collapsible emer-gency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressureloss warning system or the tyre pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Only restartthe tyre pressure loss warning system/tyrepressure monitor when the defective wheelhas been replaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with a tyre pressure control sys-tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.If you are driving with the emergency sparewheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warningsystem cannot function reliably. Only restartthe tyre pressure loss warning system whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.


Wheelsandtyres

Z

Wheel and tyre combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tyres andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These are specially adapted to the controlsystems, such as ABS or ESP® and aremarked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tyres)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-sion variations could cause the tyres tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tyres or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tyres,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Further information about wheels, tyresand approved combinations can beobtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

! Retreaded tyres are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always be detec-ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fitused tyres if you have no information abouttheir previous usage.

! Large wheels: the lower the section widthfor a certain wheel size, the lower the ridecomfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-fort and suspension comfort are reducedand the risk of damage to the wheels andtyres as a result of driving over obstaclesincreases.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tyre tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleYou will find a table with recommended tyrepressures for various operating conditions onthe inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Forfurther information on tyre pressure, see(Y page 432). Check tyre pressures regularlyand only when the tyres are cold.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fitthe vehicle:Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtendedtyres)Exception: it is permissible to fit a differenttype or make in the event of a flat tyre.Observe the "MOExtended tyres (tyres withrun-flat characteristics" section(Y page 408).

Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are notequipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It istherefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you fittyres that do not feature run-flat characteris-tics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can beobtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can befitted at the factory in all countries.

444 Wheel and tyre combinationsWheelsandtyres

Tyres

C 180

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 56

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3

RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL3, 4FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 49

1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMGLine Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater groundclearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486).

2 Not in conjunctionwith AMGLine exterior package (codeP31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code482) and sports suspension (code 486).

3 Available as MOExtended tyres.4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).

Wheel and tyre combinations 445

Wheelsandtyres

Z

R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3

RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL3FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 ET 44RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 56.5

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 ET 44

3 Available as MOExtended tyres.4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMGLine Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater groundclearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486).



C 180 BlueEFFICIENCY Edition

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

C 180 BlueTEC

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48



3 Available as MOExtended tyres.


Wheelsandtyres

Z

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48




R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


C 200

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


3 Available as MOExtended tyres.2 Not in conjunctionwith AMGLine exterior package (codeP31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code482) and sports suspension (code 486).

4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).


Wheelsandtyres

Z

R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


C 200 BlueTEC

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5

3 Available as MOExtended tyres.4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).2 Not in conjunctionwith AMGLine exterior package (codeP31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code482) and sports suspension (code 486).



Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V M+Si1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36.5




Wheelsandtyres

Z

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


C 220 BlueTEC BlueEFFICIENCY Edition

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 195/65 R16 92 V1 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 36

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38


3 Available as MOExtended tyres.1 Not in conjunction with Avantgarde exterior package (code P15), Exclusive exterior package (code P23), AMGLine Exterior package (code P31), dynamic handling package (code 483/489), suspension for greater groundclearance (code 482) and sports suspension (code 486).


R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

C 220 BlueTEC

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


3 Available as MOExtended tyres.2 Not in conjunctionwith AMGLine exterior package (codeP31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code482) and sports suspension (code 486).

4 Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch).


Wheelsandtyres

Z

Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


C 220 CDI

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 V2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

2 Not in conjunctionwith AMGLine exterior package (code P31), suspension for greater ground clearance (code482) and sports suspension (code 486).



R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels




Wheelsandtyres

Z

C 250

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3





Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


C 250 BlueTEC

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54




Wheelsandtyres

Z

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels




C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC

Summer tyresR 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


Winter tyresR 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels




Wheelsandtyres

Z

C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid

Summer tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W2 BA: 6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 V3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

FA: 225/50 R17 94 W3

RA: 245/45 R17 95 W3

FA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5RA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 54

R 18

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL3


R 19

Tyres Wheels

FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3


FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL3





Winter tyresR 16

Tyres Wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si2 BA: 6.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3, 2 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 48

R 17

Tyres Wheels

BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48.5

R 18

Tyres Wheels


Emergency spare wheel


G WARNINGThe wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre typeof the spare wheel/emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit-ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelmay severely impair the driving characteris-tics. There is a risk of accident.To prevent hazardous situations:RAdapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-gency spare wheel if the dimensions aredifferent to those of the wheel beingreplaced.ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency sparewheel briefly if the dimensions are differentto those of the wheel being replaced.

RDo not switch off ESP®.RHave the spare wheel/emergency sparewheel in question replaced at the nearestqualified specialist workshop. Make surethat the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyretype are correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.Snow chains must not be fitted to emergencyspare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure of allyour tyres, including the emergency sparewheel, particularly prior to long trips, and cor-rect the pressure as necessary (Y page 432).The value on thewheel is valid. In addition, theemergency spare wheel tyre pressure can befound under "Technical data" (Y page 464).



Emergency spare wheel 461

Wheelsandtyres

Z

An emergency spare wheel may also be fittedagainst the direction of rotation. Observe thetime restriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the emergency sparewheel.Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.If you are driving with the collapsible emer-gency spare wheel fitted, the tyre pressureloss warning system or the tyre pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Only restartthe tyre pressure loss warning system/tyrepressure monitor when the defective wheelhas been replaced with a new wheel.Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor: aftermounting an emergency sparewheel, the sys-tem may still display the tyre pressure of theremoved wheel for a few minutes. The valuedisplayed for the mounted emergency sparewheel is not the same as the current tyrepressure of the emergency spare wheel.If you are driving with the emergency sparewheel fitted, the tyre pressure loss warningsystem cannot function reliably. Only restartthe tyre pressure loss warning system whenthe defective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.

Removing theemergency sparewheelThe emergency spare wheel is secured in theemergency spare wheel bag in the boot.X Open the boot.X Detach the fastening straps.X Unhook retaining spring hooks of fasteningstraps from the retainers.

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bagwith the emergency spare wheel.

X Open the bag and remove the emergencyspare wheel.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 438).

Inflating the collapsible emergencyspare wheel! Inflate the collapsible emergency sparewheel using the tyre inflation compressorbefore lowering the vehicle. The wheel rimcould otherwise be damaged.

! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-pressor for longer than eight minutes at atime without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible emergency sparewheel as described (Y page 437).The collapsible emergency spare wheelmust be mounted before it is inflated.

X Pull connector? and the air hose out ofthe housing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-lapsible emergency spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: of the air hose onto thevalve.

X Make sure on/off switchA of the tyreinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert plug? into the cigarette lightersocket or into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.

X Press the Start/Stop button once.orX Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

462 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtyres

X Press on/off switchA on the tyre inflationcompressor to I.The tyre inflation compressor is switchedon. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.

X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pres-sure.The specified tyre pressure is printed onthe yellow label of the emergency sparewheel.

X When the specified tyre pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA on theelectric air pump to 0.The tyre inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock.

X If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci-fied pressure, press pressure release valvebutton; until the correct tyre pressurehas been reached.

X Unscrew union nut: on the air hose fromthe valve.

X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsibleemergency spare wheel valve again.

X Stow plug? and the air hose in the lowersection of the blower housing.

X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in thevehicle.

Emergency spare wheel 463

Wheelsandtyres

Z

Technical data

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel5

Tyres Light-alloy wheels

T 135/80 R17 103 MTyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 17 H2 ET 19.5

5 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

464 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtyres

Useful information ............................ 466Information on technical data ......... 466Vehicle electronics ........................... 466Identification plates ......................... 468Service products and capacities ..... 468Vehicle data ....................................... 476Trailer tow hitch ................................ 477

465

Technicaldata

Useful information



Information on technical data

You can find current technical data on theInternet on our Mercedes‑Benz homepage.

i The technical data was determined inaccordance with EU Directives. All dataapplies to the vehicle's standard equip-ment. The data may therefore differ forvehicles with optional equipment. You canobtain further information from aMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine electron-ics! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, suchas control units, sensors, actuating com-ponents and connector leads, at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Vehicle componentsmay otherwise wear more quickly and thevehicle's operating permit may be invalida-ted.

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGIf RF transmitters are tampered with or notproperly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radi-ation they emit can interfere with the vehicleelectronics. This may jeopardise the opera-tional safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.You should have all work on electrical andelectronic components carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you use the RF transmitter in the vehicle inan improper way, its electromagnetic radia-tion can disrupt vehicle electronics, e.g. if:Rthe RF transmitter is not connected to anexterior aerialRthe exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or isnot a low-reflection aerial

This can jeopardise the operating safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted ata qualified specialist workshop. When oper-ating in the vehicle, always connect the RFtransmitter to the low-reflection exterior aer-ial.

! The operating permitmay be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use ofRF transmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditions mustbe complied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible out-put in these wavebands.Ronly approved aerial positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and to thehealth of others. The use of an exterior aerialtakes into consideration the scientific discus-

466 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

sion surrounding the possible health riskposed by electromagnetic fields.

Approved aerial positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear wing? Boot lid

i On vehicles with panorama sliding sun-roof, fitting an aerial to the front or rear roofarea is not permitted.On the rear wing, it is recommended thatyou position the aerial on the side of thevehicle closest to the centre of the road.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609(Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for fittingaftermarket radio frequency transmittingequipment") when retrofitting RF (radio fre-quency) transmitters. Comply with the legalrequirements for add-on parts.If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or aerialconnections intended for use with the basicwiring. Be sure to observe themanufacturer'sadditional instructions when installing.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or aerial positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the aerial must not exceed thefollowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 78 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle with-out restrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/LTE)

There are no restrictionswhen positioning theaerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol-lowing wavebands:Rtrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandRGSM/UMTS/LTE

Vehicle electronics 467

Technicaldata

Z

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front right-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: Vehicle identification plate; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)= EU type approval number (only for certain

countries)? VINA Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight (kg)B Maximum permissible gross weight of

vehicle/trailer combination (kg) (only forspecific countries)

C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)E Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is example data. This data is dif-ferent for every vehicle and can deviate

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehi-cle's identification plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering; upwards.The VIN is visible:.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 468).Only for certain countries: the VIN can also befound at the lower edge of the windscreen.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped into the crank-case. You can obtain further information fromany qualified specialist workshop.

Service products and capacities


G WARNINGService product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing and dis-posing off service products. Always store ser-vice products in the sealed original container.Always keep service products out of the reachof children.

468 Service products and capacitiesTechnicaldata

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally-responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RfuelsRexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g.AdBlue®Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RcoolantRbrake fluidRwindscreen washer fluidRclimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOwner's Manual in the appropriate section.You can identify service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tions on the container:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40Further information can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre or on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefuelling.

G WARNINGFuels are poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a danger of injury.Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contactwith skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuelvapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of chil-dren.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skinwith water and soap immediately.RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thor-oughly with clean water immediately. Seekimmediate medical attention.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medi-cal attention. Do not induce vomiting.RChange any clothing that has come intocontact with fuel immediately.

Service products and capacities 469

Technicaldata

Z

Tank capacityThe total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,depending on the vehicle equipment.

Model Total capacity

C 180 (only for certaincountries)C 200 (only for certaincountries)C 250 (only for certaincountries)C 220 BlueTEC BlueEF-FICIENCY Edition (onlyfor certain countries)

66.0 l

C 180 BlueEFFICIENCYEdition

41.0 l

C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 50.0 l

All other models 41.0 lor

66.0 l

Model Of whichreserve fuel

All models Approx. 7.0 l

Petrol

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with apetrol engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrongfuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuelsystem. Even small amounts of the wrongfuel can result in damage to the fuel systemand the engine. Notify a qualified specialistworkshop and have the fuel tank and fuellines drained completely.

! Only refuel using premium-grade unlea-ded petrol with at least 95 ROZ/85 MOZ,that conforms to European standardEN 228 or E DIN 51626–1 or an equivalentspecification.

Fuel of this specification can contain up to10 % ethanol.Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 orE DIN 51626–1 can lead to increased wearand damage the engine and exhaust sys-tem.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (petrol with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (petrol with 15% methanol)RM30 (petrol with 30% methanol)RM85 (petrol with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)Rpetrol with additives containing metalRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Petrol must only be mixedwith additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain fur-ther information from any Mercedes-BenzService Centre.

Usually you will find information about thefuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-tion staff.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10fuel.

C 180, C 250: as a temporary measure, if therecommended fuel is not available, you mayalso use regular unleaded petrol with anoctane rating of 93 RON/83 MON.All othermodels: as a temporary measure, ifthe recommended fuel is not available, youmay also use regular unleaded petrol with an


octane rating of 91 RON/82 MON. This mayreduce engine performance and increase fuelconsumption. Avoid driving at full throttle andsudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuelwith a lower RON/MON.

i In some countries, the available petrolmay not be sufficiently low in sulphur. Thisfuel can temporarily produce unpleasantodours, especially on short journeys. Assoon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odoursare reduced.

Information on refuelling (Y page 201).

C 200, C 250! Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-freeunleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/85 MON that conforms to European stand-ard EN 228 or an equivalent specification.You could otherwise impair engine outputor damage the emission control system.

i In some countries, the available petrolmay not be sufficiently low in sulphur. Thisfuel can temporarily produce unpleasantodours, especially on short journeys. Assoon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odoursare reduced.

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue build-up. Petrol mustonly bemixedwith additives recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instruc-tions for use in the product description.More information about recommendedadditives can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. In

this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may bemixedwith the cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz. Always observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel gradeG WARNINGIf you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flashpoint of this fuel mixture is lower than that ofpure diesel fuel. When the engine is running,components in the exhaust system may over-heat unnoticed. There is a risk of fire.Never refuel with petrol. Never add petrol todiesel fuel.

! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel thatconforms to the European standard EN 590or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that doesnot conform to EN 590 can lead toincreased wear as well as damage to theengine and exhaust system.

! Do not use the following:Rmarine dieselRheating oilRbio-dieselRvegetable oilRpetrolRparaffinRkeroseneDo not mix such fuels with diesel fuel anddo not use any special additives. Other-wise, engine damage may occur.

! Vehicles with diesel particle filters: incountries outside the EU, only use low sul-phur Euro diesel with a sulphur content ofunder 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emissioncontrol system could be damaged.

! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-ter: in countries where only diesel fuel witha high sulphur content is available, you willneed to carry out your vehicle's oil change


Technicaldata

Z

at shorter intervals. More informationabout the interval for oil change can beobtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Usually you will find information about thefuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-tion staff.Information on refuelling (Y page 201).

Low outside temperaturesIn wintermonths, diesel fuel with an improvedcold flow quality is available. In Europe, theEN 590 standard defines various climate-dependent temperature categories. Malfunc-tions can be avoided by refuelling with dieselfuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi-cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually lowoutside temperatures, it is possible that theflow characteristics of the diesel fuel could beinsufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel fromwarmer areas may not be suitable for opera-tion in colder climatic conditions.

i Further information on country-specificfuel properties and fuel types with low-tem-perature resistance can be obtained fromoil companies, e.g. at filling stations.

Fuel consumption information

H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow

You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.

The vehiclewill usemore fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin urban trafficRon short journeysRin mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailer

i Only for certain countries: you can findthe current consumption and emission val-ues of your vehicle in the COC documents(EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). Thesedocuments are delivered with your vehicle.The consumption figures were, in eachcase, based on the currently applicable ver-sion:Rfor vehicles that comply with standardsup to and including the EURO 4 standard,in accordance with EU Directive80/1268/EECRfor vehicles that comply with or exceedthe Euro 5 standard, in accordance withRegulation (EC) No. 715/2007

Deviations from these values may occurunder normal operating conditions.

AdBlue®


AdBlue® is a water-soluble fluid for theexhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.It is:Rnon-toxicRcolourless and odourlessRnon-flammableIf you open the AdBlue® tank, small amountsof ammonia vapour may be released.Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour andare particularly irritating to the skin, tomucousmembranes and to the eyes. Youmayexperience a burning sensation in your eyes,nose and throat. You may also experiencecoughing and watery eyes.


Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that maybe released. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperatures

AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx-imately -11 †. The vehicle is delivered fromthe factory equipped with an AdBlue® pre-heating system. Winter operation can thus beguaranteed even at temperatures below-11 †.

Additives

! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue®and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. Thismay destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after-treatment system.

Purity

! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to otherservice products, cleaning agents or dust)lead to:Rincreased emission valuesRdamage to the catalytic converterRengine damageRmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaustgas aftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularlyimportant with respect to avoiding malfunc-tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-ment system.If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank,e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid torefill the tank. The purity of the fluid can nolonger be guaranteed.

Capacities

The total capacity of the AdBlue® tank mayvary, depending on the vehicle equipment.

Model Total capacity

All models 8.5 lor

24.5 l

Engine oil

General notesWhen handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 468).The quality of the engine oil is decisive for thefunction and service life of an engine. Afterextensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approvesengine oils that correspond to the currenttechnical standard.Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approvedengine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benzengines.Further information on tested and approvedengine oils can be obtained from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oilchange carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indica-ted on the oil container by the inscription "MBApproval" and the corresponding designa-tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.You can call up an overview of approvedengine oils on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter-ing the designation, e.g. 229.5.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.


Technicaldata

Z

Petrol engines: in certain countries, differ-ent engine oils can be used, provided that themaintenance intervals are reduced. For moreinformation, please contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Petrol engines MB Approval

All models 229.5

Diesel engines with adiesel particle filter

MB Approval

C 180 BlueTECC 200 BlueTEC

226.51,229.31,

229.51, 229.52

All other models 228.51,229.31,

229.51, 229.52

Diesel engines withouta diesel particle filter

MB Approval

All models 228.3, 228.5,228.51, 229.3,229.31, 229.5,

229.51

i If the engine oils listed in the table are notavailable, youmay add the following engineoils until the next oil change:Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MBApproval 229.1, 229.3 or ACEA A3Rvehicles with a diesel engine: MBApproval 229.1, 229.3, 229.5 or ACEAC3

This must only be added once and theamount must not be greater than 1.0 l.

CapacitiesThe following values refer to an oil change,including the oil filter.

Petrol engines Replacementamount

All models 7.0 l

Diesel engines Replacementamount

C 180 BlueTECC 200 BlueTEC

6.5 l

All other models 6.0 l

Additives

! Do not use any additives with the engineoil. This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosityrating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity,the faster it flows.Engine oil selection is based on the respectiveoutside temperatures and in accordance withthe SAE classification (viscosity). The tableshows youwhich SAE classifications are to beused. The low-temperature properties ofengine oils can be significantly impaired dur-ing operation due to, for example, ageing orsoot and fuel accretion. It is thereforestrongly recommended to observe regular oilchanges using an approved engine oil with theappropriate SAE classification.


Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid continuously absorbs mois-ture from the air. This results in the boilingpoint of the brake fluid lowering. If the boilingpoint of the brake fluid is too low, vapourpockets may form when the brakes are sub-jected to a heavy load. This would impair brak-ing efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.Have the brake fluid renewed at the prescri-bed intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 468).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Service Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in the ServiceBooklet.

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you top upthe antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze isnot spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.

Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter-net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in the ServiceBooklet.

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsiblefor the following:Ranti-corrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present inthe correct concentration, the boiling point ofthe coolant during operation will be approx-imately 130 †.The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -37 †.Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance withMB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.The coolant is checked at every maintenanceinterval at a qualified specialist workshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensures


Technicaldata

Z

adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked at every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Windscreen and headlamp cleaningsystem


G WARNINGIf windscreen washer concentrate comes intocontact with hot components of the engine orthe exhaust system, it can ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.Make sure the windscreen washer concen-trate does not come into contact with the fillerneck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water inthe washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only the washer fluids SummerFit andWinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, thespraying nozzles could become blocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit.

Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tyres- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayloadRvehicle-specific weight information can befound on the vehicle identification plate(Y page 468)Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi-cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).These documents are delivered with yourvehicle

Dimensions and weights

476 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Model ::

Opening height

C 180 BlueEFFI-CIENCY Edition

1763 mm

C 250 BlueTEC4MATIC

1774 mm

C300BlueTECHybrid 1768 mm

All other models 1763 mm

All models

Vehicle length 4686 mm

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

2020 mm

Vehicle width excludingexterior mirrors

1810 mm

Wheelbase 2840 mm

Maximum roof load 75 kg

Maximum boot load 100 kg

Model Vehicleheight

C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1452 mm

C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1447 mm

All other models 1442 mm

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling system maybe necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chas-sis.

The retrofitting of a trailer tow hitch is onlypermissible if a towing weight is specified inyour vehicle documents. If this is not the case,then the vehicle is not approved for the tow-ing of a trailer.For more information, please contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.Towing a trailer is not possible with all mod-els. For further information, see (Y page 284).

: Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch; Overhang dimension= Rear axle centre lineFor trailer towhitches fitted at the factory, theoverhang dimension including the protectivecovering is 1,158 mm.

Trailer tow hitch 477

Technicaldata

Z

Trailer loads

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8%from a standstill).Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284).

Manual transmission Automatic transmission

C 180 1400 kg 1800 kg

C 200 1600 kg 1800 kg

C 220 BlueTEC 1800 kg 1800 kg


C 180 BlueTEC 1800 kg

C 250 1800 kg

C 220 CDI 1800 kg


C 250 BlueTEC 4MATIC 1800 kg

C 300 BlueTEC Hybrid 1800 kg

Manual transmission


Permissible trailer load, braked (at aminimumgradient-climbing capability of 12%from a standstill).Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284).


C 180 1400 kg 1800 kg

C 200 1600 kg 1800 kg




C 250 1800 kg

C 220 CDI 1800 kg

478 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata





Manual transmission


Permissible trailer load, unbrakedTowing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284).


C 180 700 kg 715 kg

C 200 725 kg 735 kg




C 250 735 kg

C 220 CDI 750 kg




Manual transmission


Maximum drawbar noseweight

! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight.Do not use a noseweight of less than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.

Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284).The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.


Technicaldata

Z


C 180 75 kg 75 kg

C 200 75 kg 75 kg



C 180 BlueTEC 75 kg

C 250 75 kg

C 220 CDI 75 kg

C 250 BlueTEC 75 kg



Manual transmission

C 200 BlueTEC 75 kg

However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer tow hitchidentification plate. In addition, a distinction should be made between towing a trailer andusing a carrier system on the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch.Note also that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight.You can attach carrier systems, e.g. bicycle racks or load-bearing implements, on the ballcoupling. The maximum noseweight of 75 kg applies when using carrier systems on the ballcoupling.

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailerTowing a trailer is not possible with all models. For further information, see (Y page 284).


C 180 1170 kg 1170 kg

C 200 1190 kg 1185 kg




C 250 1180 kg

480 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata


C 220 CDI 1145 kg




Manual transmission



Technicaldata

Z

Mercedes-Benz C-Class 2014 Saloon Owner's Manual PDF ...

Documents

Transcript of Mercedes-Benz C-Class 2014 Saloon Owner's Manual PDF ...